729053
602
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/610
Pagina verder
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
ii
Vigor2620 LTE Series
LTE Router
User’s Guide
Version: 1.01
Firmware Version: V3.8.11
(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)
Date: April 26, 2019
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
iii
Copyrights
© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without
written permission from the copyright holders.
Trademarks
The following trademarks are used in this document:
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
Safety Instructions
Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.
The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel.
Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.
Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.
The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.
Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components
may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.
Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.
Keep the package out of reach of children.
When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.
Warranty
We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship
or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your
purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon
proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials,
we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either
parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition.
Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and
will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused,
tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does
not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the
usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and
online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to
notify any person of such revision or changes.
Be a Registered Owner
Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.DrayTek.com.
Firmware & Tools Updates
Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult
the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.
More update, please visit www.draytek.com.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
i
v
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
o
o
f
f
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
s
s
Part I Installation.................................................................................................................i
I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 2
I-2 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................... 6
I-2-1 Network Connection via LTE............................................................................................... 6
I-2-2 Network Connection via DSL .............................................................................................. 7
I-2-3 Wall-Mounted Installation .................................................................................................... 8
I-3 Accessing Web Page.................................................................................................................... 9
I-4 Changing Password.....................................................................................................................11
I-5 Dashboard................................................................................................................................... 12
I-5-1 Virtual Panel ...................................................................................................................... 13
I-5-2 Name with a Link............................................................................................................... 13
I-5-3 Quick Access for Common Used Menu ............................................................................ 14
I-5-4 GUI Map ............................................................................................................................ 15
I-5-5 Web Console..................................................................................................................... 16
I-5-6 Config Backup ................................................................................................................... 16
I-5-7 Logout................................................................................................................................ 17
I-5-8 Online Status..................................................................................................................... 17
I-5-8-1 Physical Connection ......................................................................17
I-5-8-2 Virtual WAN ...............................................................................19
I-6 Quick Start Wizard ...................................................................................................................... 20
I-6-1 LTE.................................................................................................................................... 21
I-6-2 WAN1 (ADSL/VDSL2)....................................................................................................... 23
I-6-3 WAN2 (Ethernet) ............................................................................................................... 29
I-7 Service Activation Wizard ........................................................................................................... 38
I-8 Registering Vigor Router............................................................................................................. 40
Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................43
II-1 LTE............................................................................................................................................. 44
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................... 45
II-1-1 General Settings............................................................................................................... 45
II-1-1-1 SMS Quota.................................................................................45
II-1-1-2 SMS Inbox..................................................................................46
II-1-2 SMS Inbox........................................................................................................................ 47
II-1-3 Send SMS ........................................................................................................................ 50
II-1-4 Router Commands ........................................................................................................... 51
II-1-5 Status ............................................................................................................................... 53
II-2 WAN........................................................................................................................................... 55
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................... 56
II-2-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 56
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
v
II-2-1-1 WAN1.......................................................................................56
II-2-1-2 LTE .........................................................................................58
II-2-2 Internet Access................................................................................................................. 59
II-2-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE/PPPoA in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL)..................60
II-2-2-2 Details Page for MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL) .64
II-2-2-3 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN1 (Physical Mode: VDSL2) .........................68
II-2-2-4 Details Page for MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1 (Physical Mode: VDSL2) 71
II-2-2-5 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) ......................74
II-2-2-6 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet).....76
II-2-2-7 Details Page for PPTP ...................................................................80
II-2-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline.........................................................82
II-2-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP .............................................................82
II-2-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC ..........................................................83
II-2-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU.........................................................85
II-2-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client...............................................86
II-2-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 ...................................................87
II-2-2-14 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel..........................................88
II-2-2-15 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd ............................................................90
II-2-3 Multi-PVC/VLAN............................................................................................................... 92
Application Notes....................................................................................................................... 97
A-1 How to configure IPv6 on WAN interface? ................................................97
II-3 LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 102
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 104
II-3-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 104
II-3-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup...................... 106
II-3-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ................................................................. 108
II-3-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet .................................................. 110
II-3-1-4 Details Page for LAN IPv6 Setup..................................................... 112
II-3-1-5 Advanced DHCP Options .............................................................. 115
II-3-2 VLAN .............................................................................................................................. 117
II-3-3 Bind IP to MAC............................................................................................................... 120
II-4 NAT .......................................................................................................................................... 124
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 125
II-4-1 Port Redirection.............................................................................................................. 125
II-4-2 DMZ Host ....................................................................................................................... 129
II-4-3 Open Ports ..................................................................................................................... 132
II-4-4 ALG................................................................................................................................. 134
II-5 Applications.............................................................................................................................. 136
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 137
II-5-1 Dynamic DNS................................................................................................................. 137
II-5-2 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 140
II-5-3 RADIUS.......................................................................................................................... 143
II-5-4 UPnP .............................................................................................................................. 144
II-5-5 IGMP............................................................................................................................... 145
II-5-5-1 General Setting ........................................................................ 145
II-5-5-2 Working Group ......................................................................... 146
II-5-6 SMS Alert Service .......................................................................................................... 147
Application Notes..................................................................................................................... 148
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
vi
A-1 How to use DrayDDNS? ..................................................................... 148
A-2 How to Configure Customized DDNS?.................................................... 153
II-6 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 157
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 158
II-6-1 Static Route.................................................................................................................... 158
Part III Wireless LAN......................................................................................................163
III-1 Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................................... 164
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 168
III-1-1 Wireless Wizard............................................................................................................. 168
III-1-2 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 171
III-1-3 Security.......................................................................................................................... 173
III-1-4 Access Control .............................................................................................................. 175
III-1-5 WPS............................................................................................................................... 176
III-1-6 WDS .............................................................................................................................. 178
III-1-7 Advanced Setting .......................................................................................................... 181
III-1-8 AP Discovery................................................................................................................. 184
III-1-9 Station List..................................................................................................................... 185
Part IV VPN.....................................................................................................................187
IV-1 VPN and Remote Access ....................................................................................................... 188
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 189
IV-1-1 VPN Client Wizard ........................................................................................................ 189
IV-1-2 VPN Server Wizard....................................................................................................... 195
IV-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................ 199
IV-1-4 PPP General Setup....................................................................................................... 200
IV-1-5 IPsec General Setup..................................................................................................... 202
IV-1-6 IPsec Peer Identity........................................................................................................ 204
IV-1-7 Remote Dial-in User...................................................................................................... 206
IV-1-8 LAN to LAN ................................................................................................................... 209
IV-1-9 Connection Management.............................................................................................. 219
IV-2 SSL VPN................................................................................................................................. 220
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 221
IV-2-1 General Setup............................................................................................................... 221
IV-2-2 User Account................................................................................................................. 222
IV-2-3 SSL Portal Online User................................................................................................. 226
IV-3 Certificate Management.......................................................................................................... 227
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 228
IV-3-1 Local Certificate ............................................................................................................ 228
IV-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate................................................................................................... 232
IV-3-3 Certificate Backup......................................................................................................... 234
Part V Security ...............................................................................................................235
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
vii
V-1 Firewall..................................................................................................................................... 236
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 238
V-1-1 General Setup................................................................................................................ 238
V-1-2 Filter Setup..................................................................................................................... 243
V-1-3 DoS Defense.................................................................................................................. 252
V-1-3-1 DoS Defense............................................................................. 252
V-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense....................................................................... 255
Application Notes..................................................................................................................... 256
A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet ........................ 256
V-2 Central Security Management (CSM)...................................................................................... 260
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 261
V-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile ............................................................................................... 261
V-2-2 URL Content Filter Profile .............................................................................................. 263
V-2-3 Web Content Filter Profile.............................................................................................. 267
Application Notes..................................................................................................................... 271
A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor ................................................. 271
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL
Content Filter.................................................................................... 276
Part VI Management ......................................................................................................283
VI-1 System Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 284
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 285
VI-1-1 System Status............................................................................................................... 285
VI-1-2 TR-069 .......................................................................................................................... 287
VI-1-3 Administrator Password................................................................................................ 289
VI-1-4 User Password.............................................................................................................. 290
VI-1-5 Configuration Backup.................................................................................................... 292
VI-1-6 Syslog/Mail Alert ........................................................................................................... 294
VI-1-7 Time and Date............................................................................................................... 296
VI-1-8 SNMP............................................................................................................................ 297
VI-1-9 Management ................................................................................................................. 299
VI-1-10 Panel Control .............................................................................................................. 302
VI-1-11 Self-Signed Certificate ................................................................................................ 303
VI-1-12 Reboot System............................................................................................................ 305
VI-1-13 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................... 306
VI-1-14 Activation..................................................................................................................... 307
VI-2 Bandwidth Management......................................................................................................... 309
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 311
VI-2-1 Sessions Limit............................................................................................................... 311
VI-2-2 Bandwidth Limit............................................................................................................. 313
VI-2-3 Quality of Service.......................................................................................................... 315
Application Notes..................................................................................................................... 322
A-1 How to Optimize the Bandwidth through QoS Technology .......................... 322
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
viii
VI-3 Central Management (AP)...................................................................................................... 326
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 327
VI-3-1 Dashboard..................................................................................................................... 327
VI-3-2 Status............................................................................................................................ 328
VI-3-3 WLAN Profile................................................................................................................. 329
VI-3-4 AP Maintenance............................................................................................................ 334
VI-3-5 Traffic Graph ................................................................................................................. 335
VI-3-6 Temperature Sensor..................................................................................................... 336
VI-3-7 Event Log...................................................................................................................... 336
VI-3-8 Total Traffic ................................................................................................................... 337
VI-3-9 Station Number ............................................................................................................. 337
VI-3-10 Load Balance .............................................................................................................. 338
Part VII Others................................................................................................................341
VII-1 Objects Settings..................................................................................................................... 342
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 343
VII-1-1 IP Object ...................................................................................................................... 343
VII-1-2 IP Group....................................................................................................................... 347
VII-1-3 IPv6 Object................................................................................................................... 348
VII-1-4 IPv6 Group................................................................................................................... 350
VII-1-5 Service Type Object..................................................................................................... 351
VII-1-6 Service Type Group ..................................................................................................... 353
VII-1-7 Keyword Object............................................................................................................ 355
VII-1-8 Keyword Group ............................................................................................................ 357
VII-1-9 File Extension Object................................................................................................... 358
VII-1-10 SMS Service Object................................................................................................... 360
VII-1-11 Notification Object...................................................................................................... 363
VII-1-12 String Object .............................................................................................................. 365
Application Notes..................................................................................................................... 366
A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN
Disconnection .................................................................................... 366
Part VIII Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................371
VIII-1 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................... 372
Web User Interface.................................................................................................................. 373
VIII-1-1 Dial-out Triggering....................................................................................................... 373
VIII-1-2 Routing Table.............................................................................................................. 374
VIII-1-3 ARP Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 375
VIII-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table ................................................................................................. 376
VIII-1-5 DHCP Table................................................................................................................ 377
VIII-1-6 NAT Sessions Table ................................................................................................... 378
VIII-1-7 DNS Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 379
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
ix
VIII-1-8 Ping Diagnosis ............................................................................................................ 380
VIII-1-9 Data Flow Monitor....................................................................................................... 381
VIII-1-10 Traffic Graph ............................................................................................................. 384
VIII-1-11 Trace Route .............................................................................................................. 385
VIII-1-12 IPv6 TSPC Status ..................................................................................................... 386
VIII-1-13 DSL Status................................................................................................................ 386
VIII-1-14 DoS Flood Table....................................................................................................... 387
VIII-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not..................................................................... 389
VIII-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not................... 390
VIII-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer .............................................................................. 393
VIII-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not ......................................................................... 395
VIII-6 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary.................................................................. 396
VIII-7 Contacting DrayTek .............................................................................................................. 397
Part IX Telnet Commands..............................................................................................399
Accessing Telnet of Vigor2620....................................................................................................... 400
Index ...............................................................................................................................593
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
I
I
I
I
n
n
s
s
t
t
a
a
l
l
l
l
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to
install the device in hardware and software.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
1
I
I
-
-
1
1
I
I
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
d
d
u
u
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
T
T
h
h
i
i
s
s
i
i
s
s
a
a
g
g
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
i
i
c
c
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
a
a
l
l
v
v
e
e
r
r
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
o
o
f
f
t
t
h
h
e
e
u
u
s
s
e
e
r
r
g
g
u
u
i
i
d
d
e
e
.
.
S
S
p
p
e
e
c
c
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
,
,
c
c
o
o
m
m
p
p
a
a
t
t
i
i
b
b
i
i
l
l
i
i
t
t
y
y
a
a
n
n
d
d
f
f
e
e
a
a
t
t
u
u
r
r
e
e
s
s
v
v
a
a
r
r
y
y
b
b
y
y
r
r
e
e
g
g
i
i
o
o
n
n
.
.
F
F
o
o
r
r
s
s
p
p
e
e
c
c
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
u
u
s
s
e
e
r
r
g
g
u
u
i
i
d
d
e
e
s
s
s
s
u
u
i
i
t
t
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
y
y
o
o
u
u
r
r
r
r
e
e
g
g
i
i
o
o
n
n
o
o
r
r
p
p
r
r
o
o
d
d
u
u
c
c
t
t
,
,
p
p
l
l
e
e
a
a
s
s
e
e
c
c
o
o
n
n
t
t
a
a
c
c
t
t
l
l
o
o
c
c
a
a
l
l
d
d
i
i
s
s
t
t
r
r
i
i
b
b
u
u
t
t
o
o
r
r
.
.
Vigor2620 LTE series is a router equipped with an LTE module which allows you to access the
Internet via a SIM card.
It integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works
well with large bandwidth. By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware
encryption of AES/DES/3DES, the router increases the performance of VPN greatly, and offers
several protocols (such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with VPN tunnels.
The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set
firewall policy with ease. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and
management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By
the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside
and control inside. Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe.
On the Wireless-equipped models each of the wireless SSIDs can also be grouped within one of
the VLANs.
Vigor2620 series provides two-level management to simplify the configuration of network
connection. The user mode allows user accessing into WEB interface via simple configuration.
However, if users want to have advanced configurations, they can access into WEB interface
through admin mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
2
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
I
I
n
n
d
d
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
o
o
r
r
s
s
a
a
n
n
d
d
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
o
o
r
r
s
s
Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and
connectors first.
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
2
2
6
6
2
2
0
0
L
L
/
/
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
2
2
6
6
2
2
0
0
L
L
e
e
LED Status Explanation
Off The router is powered off.
Blinking The router is powered on and running normally.
On The router is ready to access Internet.
Off The router is not ready to access Internet.
Blinking Slowly: The DSL connection is ready.
Quickly: The DSL connection is establishing.
On Physical line has been connected.
Blinking The connection is training.
On The LAN port is connected.
(for Vigor2620L)
Blinking The data is transmitting through the LAN port.
On The LAN port is connected.
(for
Vigor2620Le)
Blinking The data is transmitting through the LAN port.
On LTE device is connected and ready for use.
Off LTE device is not detected, or has serious problem
(e.g., no SIM card, SIM pin error, SIM deactivated, and
etc.).
Blinking Vigor device performs initial access procedure.
On SIM card is inserted into the slot and detected by Vigor
device.
(for Vigor2620L)
Blinking No SIM card in detected.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
3
Vigor2620L,
Vigor2620Le,
Interface Description
Factory Reset
Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is
blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you
see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button.
Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.
DSL
Connecter for accessing the Internet.
SIM2/SIM1
SIM card slot(s).
P2-P1
(Vigor2620L)
Connecters for local network devices.
P4-P1
(Vigor2620Le)
Connecters for local network devices.
ON/OFF Power Switch.
PWR Connecter for a power adapter.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
4
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
2
2
6
6
2
2
0
0
L
L
n
n
/
/
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
2
2
6
6
2
2
0
0
L
L
n
n
e
e
LED Status Explanation
Off The router is powered off.
Blinking The router is powered on and running normally.
On The router is ready to access Internet.
Off The router is not ready to access Internet.
Blinking Slowly: The DSL connection is ready.
Quickly: The DSL connection is establishing.
On Physical line has been connected.
Blinking The connection is training.
On The LAN port is connected.
(for
Vigor2620Ln)
Blinking The data is transmitting through the LAN port.
On The LAN port is connected.
(for
Vigor2620Lne)
Blinking The data is transmitting through the LAN port.
On LTE device is connected and ready for use.
Off LTE device is not detected, or has serious problem
(e.g., no SIM card, SIM pin error, SIM deactivated, and
etc.).
Blinking Vigor device performs initial access procedure.
On SIM card is inserted into the slot and detected by Vigor
device.
(for
Vigor2620Ln)
Blinking No SIM card in detected.
On Vigor device is ready for sending wireless signal.
Off No wireless signal is sent out.
Blinking The data is transmitting via wireless connection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
5
Vigor2620Ln,
Vigor2620Lne,
Interface Description
Wireless LAN
ON/OFF/WPS
Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the wireless
function is ready, the green LED will be on.
Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the
WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the LED
will be off.
When WPS function is enabled by web user interface, press this
button for more than 2 seconds to wait for client’s device making
network connection through WPS.
Factory Reset
Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is
blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you
see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button.
Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.
DSL
Connecter for accessing the Internet.
SIM2/SIM1
(Vigor2620Ln)
SIM card slot(s).
SIM1
(Vigor2620Lne)
SIM card slot(s).
P2-P1
Connecters for local network devices.
ON/OFF Power Switch.
PWR Connecter for a power adapter.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
6
I
I
-
-
2
2
H
H
a
a
r
r
d
d
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
I
I
n
n
s
s
t
t
a
a
l
l
l
l
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
N
N
e
e
t
t
w
w
o
o
r
r
k
k
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
v
v
i
i
a
a
L
L
T
T
E
E
Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly. In this
section, Vigor2620n is taken as an example.
1. Install the SIM card into the card slot. The back plate of the SIM card slot must be
removed first and the direction of card notch must be on the left side.
After installing the SIM card, fasten the back plate again.
2. Connect to your computer with a RJ-45 cable.
3. Connect one end of the power cord to the power port of this device. Connect the other
end to the wall outlet of electricity.
4. Power on the router.
5. Check the power, LTE and LAN LEDs to assure network connections.
(For the hardware connection, we take “n” model as an example.)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
7
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
N
N
e
e
t
t
w
w
o
o
r
r
k
k
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
v
v
i
i
a
a
D
D
S
S
L
L
1. Connect the DSL interface to the external ADSL splitter with an ADSL line cable.
2. Connect to your computer with a RJ-45 cable.
3. Connect one end of the power cord to the power port of this device. Connect the other
end to the wall outlet of electricity.
4. Power on the router.
5. Check the power and DSL, LAN LEDs to assure network connections.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
8
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
W
W
a
a
l
l
l
l
-
-
M
M
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
e
e
d
d
I
I
n
n
s
s
t
t
a
a
l
l
l
l
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 has keyhole type mounting slots on the underside.
1. A template is provided on the Vigor2620 packaging box to enable you to space the screws
correctly on the wall.
2. Place the template on the wall and drill the holes according to the recommended
instruction.
3. Fit screws into the wall using the appropriate type of wall plug.
Note
The recommended drill diameter shall be 6.5mm (1/4”).
4. When you finished about procedure, the router has been mounted on the wall firmly.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
9
I
I
-
-
3
3
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
n
n
g
g
W
W
e
e
b
b
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.
You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set
up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of
Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later
section - Trouble Shooting of the guide.
2. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window
will be open to ask for username and password.
3. Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.
Info
If you fail to access to the web configuration, please go to “Trouble
Shooting” for detecting and solving your problem.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
10
4. Now, the Main Screen will appear. Take Vigor2620Ln as as example.
Info
The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the
router you have.
5. The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting
is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes
without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
11
I
I
-
-
4
4
C
C
h
h
a
a
n
n
g
g
i
i
n
n
g
g
P
P
a
a
s
s
s
s
w
w
o
o
r
r
d
d
Please change the password for the original security of the router.
1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will
open to ask for username and password.
2. Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user
interface with admin mode.
3. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.
4. Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password. Type
New Password and Confirm Password. Then click OK to continue.
Info
The maximum length of the password you can set is 23 characters.
5. Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the
Web user interface for this router.
Info
Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user
interface is still “admin”.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
12
I
I
-
-
5
5
D
D
a
a
s
s
h
h
b
b
o
o
a
a
r
r
d
d
Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access,
IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access.
Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.
A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following
figure:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
13
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
1
1
V
V
i
i
r
r
t
t
u
u
a
a
l
l
P
P
a
a
n
n
e
e
l
l
On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router)
displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you
move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, or LAN1 – LAN4, related
web setting page will be open for you to configure if required.
Port Color Description
Black It means the router or the function is not working. LED
Green It means the router or the function is working.
For detailed information about the LED display, refer to I-1-1 LED Indicators and
Connectors.
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
2
2
N
N
a
a
m
m
e
e
w
w
i
i
t
t
h
h
a
a
L
L
i
i
n
n
k
k
A name with a link (e.g., Router Name, Current Time, LTE and etc.) below means you can
click it to open the configuration page for modification.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
1
4
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
3
3
Q
Q
u
u
i
i
c
c
k
k
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
f
f
o
o
r
r
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
o
o
n
n
U
U
s
s
e
e
d
d
M
M
e
e
n
n
u
u
All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for
your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be
accessed in a quick way just for convenience.
Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions
grouped under Quick Access.
The function links of System Status, Dynamic DDNS, TR-069, IM/P2P Block, Schedule,
Syslog/Mail Alert, RADIUS, Firewall Object Setting and Data Flow Monitor are displayed here.
Move your mouse cursor on any one of the links and click on it. The corresponding setting
page will be open immediately.
In addition, quick access for VPN security settings such as Remote Dial-in User and LAN to
LAN are located on the bottom of this page. Scroll down the page to find them and use them
if required.
Note that there is a plus (
) icon located on the left side of LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor. Click
it to review the LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor connection(s) used presently.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
15
Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in
the field of Connected.
All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address
indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port.
The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
4
4
G
G
U
U
I
I
M
M
a
a
p
p
All the functions the router supports are listed with table clearly in this page. Users can click
the function link to access into the setting page of the function for detailed configuration.
Click the icon on the top of the main screen to display all the functions.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
16
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
5
5
W
W
e
e
b
b
C
C
o
o
n
n
s
s
o
o
l
l
e
e
It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using
web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The
functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user
interface.
Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
6
6
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
u
u
p
p
There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It
allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by
using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup.
Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen and a pop up dialog will appear.
Click Save to store the setting.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
1
7
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
7
7
L
L
o
o
g
g
o
o
u
u
t
t
Click this icon to exit the web user interface.
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
8
8
O
O
n
n
l
l
i
i
n
n
e
e
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
8
8
-
-
1
1
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN
connection status, ADSL information, and so on.
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
4
4
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
18
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:
Item Description
LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for
WAN interface.
Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address
for WAN interface.
IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN
interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3
/WAN4 Status
Enable – Yes in red means such interface is available but not
enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled.
Line – Displays the physical connection (VDSL, ADSL,
Ethernet, or USB) of this interface.
Name – Display the name of the router.
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
GW IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the
WAN interface.
TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
WAN interface.
RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets
at the WAN interface.
RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN
interface.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
19
Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:
Item Description
LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN
interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
LAN interface.
RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN
interface.
WAN IPv6 Status Enable – No in red means such interface is available but not
enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled. No in
red means such interface is not available.
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., TSPC).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
Gateway IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Info
The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface is ready for
accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface
is not ready for accessing Internet.
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
8
8
-
-
2
2
V
V
i
i
r
r
t
t
u
u
a
a
l
l
W
W
A
A
N
N
Such page displays the virtual WAN connection information.
Virtual WAN are used by TR-069 management, and so on.
The field of Application will list the purpose of such WAN connection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
20
I
I
-
-
6
6
Q
Q
u
u
i
i
c
c
k
k
S
S
t
t
a
a
r
r
t
t
W
W
i
i
z
z
a
a
r
r
d
d
Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. Go to
Wizards>>Quick Start Wizard. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login
password. After typing the password, please click Next.
On the next page, please select the WAN interface that you use. If DSL interface is used,
please choose WAN1; if USB interface is used, please choose LTE. Then click Next for next
step. WAN1 and LTE will bring up different configuration page. Here, we take LTE as an
example.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
21
I
I
-
-
6
6
-
-
1
1
L
L
T
T
E
E
1. Choose LTE. Enter a string as Display Name (optional). Click Next.
2. After clicking Next, you will get the following web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Internet Access Specify a connection mode from the drop down menu.
SIM PIN code Enter PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access
Internet.
Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode
specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode,
the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual
wireless signal automatically.
APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
22
Item Description
required by some ISPs.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for
viewing summary of such connection.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
23
I
I
-
-
6
6
-
-
2
2
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
(
(
A
A
D
D
S
S
L
L
/
/
V
V
D
D
S
S
L
L
2
2
)
)
WAN1 is specified for ADSL or VDSL2 connection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Display Name Enter a name to identify such WAN.
Physical Mode Display the physical mode of this WAN interface.
DSL Mode Specify a DSL mode from the drop down menu.
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
E
E
/
/
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
A
A
1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following
page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
2
4
Item Description
Protocol There are two modes offered for you to choose for WAN1
interface.
Choose PPPoE/PPPoA as the protocol.
For ADSL Only Such field is provided for ADSL only. You have to choose
encapsulation and Enter the values for VPI and VCI. Or, click
Auto detect to find out the best values.
Fixed IP Click Yes to enable Fixed IP feature.
IP Address Enter the IP address if Fixed IP is enabled.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address as the default gateway.
Primary DNS Enter the primary IP address for the router.
Secondary DNS Enter secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
VLAN Tag insertion
(VDSL2)/(ADSL)
Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the WAN while sending them out.
Please Enter the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by WAN1.
Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.
Tag value – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The
range is from 0 to 4095.
Priority – Enter the packet priority number for such VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 7.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
2. After finished the above settings, simply click Next. Manually enter the
Username/Password provided by your ISP
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
25
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Service Name
(Optional)
Enter the description of the specific network service.
Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Confirm Password ReEnter the password.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
3. After finished the above settings, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
26
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
2
7
M
M
P
P
o
o
A
A
/
/
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
o
o
r
r
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following
page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Protocol There are two modes offered for you to choose for WAN1
interface.
Choose MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP as the protocol.
For ADSL Only Such field is provided for ADSL only. You have to choose
encapsulation and Enter the values for VPI and VCI. Or, click
Auto detect to find out the best values.
Fixed IP Click Yes to enable Fixed IP feature.
IP Address Enter the IP address if Fixed IP is enabled.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address as the default gateway.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
28
Primary DNS Enter the primary IP address for the router.
Secondary DNS Enter secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
VLAN Tag insertion
(VDSL2)/(ADSL)
Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the WAN while sending them out.
Please Enter the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by WAN1.
Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.
Tag value – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The
range is from 0 to 4095.
Priority – Enter the packet priority number for such VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 7.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
2. Please Enter the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP.
Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
3. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
4. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
29
I
I
-
-
6
6
-
-
3
3
W
W
A
A
N
N
2
2
(
(
E
E
t
t
h
h
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
)
)
WAN2 can be configured for physical mode of Ethernet. If you choose Ethernet WAN2, please
specify a physical type. Then, click Next.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Display Name Type a name for the router.
Physical Mode Display the physical mode of this WAN interface.
Physical Type This setting is available when Ethernet is selected as
Physical Mode. In general, Auto negotiation is suggested.
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
E
E
1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click
the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access
Type.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
30
2. Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Service Name
(Optional)
Enter the description of the specific network service.
Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Confirm Password ReEnter the password.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
31
3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for
viewing summary of such connection.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
32
P
P
P
P
T
T
P
P
1. Choose PPTP as the WAN Interface and click the Next button.
2. The following page will be open for you to Enter all the information originally provided
by your ISP.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Confirm Password ReEnter the password.
WAN IP Configuration
Obtain an IP address automatically – the router will get an
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
33
IP address automatically from DHCP server.
Specify an IP address – you have to type relational settings
manually.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask –Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway – Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Primary DNS - Enter the primary IP address for the router.
Secondary DNS - Enter the secondary IP address for
necessity in the future.
PPTP Server Enter the IP address of the server.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
3. Please Enter the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP.
Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
3
4
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
1. Click Static IP as the Internet Access type and click the Next button.
2. The following page will be open for you to Enter the IP address information originally
provided by your ISP.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
WAN IP Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enter the IP address of gateway.
Primary DNS Enter the primary IP address for the router.
Secondary DNS Enter secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
35
3. Click Next for next step.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
36
D
D
H
H
C
C
P
P
1. Click DHCP as the Internet Access type and click the Next button.
2. The following page will be open for you to Enter the IP address information originally
provided by your ISP.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Host Name Enter the name of the host.
Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is
39 characters.
MAC Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address
for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter
the MAC address.
Back Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
3
7
3. After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
38
I
I
-
-
7
7
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
A
A
c
c
t
t
i
i
v
v
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
W
W
i
i
z
z
a
a
r
r
d
d
Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a
quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin
operation, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging into the web
user interface.
Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to activate services without accessing
into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Info
Such function is available only for Admin Mode.
1. Open Wizards>>Service Activation Wizard.
2. In the following page, you can activate the Web content filter services and DNS service
at the same time or individually. When you finish the selection, please click Next.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
39
Info
BPjM is web content filter (WCF) for German Speaking users. It is ideal for your
family to provide more Internet security for youngsters.
Cryan 30-day trial is WCF which offers 30-day trial period. After trial, you can
purchase DrayTek's prepared Cryan GlobalView WCF package from retailing
outlets.
DT-DDNS, developed by DrayTek, offers one year free charge service of
dynamic DNS service for internal use.
3. Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Activate.
Info
The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in
Firewall>>General Setup.
4. Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your
selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
40
I
I
-
-
8
8
R
R
e
e
g
g
i
i
s
s
t
t
e
e
r
r
i
i
n
n
g
g
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any
time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more
service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration.
1 Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as
User Name / Password.
2 Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.
3 A Login page will be shown on the screen. Please Enter the account and password that
you created previously. And click Login.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
41
Info
If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an
Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the
Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account.
4 The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for
the router, then click Add.
5 When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the
database.
6 After clicking OK, you will see the following page. Your router has been registered to
myvigor website successfully.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
42
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
43
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
I
I
I
I
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
v
v
i
i
t
t
y
y
It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in
WAN.
It means local area network. Private IP will be used in
LAN. Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets
regulated and ruled by router. The design of network
structure is related to what type of public IP addresses
coming from your ISP.
When the data flow passing through, the Network
Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will
dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and
the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in
the local area network.
DNS, LAN DNS, IGMP, UPnP, WOL, RADIUS, SMS.
Static Route
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
4
4
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
L
L
T
T
E
E
LTE WAN with SIM card can provide convinent Internet access for Vigor router. However, we
can't stop thinking about what can Vigor router utilize this SIM card to provide more useful
functions for user? Now, we have developed some useful functions for user, such as sending
SMS from a router to report router status, rebooting router remotely via SMS with taking
security into consideration, and so on.
This section can guide you to use the SIM card in LTE WAN to perform SMS related operations.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
45
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
s
s
This page allows you to configure general settings for LTE. When SMS Quota Limit is enabled,
you can specify the number of SMS quota, actions to perform when quota exceeded, and the
period of resetting SMS quota used.
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
S
S
M
M
S
S
Q
Q
u
u
o
o
t
t
a
a
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable SMS Quota Limit Check the box to enable such feature.
Quota Limit Specify the maximum number of sending SMS for LTE.
When quota exceeded There are two actions to be performed when the quota limit
is expired.
Stop sending SMS – If it is checked, no SMS for LTE will be
sent after the quota limit is expired.
Send Mail Alert to Administrator – If it is checkd, a mail
alert will be sent to the administrator when the quota limit is
expired.
Monthly This setting is to offer a mechanism of resetting the number
of SMS sent record every month.
SMS quota resets on day XX at XX … –You can determine the
starting day in one month. The number of SMS sent will be
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
46
reset.
Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle
according to his request.
The number of SMS sent will be reset with an interval of
cycle duration.
Custom – Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short
period is required, use Custom. The period of reset is
between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle
duration by specifying the days and the hours.
Cycle duration: Specify the days to reset the number of
SMS sent. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7
days; 20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time
is up, the router will reset the number of SMS sent
automatically.
Today is day XX in the cycle –Specify the day in the cycle
duration as the starting point which Vigor router will
reset the number of SMS sent. For example, 3 means the
third day of the duration cycle.
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
S
S
M
M
S
S
I
I
n
n
b
b
o
o
x
x
Such page allows you to determine which policy shall be used for SMS inbox/outbox.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
4
7
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
S
S
M
M
S
S
I
I
n
n
b
b
o
o
x
x
This page will list the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card. The SMS Inbox table shows
the received date, the phone number or sender ID where this message was from, and the
beginning of the message content.
Since the data size of one SMS is limited, a long message will be sent by multiple SMS. For the
convenience of users, we provide two modes. Simple Mode
lists SMS messages in order for
received time. Advanced Mode
lists SMS in order for real index in the SIM card. Different SIM
cards have different capacities. In general, it's around 30 to 40 SMS. Please note that the SIM
card can not receive new SMS when all SMS indexes are occupied.
Click the Simple Mode link or the Advanced Mode link below to switch between these two
modes.
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
S
S
i
i
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Mark as Read Those messages in "unread" state are showed in bold text. If
you want to change messages into "read" state, select them
and click the OK button. Checking the checkbox in title will
select all "unread" messages in this page.
Delete If you want to delete messages, select them and click the OK
button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all
messages in this page.
Details If you want to read the full content of the message, click the
View
link of that message to open the following page. It will
change the message into "read" state.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
48
Message Content - Display the full content of the
message.
OK - Return to previous page.
Delete - Click it to delete this message and return to
previous page.
Next - Click it to see the content of next message.
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
A
A
d
d
v
v
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
d
d
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Mark as Read Those SMS in "unread" state are shown in bold text. If you
want to change SMS into "read" state, select them and click
the OK button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all
"unread" SMS in this page.
Delete If you want to delete SMS, select them and click the OK
button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all SMS in
this page.
Index If you want to read the full content of the message of the
SMS, click the index link of that SMS to open the following
page. It will change all SMS of the message into "read" state.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
49
Message Content - Display the full content of the message.
OK - Return to previous page.
Delete - Click it to delete all SMS of this message and return
to previous page.
Next - Click it to see the content of next SMS index.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
50
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
S
S
e
e
n
n
d
d
S
S
M
M
S
S
This page is used to send SMS messages by the LTE SIM card. It also displays the number of SMS
required to send the message.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Recipient Number Type the phone number of the recipient.
The format can be an international phone number
( +8869123455678) or a general phone number(0912345678).
Data Coding Scheme The router will automatically select a suitable Data Coding
Scheme according to the current content in Message. GSM
7-bit and UCS-2 are supported.
Message Type in the message content to send.
The total number of characters that you can type in this field
is 1024.
Send Message Click it to send this SMS message to the recipient
immediately.
View SMS Outbox Cache Display the record of SMS messages sent from the Router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
51
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
s
s
This page allows the user to set function to reboot Vigor router remotely and get the router
status via SMS.
Go to LTE>>Router Commands to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Reboot on SMS Message
Enable with Password /
PIN
To reboot Vigor router remotely via SMS, please check such
box and type the password/PIN number (treated as
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
52
authentication for any mobile phone).
The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and
baseline.
Access Control List Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers.
The phone number specified here is capable of sending SMS
to reboot such Vigor router remotely.
Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified
here are allowed to send SMS to reboot Vigor router if
correct password is given. That is, if it is disabled
(unchecked), any mobile phone can send SMS to reboot such
Vigor router if correct password is given.
Reply with Router Status Message
Enable with Password /
PIN
Users can get the WAN data usage and basic information
about Vigor router (e.g., IP address, MAC address) through
the mobile phone by entering the password/PIN specified in
this field.
The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and
baseline.
Access Control List Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers.
The phone number specified here is capable of getting
related information about Vigor router remotely.
Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified
here are allowed to obtaine related information about Vigor
router if correct password is given. That is, if it is disabled
(unchecked), any mobile phone can get the data of Vigor
router if correct password is given.
Message Contents There are several types of message contents for you to
select. Choose and check the required item, then Vigor
router will offer the status response about that item via SMS.
SMS messages per status
response
Display the total number of the type for status response.
Display the total number of SMS required to send the status
message which contains the current selected Message
Contents.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
53
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
Vigor router with LTE function is capable of accessing into Internet and able to send SMS to
specified mobile phone.
This page will display basic information about the embedded LTE module and the current LTE
connection.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item Description
Status LTE WAN status.
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity of the embedded
LTE module.
IMSI International Mobile Subscripber Identity of the LTE SIM card.
Access Tech Type of LTE connection
(CDMA/GSM/WCDMA/LTE/TD-SCDMA).
Band Band of LTE connection.
Operator ISP name of LTE connection.
Mobile Country Code /
Mobile Network Code /
Location Area Code / Cell
ID :
Base station information.
RSSI Signal Signal strength of LTE connection.
Active Channel Frequency of LTE connection.
Max Channel TX Rate / Maximum TX/RX link rate of LTE connection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
5
4
Max Channel RX Rate
SMS Centre Number The phone number for SMS service of the LTE SIM card.
SMS Service status Whether the SMS service of the LTE SIM card is ready.
SMS Loading Whether the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card have
been loaded to the Router.
New SMS The number of unread SMS in SMS Inbox.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
55
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
W
W
A
A
N
N
It allows users to access Internet.
B
B
a
a
s
s
i
i
c
c
s
s
o
o
f
f
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
(
(
I
I
P
P
)
)
N
N
e
e
t
t
w
w
o
o
r
r
k
k
IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print
server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid
address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre
(NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public
network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the
management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC
has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as
private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:
From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
W
W
h
h
a
a
t
t
a
a
r
r
e
e
P
P
u
u
b
b
l
l
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
A
A
d
d
d
d
r
r
e
e
s
s
s
s
a
a
n
n
d
d
P
P
r
r
i
i
v
v
a
a
t
t
e
e
I
I
P
P
A
A
d
d
d
d
r
r
e
e
s
s
s
s
As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of
host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the
Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to
communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other
network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the
Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate
public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local
area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.
G
G
e
e
t
t
Y
Y
o
o
u
u
r
r
P
P
u
u
b
b
l
l
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
A
A
d
d
d
d
r
r
e
e
s
s
s
s
f
f
r
r
o
o
m
m
I
I
S
S
P
P
In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is
required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access
concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with
significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service
according to user requirement.
When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for
a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated via
PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other
related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
56
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection
modes for WAN in details.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN1and WAN3 respectively.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Click the WAN /LTE interface link under Index to access into
the WAN configuration page.
Enable V means such WAN interface is enabled and ready to be used.
Physical Mode / Type Display the physical mode and physical type of such WAN
interface.
Active Mode Display whether such WAN interface is Active device or
backup device.
Info
In default, each WAN port is enabled.
Click WAN1/WAN2 link to get the following page:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
57
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.
Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.
Display Name Enter the description for such WAN interface.
Physical Mode Display the physical mode of this WAN interface.
DSL Mode Specify the physical mode (Auto, VDSL2 or ADSL) for such
router manually.
DSL Modem Code Choose the correct DSL modem code for ensuring the
network connection.
If you have no idea about the selection, simply choose
Default or contact the dealer for assistance.
VLAN Tag insertion Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the WAN while sending them out.
Please Enter the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by WAN interface.
Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.
Tag value – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The
range is from 0 to 4095.
Priority – Enter the packet priority number for such VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 7.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
58
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
L
L
T
T
E
E
To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3
interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.
Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.
Display Name Enter the description for such WAN interface.
Physical Mode Display the physical mode of this WAN interface.
Active Mode Choose Always On to make the WAN1 connection being
activated always.
Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a
backup connection.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
59
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
This page allows you to set WAN configuration with different modes.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Display the WAN interface.
Display Name It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/LTE that entered in
general setup.
Physical Mode It shows the physical connection for WAN (Ethernet or fiber)
according to the real network connection.
Access Mode Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The
details page of that mode will be popped up. If not, click
Details Page for accessing the page to configure the settings.
Details Page This button will open different web page (based on IPv4)
according to the access mode that you choose in WAN
interface.
IPv6 This button will open different web page (based on Physical
Mode) to setup IPv6 Internet Access Mode for WAN interface.
If IPv6 service is active on this WAN interface, the color of
“IPv6” will become green.
DHCP Client Option This button allows you to configure DHCP client options.
DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and
data information when such function is enabled and
configured.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
60
Enable – Check the box to enable the function of DHCP
Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number
with data. For example,
Option number:100
Data: abcd
When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP
option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.
Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be
overwritten by such function. WAN5 ~ WAN6 can be located
under WAN>>Multi-PVC/VLAN.
Option Number – Type a number for such function.
Note: If you choose to configure option 61 here, the
detailed settings in WAN>>Interface Access will be
overwritten.
DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to be
stored.
Data – Enter the content of the data to be processed by the
function of DHCP option.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
E
E
/
/
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
A
A
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
A
A
D
D
S
S
L
L
)
)
To use PPPoE/PPPoA as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPPoE/PPPoA
tab. The following web page will be shown.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
61
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ADSL Modem Settings Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These
settings configured here are specified for ADSL only.
Multi-PVC channel - The selections displayed here are
determined by the page of Internet Access >> Multi PVCs.
Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen.
VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.
VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.
Encapsulating Type - Drop down the list to choose the type
provided by ISP.
Protocol - Drop down the list to choose the one (PPPoE or
PPPoA) provided by ISP.
If you have already used Quick Start Wizard to set the
protocol, then it is not necessary for you to change any
settings in this group.
Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one
that fits the requirement of your router.
ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
62
Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field.
Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
More Options –It shows optional settings for configuration.
Service Name - Enter the description of the specific
network service.
Separate Account for ADSL – In default, WAN1 supports
VDSL2/ADSL and uses the same PPPoE account and password
for connection. If required, you can configure another
account and password for ADSL connection by checking this
box. If it is checked, the system will ask you to type another
group of account and password additionally.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through PPP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU size start from - Determine the starting point
value of the packet.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
63
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
IP Assignment (IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP
address to you each time you connect to it and request. In
some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the
same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can
fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your
ISP before you want to use this function.
Fixed IP Address– Type in a fixed IP address in the box.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
Dial-Out Schedule You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.
All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >>
Schedule web page and you can use the number that you
have set in that web page.
PPPoE Pass-through The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you
also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local
clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol
is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be
transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server.
Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.
For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same
network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with
the Host PC) to access into Internet.
For Wireless LAN – It is available for n model. If you check
this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another
set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access
into Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
64
Note: To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA
protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave
like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN.
That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection.
MAC Address Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or
specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC
Address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address – Enter the MAC address for the
router manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
M
M
P
P
o
o
A
A
/
/
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
o
o
r
r
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
A
A
D
D
S
S
L
L
)
)
MPoA is a specification that enables ATM services to be integrated with existing LANs, which
use either Ethernet, token-ring or TCP/IP protocols. The goal of MPoA is to allow different
LANs to send packets to each other via an ATM backbone.
To use MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select MPoA
/Static or Dynamic IP from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web
page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
65
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ADSL Modem Settings Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These
settings configured here are specified for ADSL only.
Multi-PVC channel - The selections displayed here are
determined by the page of Internet Access >>Multi PVCs.
Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen.
Encapsulation - Drop down the list to choose the type
provided by ISP.
VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.
VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.
Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one
that fits the requirement of your router.
IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically
and allows you type in IP address manually.
Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically.
More Options - Click it to display router name and domain
name items.
Router Name – Type in the router name provided by
ISP.
Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you have
assigned.
DHCP Client Identifier - Check the box to specify
username and password as the DHCP client identifier
for some ISP.
Username: Type a name as username. The
maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password: Type a password. The maximum length
of the password you can set is 62 characters.
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data.
IP Address – Type in the private IP address.
Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses
and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface,
please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP
addresses other than the current one you are using.
Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type
the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable
box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
66
DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary,
type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always on, ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping
Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required
settings for the following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging. With the IP address(es)
pinging, Vigor router can check if the WAN connection is
on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
67
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.
MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
RIP Protocol
Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIPRFC1058
specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.
Click Enable RIP for activating this function.
Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem. Yet, the incoming packets with
VLAN tags will be discarded.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected
LAN subnet and such WAN interface.
MAC Address Default MAC Address – Type in MAC address for the router.
You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC
address for your necessity.
Specify a MAC Address – Type in the MAC address for the
router manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
68
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
E
E
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
V
V
D
D
S
S
L
L
2
2
)
)
To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the
WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ADSL Modem Setting It is not necessary to configure settings in these fields for
modem settings are prepared for ADSL only.
ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field.
Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
Service Name – Type a name representing serive used.
Separate Account for ADSL – In default, WAN1 supports
VDSL2/ADSL and uses the same PPPoE account and password
for connection. If required, you can configure another
account and password for ADSL connection by checking this
box. If it is checked, the system will ask you to type another
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
69
group of account and password additionally.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Path MTU Discovery to open the following dialog.
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet.
MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept– After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
IP Assignment(IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP
address to you each time you connect to it and request. In
some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the
same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can
fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your
ISP before you want to use this function.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
70
Fixed IP Address – Type in a fixed IP address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
Dial-Out Schedule Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of
time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set
previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you
can use the number that you have set in that web page.
PPPoE Pass-through The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you
also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local
clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol
is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be
transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server.
Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.
For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same
network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with
the Host PC) to access into Internet.
For Wireless LAN – It is available for n model. If you check
this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another
set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access
into Internet.
Note: To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA
protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave
like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN.
That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection.
MAC Address Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or
specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC
Address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router
manually.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
71
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
4
4
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
M
M
P
P
o
o
A
A
/
/
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
o
o
r
r
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
1
1
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
V
V
D
D
S
S
L
L
2
2
)
)
MPoA is a specification that enables ATM services to be integrated with existing LANs, which
use either Ethernet, token-ring or TCP/IP protocols. The goal of MPoA is to allow different
LANs to send packets to each other via an ATM backbone.
To use MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select
MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following
web page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ADSL Modem Settings It is not necessary to configure settings in these fields for
modem settings are prepared for ADSL only.
IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically.
More Options – Click it to display router name and domain
name items.
Router Name – Type in the router name provided by
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
72
ISP.
Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you have
assigned.
DHCP Client Identifier* - Check the box to specify
username and password as the DHCP client identifier
for some ISP.
Username: Type a name as username. The
maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password: Type a password. The maximum length of
the password you can set is 62 characters.
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data.
IP Address – Type in the private IP address.
Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is
available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address
and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.
DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary,
type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect, Ping Detect or Always On for
the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping
Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required
settings for the following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
73
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.
MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept– After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
RIP Protocol
Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIPRFC1058
specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.
Click Enable RIP for activating this function.
Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN
subnet and such WAN interface.
MAC Address Default MAC Address – Type in MAC address for the router.
You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC
address for your necessity.
Specify a MAC Address – Type in the MAC address for the
router manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
74
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
5
5
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
P
P
P
P
P
P
o
o
E
E
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
2
2
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
E
E
t
t
h
h
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
)
)
To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the
WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN2 page. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
Service Name - Enter the description of the specific network
service.
Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field.
The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Index (1-15) - You can type in four sets of time schedule for
your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
WAN Connection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
75
Detection connection is alive or not through PPP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
TTL Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to
Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.
Enable - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it passess
through Vigor router. It will cause the client, accessing
Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by certain ISP
when TTL value becomes “0”.
Disable – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when a
packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be
cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet
will not be blocked by ISP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
76
PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the
Internet after passing through the time without any action.
IP Assignment (IPCP)- Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP
address to you each time you connect to it and request. In
some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the
same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can
fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your
ISP before you want to use this function.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is
available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address
and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.
Fixed IP Address – Type in a fixed IP address.
Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or
specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC
Address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router
manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
6
6
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
o
o
r
r
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
2
2
(
(
P
P
h
h
y
y
s
s
i
i
c
c
a
a
l
l
M
M
o
o
d
d
e
e
:
:
E
E
t
t
h
h
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
)
)
For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely
multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a
Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a
public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address
to the WAN interface.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
77
To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the Static
or Dynamic IP tab. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
Keep WAN Connection Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP
environments because some ISPs will drop connections if
there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check
Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.
PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please
specify the IP address for the system to PING it for keeping
alive.
PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to execute
the PING operation.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect, Ping Detect or Always On for
the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping
Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required
settings for the following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
78
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Path MTU to – Choose the destination as the specific
transmit path and Enter the IP address.
MTU size start from - Determine the starting point
value of the packet.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
RIP Protocol
Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIPRFC1058
specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.
Click Enable RIP for activating this function.
TTL Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to
Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.
Enable - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it passess
through Vigor router. It will cause the client, accessing
Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by certain ISP
when TTL value becomes “0”.
Disable – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when a packet
passes through Vigor router, it will not be cancelled. That is,
the client who sends out the packet will not be blocked by
ISP.
WAN IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically
and allows you Enter IP address manually.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
79
than the current one you are using.
Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use
Dynamic IP mode.
Router Name: Enter the router name provided by ISP.
Domain Name: Enter the domain name that you have
assigned.
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data if you want to use Static IP mode.
IP Address: Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address: Enter the gateway IP address.
Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default
MAC address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers
specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In
such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and
enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.
DNS Server IP Address Enter the primary IP address for the router if you want to use
Static IP mode. If necessary, Enter secondary IP address for
necessity in the future.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
80
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
7
7
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
P
P
P
P
T
T
P
P
To use PPTP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP tab. The
following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
PPTP Enable - Click this radio button to enable a PPTP client to
establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.
Disable – Click this radio button to close the connection
through PPTP.
Server Address - Specify the IP address of the PPTP server if
you enable PPTP client mode.
Specify Gateway IP Address – Specify the gateway IP address
for DHCP server.
ISP Access Setup Username -Enter the username provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password -Enter the password provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can Enter four sets of
time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set
previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can
use the number that you have set in that web page.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
81
Path MTU to – Choose the destination as the specific
transmit path and Enter the IP address.
MTU size start from - Determine the starting point
value of the packet.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP Setup PPP Authentication - Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the
Internet after passing through the time without any action.
IP Address Assignment
Method(IPCP)
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
Fixed IP - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you
each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your
ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address
whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP
address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before
you want to use this function. Click Yes to use this function
and Enter a fixed IP address in the box.
Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.
WAN IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically.
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data.
IP Address – Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask – Enter the subnet mask.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
82
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
8
8
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
O
O
f
f
f
f
l
l
i
i
n
n
e
e
When Offline is selected, the IPv6 connection will be disabled.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
9
9
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
P
P
P
P
P
P
During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address
between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to
acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In
addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of
the generated prefix.
No need to type any other information for PPP mode.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no
detection will be executed. The network connection will be
on always.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
83
RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on PPP mode.
Info
At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is
available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
0
0
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
T
T
S
S
P
P
C
C
Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6
network easily.
Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago
(http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account ) before you try to use TSPC for network
connection. TSPC would connect to tunnel broker and requests a tunnel according to the
specifications inside the configuration file. It gets a public IPv6 IP address and an IPv6 prefix
from the tunnel broker and then monitors the state of the tunnel in background.
After getting the IPv6 prefix and starting router advertisement daemon (RADVD), the PC
behind this router can directly connect to IPv6 the Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
84
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Username Enter the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for
you to apply another username and password for
http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 63
characters.
Password Enter the password assigned with the user name.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 19
characters.
Tunnel Broker Enter the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no
detection will be executed. The network connection will be
on always.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
85
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
1
1
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
A
A
I
I
C
C
C
C
U
U
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always.
Username Enter the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new
account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to
apply another username and password.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 19
characters.
Password Enter the password assigned with the user name.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 19
characters.
Tunnel Broker It means a server of AICCU. The server can provide IPv6
tunnels to sites or end users over IPv4.
Enter the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
Tunnel ID One user account may have several tunnels. And, each
tunnel shall have one specified tunnel ID (e.g., T115394).
Enter the ID offered by Tunnel Broker.
Subnet Prefix Enter the subnet prefix address obtained from service
provider.
The maximum length of the prefix you can set is 128
characters.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
86
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
2
2
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
D
D
H
H
C
C
P
P
v
v
6
6
C
C
l
l
i
i
e
e
n
n
t
t
DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
DHCPv6 Client
Configuration
IAID - Type a number as IAID.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for
the system to execute for WAN detection. With NS Detect
mode, the system will check if network connection is
established or not, like IPv4 ARP Detect. Always On means
no detection will be executed. The network connection will
be on always.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
8
7
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
3
3
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Static IPv6 Address
configuration
IPv6 Address – Enter the IPv6 Static IP Address.
Prefix Length – Enter the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Update – Click it to modify an existed entry.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Current IPv6 Address
Table
Display current interface IPv6 address.
Static IPv6 Gateway
Configuration
IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address
here.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no
detection will be executed. The network connection will be
on always.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
88
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
4
4
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
6
6
i
i
n
n
4
4
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
T
T
u
u
n
n
n
n
e
e
l
l
This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface.
Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network.
However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather
than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Remote Endpoint IPv4
Address
Enter the static IPv4 address for the remote server.
6in4 IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value
for prefix length.
LAN Routed Prefix Enter the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value
for prefix length.
Tunnel TTL Enter the number for the data lifetime in tunnel.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for
the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On
means no detection will be executed. The network
connection will be on always.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
89
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
90
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
5
5
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
6
6
r
r
d
d
This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service
provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP".
Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.
IPv4 Border Relay Enter the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given
6rd domain.
IPv4 Mask Length Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across all
CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain.
It may be any value between 0 and 32.
6rd Prefix Enter the 6rd IPv6 address.
6rd Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in number
of bits.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose NS Detect, Always On or Ping Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no
detection will be executed. The network connection will be
on always.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6rd mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
91
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
92
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
M
M
u
u
l
l
t
t
i
i
-
-
P
P
V
V
C
C
/
/
V
V
L
L
A
A
N
N
Multi-VLAN allows users to create profiles for specific WAN interface and bridge connections
for user applications that require very high network throughput. Simply go to WAN and select
Multi-VLAN.
Channel 1 to 2 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered.
Channel 1: ADSL on WAN1.
Channel 2: Ethernet on WAN2 (based on the model)
Channel 3: LTE on WAN3.
Channels 5 through 7 can be configured as virtual WANs (WAN5 through WAN7).
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
This page shows the basic configurations used by every channel.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Channel Display the number of each channel.
Channels 1 and 2 are used by the Internet Access web user
interface and can not be configured here.
Channels 5 ~ 7 are configurable.
Enable Display whether the settings in this channel are enabled
(Yes) or not (No).
WAN Type Displays the physical medium that the channel will use.
VLAN Tag Displays the VLAN tag value that will be used for the packets
traveling on this channel.
Port-based Bridge The network traffic flowing on each channel will be
identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using
the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag
value.
Enable - Check this box to enable the port-based bridge
function on this channel.
P1 ~ P2 – Check the box(es) to build bridge connection on
LAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
93
To configure a PVC channel, click its channel number.
WAN links for Channel 5, 6 and 7 are provided for router-borne application such as TR-069.
The settings must be applied and obtained from your ISP. For your special request, please
contact with your ISP and then click WAN link of Channel 5, 6 and 7 to configure your router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Channel 4/5/6 Enable – Select to enable this channel.
Disable – Select to disable this channel.
General Settings VLAN Tag – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid
settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic
flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via
their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not
configure the same VLAN tag value.
Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet
priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.
Open Port-based Bridge The settings here will create a bridge between the LAN ports
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
9
4
Connection for this
Channel
selected and the WAN. The WAN interface of the bridge
connection will be built upon the WAN type selected using
the VLAN tag configured.
Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the
corresponding check box(es) for applying the port-based
bridge connection.
Note: LAN port P1 is reserved for NAT use and cannot be
selected for bridging.
Open WAN Interface for
this Channel
Check the box to enable relating function.
WAN Application
Management can be specified for general management
(Web configuration/telnet/TR069). If you choose
Management, the configuration for this VLAN will be
effective for Web configuration/telnet/TR069.
IPTV - The IPTV configuration will allow the WAN
interface to send IGMP packets to IPTV servers.
WAN Connection Detection – Such function allows you to
verify whether network connection is alive or not through
ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
Primary/Secondary Ping IPIf you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
PPPoE/PPPoA Client Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
ISP Name – PPP Service Name. Enter if your ISP requires this
setting; otherwise leave blank.
Username – Name provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA
authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.
Password – Password provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA
authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.
PPP Authentication –The protocol used for PPP
authentication.
PAP only- Only PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)
is used.
PAP or CHAP- Both PAP and CHAP
(Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) can be
used for PPP authentication. Router negotiates with the
PPTP or L2TP server to determine which protocol to
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
95
use.
Always On – If selected, the router will maintain the
PPPoE/PPPoA connection.
Idle Timeout – Maximum length of time, in seconds, of idling
allowed (no traffic) before the connection is dropped.
IP Address From ISP - Specifies how the WAN IP address of
the channel configured.
Fixed IP
Yes - IP address entered in the Fixed IP Address field
will be used as the IP address of the virtual WAN.
No - Virtual WAN IP address will be assigned by the ISP’s
PPPoE/PPPoA server.
MPoA Obtain an IP address automatically – Select this option if the
router is to receive IP configuration information from a DHCP
server.
Router Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 12, which
is used by some ISPs.
Domain Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 15,
which is used by some ISPs.
Specify an IP address – Select this option to manually enter
the IP address.
IP Address – Type in the IP address.
Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.
DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address for
the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary,
type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings and return to previous page.
A
A
d
d
v
v
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
d
d
Such configuration is applied to upstream packets. Such information will be provided by ISP.
Please contact with your ISP for detailed information.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
96
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
QoS Type Select a proper QoS type for the channel according to the
information that your ISP provides.
PCR It represents Peak Cell Rate. The default setting is “0”.
SCR It represents Sustainable Cell Rate. The value of SCR must be
smaller than PCR.
MBS It represents Maximum Burst Size. The range of the value is
10 to 50.
PVC to PVC Binding It allows the enabled PVC channel to use the same ADSL
connection settings of another PVC channel. Please choose
the PVC channel via the drop down list.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
9
7
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
e
e
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
o
o
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
i
i
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
?
?
This document is going to demonstrate how to implement an IPv6 address on Vigor Router's
WAN.
1. Before configuring IPv6 on WAN, please make sure the router is connected to the IPv4
Internet.
2. Go to WAN >> Internet Access, click on IPv6 of the WAN interface that you would like to
configure an IPv6 address.
3. Select a Connection Type from the drop-down list, enter the required parameters. Then
click OK and reboot the router to apply the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
98
4. After accomplishing the configurations, Network Administrator may check the status from
the IPv6 tab on Online Status >> Physical Connection page.
5. Furthermore, Network Administrator may test the connectivity of IPv6 from the router by
going to Diagnostics >> Ping Diagnosis and selecting "IPv6".
Below we will provide some examples of configuring IPv6 with different connection types.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
99
P
P
P
P
P
P
(
(
P
P
o
o
i
i
n
n
t
t
-
-
t
t
o
o
-
-
P
P
o
o
i
i
n
n
t
t
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
)
)
This applies if the IPv4 access mode is PPPoE, and the IPv4 ISP also provides an IPv6 address.
To use IPv6 PPP, you just need to choose the Connection Type to "PPP", no other setting is
required.
T
T
S
S
P
P
C
C
(
(
T
T
u
u
n
n
n
n
e
e
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
C
C
l
l
i
i
e
e
n
n
t
t
)
)
In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through
a tunnel set up by Tunnel Setup Protocol (TSP). To use TSPC, you'll need to sign up for a
tunnel broker service and get a username and password first, then, configure the router as
follows:
1. Set Connection Type to TSPC.
2. Enter the Username and Password registered at the TSP server.
3. Enter the IP or Domain Name of the TSPC server for Tunnel Broker.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
100
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
If your ISP provides a static IPv6 address for you, you may configure that IPv6 address for WAN
by doing the following steps:
1. Set Connection Type to Static IPv6.
2. Enter the IPv6 address and Prefix Length which provided by the ISP, and click Add.
3. You should see the IPv6 address in Current IPv6 Address Table. Then, specify the IP
address of IPv6 Gateway.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
101
6
6
i
i
n
n
4
4
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
T
T
u
u
n
n
n
n
e
e
l
l
In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through
a tunnel configured manually. To use 6in4 Static Tunnel, you need sign up for a tunnel broker
service and get an IPv6 address and routed IPv6 prefixes first. Then, configure the router as
follows:
1. Set Connection Type to 6in4 Static Tunnel.
2. Enter the tunnel server's IPv4 address in Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address.
3. Enter the router's IPv6 address in 6in4 IPv6 Address.
4. Enter the routed IPv6 prefix in LAN Routed Prefix.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
102
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
L
L
A
A
N
N
Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of
network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.
The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As
mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public
IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to
translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets
to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns
private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.
In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24.
This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is
equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve
for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or
servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
103
W
W
h
h
a
a
t
t
i
i
s
s
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
I
I
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
m
m
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
P
P
r
r
o
o
t
t
o
o
c
c
o
o
l
l
(
(
R
R
I
I
P
P
)
)
Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to
accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP
address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.
W
W
h
h
a
a
t
t
i
i
s
s
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for
connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules
to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence
of RIP.
W
W
h
h
a
a
t
t
a
a
r
r
e
e
V
V
i
i
r
r
t
t
u
u
a
a
l
l
L
L
A
A
N
N
s
s
a
a
n
n
d
d
R
R
a
a
t
t
e
e
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
l
l
You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 8 virtual LANs. To manage the
communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function
and the rate of each.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
104
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
A LAN comprises a collection of LAN clients, which are networked devices on your premises. A
LAN client can be a computer, a printer, a Voice-over-IP (VoIP) phone, a mobile phone, a
gaming console, an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV), etc, and can have either a wired
(using Ethernet cabling) or wireless (using Wi-Fi) network connection.
LAN clients within the same LAN are normally able to communicate with one another directly,
as they are peers to one another, unless measures, such as firewalls or VLANs, have been put
in place to restrict such access. Nowadays the most common LAN firewalls are implemented
on the LAN client itself. For example, Microsoft Windows since Windows XP and Apple OS X
have built-in firewalls that can be configured to restrict traffic coming in and going out of the
computer. VLANs, on the other hand, are usually set up using network switches or routers.
To communicate with the hosts outside of the LAN, LAN clients have to go through a network
gateway, which in most cases is a router that sits between the LAN and the ISP network,
which is the WAN. The router acts as a director to ensure traffic between the LAN and the
WAN reach their intended destinations.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This page provides you the general settings for LAN. Click LAN to open the LAN settings page
and choose General Setup.
There are four subnets provided by the router which allow users to divide groups into
different subnets (LAN1 – LAN2). In addition, different subnets can link for each other by
configuring Inter-LAN Routing. At present, LAN1 setting is fixed with NAT mode only. LAN2 –
LAN4 can be operated under NAT or Route mode. IP Routed Subnet can be operated under
Route mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
105
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively.
Index - Display all of the LAN items.
Enable- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default. LAN2
and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by checking the
Enable box.
DHCPv6- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If
required, please check the DHCP box for each LAN.
IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item. Such
information is set in default and you can not modify it.
Details Page - Click it to access into the setting page. Each
LAN will have different LAN configuration page. Each LAN
must be configured in different subnet.
IPv6 – Click it to access into the settings page of IPv6.
DHCP Server Option DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and
data information when such function is enabled.
For detailed information, refer to later section.
Force router to use “DNS
server IP address” …..
Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in
LAN1/LAN2 instead of DNS servers given by the Internet
Access server (PPPoE, PPTP or DHCP server).
Inter-LAN Routing Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and
LAN).
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be
interconnected or isolated.
It is only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled.
Refer to section II-2-2 VLAN on how to set up VLANs.
In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix, a selected checkbox means
that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each
other.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
106
Info
To configure a subnet, select its Detials Page button to bring up the LAN
Details Page.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
L
L
A
A
N
N
1
1
E
E
t
t
h
h
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
T
T
C
C
P
P
/
/
I
I
P
P
a
a
n
n
d
d
D
D
H
H
C
C
P
P
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4)
and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for
detailed information.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Network Configuration For NAT Usage,
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
RIP Protocol Control,
Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server
Configuration
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatches related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Disable – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in
the LAN.
Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host
in the LAN.
Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
107
given out to LAN DHCP clients.
IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses
to be handed out by DHCP. The default value is 200.
Valid range is between 1 and 253. The actual number of
IP addresses available for assignment is the IP Pool
Counts, or 253 minus the last octet of the Start IP
Address, whichever is smaller.
Gateway IP Address - The IP address of the gateway,
which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic
coming into and going out of the LAN. The gateway is
normally the router, and therefore the Gateway IP
Address should be identical to the IP Address in the
Network Configuration section above.
Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.
Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If
selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP
addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients
to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Note: When Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients
periodically is enabled, router will do the following:
Check activities of DHCP clients by ARP requests
every minute when the available DHCP IP
addresses are less than 30
Clear DHCP lease when the client is not
responding ARP replies.
Enable Relay Agent – When selected, all DHCP requests are
forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and
whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.
DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable
Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP
server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help
to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DNS Server IP Address DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host
must have a unique IP address, also they may have a
human-friendly, easy to remember name such as
www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly
name into its equivalent IP address.
Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address
here because your ISP should provide you with usually more
than one DNS Server.
Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server
IP address here because your ISP often provides you more
than one DNS Server.
The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online
Status:
If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left
empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users
as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
108
If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS
cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.
Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the
external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)
connection.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Private IP addresses can be assigned automatically to LAN clients using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or manually assigned. The DHCP server can either be the
router (the most common case), or a separate server, that hands out IP addresses to DHCP
clients.
Alternatively, static IP addresses can be manually configured on LAN clients as part of their
network settings. No matter how IP addresses are configured, it is important that no two
devices get the same IP address. If both DHCP and static assignment are used on a network, it
is important to exclude the static IP addresses from the DHCP IP pool. For example, if your
LAN uses the 192.168.1.x subnet and you have 20 DHCP clients and 20 static IP clients, you
could configure 192.168.1.10 as the Start IP Address, 50 as the IP Pool Counts (enough for the
current number of DHCP clients, plus room for future expansion), and use addresses greater
than 192.168.1.100 for static assignment.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
L
L
A
A
N
N
2
2
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration;
click Disable to disable such configuration.
For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT
function.
For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this
function.
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
DHCP Server DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
109
Configuration router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every
host in the LAN.
Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host
in the LAN.
Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is
given out to LAN DHCP clients.
IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses
to be handed out by DHCP. The default value is 100.
Valid range is between 1 and 253. The actual number of
IP addresses available for assignment is the IP Pool
Counts, or 253 minus the last octet of the Start IP
Address, whichever is smaller.
Gateway IP Address - The IP address of the gateway,
which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic
coming into and going out of the LAN. The gateway is
normally the router, and therefore the Gateway IP
Address should be identical to the IP Address in the
Network Configuration section above.
Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.
Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If
selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP
addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients
to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Note: When Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients
periodically is enabled, router will do the following:
Check activities of DHCP clients by ARP requests
every minute when the available DHCP IP
addresses are less than 30
Clear DHCP lease when the client is not
responding ARP replies.
Enable Relay Agent – When selected, all DHCP requests are
forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and
whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.
DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable
Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP
server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help
to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DNS Server IP Address DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host
must have a unique IP address, also they may have a
human-friendly, easy to remember name such as
www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly
name into its equivalent IP address.
Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address
here because your ISP should provide you with usually more
than one DNS Server.
Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server
IP address here because your ISP often provides you more
than one DNS Server.
The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
110
Status:
If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left
empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users
as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.
If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS
cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.
Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the
external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)
connection.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
d
d
S
S
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration;
click Disable to disable such configuration.
For Routing Usage,
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
RIP Protocol Control,
Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
111
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server
Configuration
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is given
out to LAN DHCP clients.
IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses to be
handed out by DHCP. The default value is 100. Valid range is
between 1 and 253. The actual number of IP addresses
available for assignment is the IP Pool Counts, or 253 minus
the last octet of the Start IP Address, whichever is smaller.
Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.
Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is
enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for
the clients coming from P1 and/or P2. Please check the box
of P1 and P2.
Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.
MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by
one and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be
assigned, deleted or edited from above pool. Set a list
of MAC Address for 2
nd
DHCP server will help router to
assign the correct IP address of the correct subnet to
the correct host. So those hosts in 2
nd
subnet won’t get
an IP address belonging to 1
st
subnet.
Add – Enter the MAC address in the boxes and click this
button to add.
Delete – Click it to delete the selected MAC address.
Edit – Click it to edit the selected MAC address.
Cancel – Click it to cancel the job of adding, deleting and
editing.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
112
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
D
D
e
e
t
t
a
a
i
i
l
l
s
s
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
L
L
A
A
N
N
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
There are two configuration pages for each LAN. Click the tab for each type and refer to the
following explanations for detailed information. Below shows the settings page for IPv6.
It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and
the other is DHCPv6 (Stateful) server.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable IPv6 Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6
Setup.
WAN Primary Interface Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6.
Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
113
Prefix Length – Enter the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Unique Local Address
(ULA) configuration
Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses
assigned to LAN clients.
Off - ULA is disabled.
Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs
generated based on the prefix manually entered.
Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an
automatically-determined prefix.
Current IPv6 Address
Table
Display current used IPv6 addresses.
DNS Server IPv6 Address Deploy when WAN is up – The RA (router advertisement)
packets will be sent to LAN PC with DNS server information
only when network connection by any one of WAN interfaces
is up.
Enable – The RA (router advertisement) packets will be sent
to LAN PC with DNS server information no matter WAN
connection is up or not.
Primary DNS Sever – Enter the IPv6 address for Primary
DNS server.
Secondary DNS Server –Type another IPv6 address for
DNS server if required.
Disable – DNS server will not be used.
Management Configures the Managed Address Configuration flag (M-bit) in
Route Advertisements.
Off - No configuration information is sent using Route
Advertisements.
SLAAC(stateless) - M-bit is unset.
DHCPv6(stateful) - M-bit is set, which indicates to LAN
clients that they should acquire all IPv6 configuration
information from a DHCPv6 server. The DHCPv6 server
can either be the one built into the Vigor2860, or a
separate DHCPv6 server.
Other Option(O-bit) When selected, the Other Configuration flag is set, which
indicates to LAN clients that IPv6 configuration information
besides LAN IPv6 addresses is available from a DHCPv6
server.
Setting the M-bit (see Management above) has the same
effect as implicitly setting the O-bit, as DHCPv6 supplies all
IPv6 configuration information, including what is indicated as
available when the O-bit is set.
DHCPv6 Server Enable Server –Click it to enable DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
114
Server could assign IPv6 address to PC according to the
Start/End IPv6 address configuration.
Disable Server –Click it to disable DHCPv6 server.
IPv6 Address Random Allocation -
Auto IPv6 range – After check the box, Vigor router will
assign the IPv6 range automatically.
Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Enter the start and
end address for IPv6 server.
Advance setting – Click the Edit button to configure
advanced IPv6 settings for DHCPv6 server.
Advance setting The Advanced Settings page has additional settings for
Router Advertisement and enabling multiple WANs for IPv6
traffic.
Router Advertisement Configuration – Click Enable to
enable router advertisement server. The router
advertisement daemon sends Router Advertisement
messages, specified by RFC 2461, to a local Ethernet LAN
periodically and when requested by a node sending a Router
Solicitation message. These messages are required for IPv6
stateless auto-configuration.
Disable – Click it to disable router advertisement server.
Hop Limt – The value is required for the device behind the
router when IPv6 is in use.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
115
Min/Max Interval Time (sec) – It defines the interval
(between minimum time and maximum time) for sending RA
(Router Advertisement) packets.
Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time,
Vigor2620 can be treated as the default gateway.
Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host
behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets
are transmitted.
MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is
selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN.
RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same
functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Extension WAN – In addition to the default WAN used for
IPv6 traffic specified in the WAN Primary Interface in the LAN
IPv6 Setup page, additional WANs can be selected to carry
IPv6 traffic by enabling them in the Extension WAN section.
Available WAN – Additional WANs available but not currently
selected to carry IPv6 traffic.
Selected WAN – Additional WANs selected to carry IPv6
traffic.
After making changes on the Advance setting page, click the OK button to retain the changes
and return to the LAN IPv6 Setup page. Be sure to click OK on the LAN IPv6 Setup page or else
changes made on the Advance setting page will not be saved.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
A
A
d
d
v
v
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
d
d
D
D
H
H
C
C
P
P
O
O
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
DHCP Options can be configured by clicking the Advanced button on the LAN General Setup
screen.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
116
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Customized List Shows all the DHCP options that have been configured in the
system.
Enable If selected, DHCP option entry is enabled.
If unselected, DHCP option entry is disabled.
Interface LAN interface(s) to which this entry is applicable.
Next Server IP
Address/SIAddr
Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66)
supplied by the DHCP server.
Option Number DHCP option number (e.g., 100).
DataType Type of data in the Data field:
ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path.
Hexadecimal Digit - A hexadecimal string. Valid characters
are from 0 to 9 and from a to f. Example: 2f70617468.
Address List - One or more IPv4 addresses, delimited by
commas.
Data Data of this DHCP option.
To add a DHCP option entry from scratch, clear the data entry fields (Enable, Interface,
Option Number, DataType and Data) by clicking Reset. After filling in the values, click Add
to create the new entry.
To add a DHCP option entry modeled after an existing entry, click the model entry in
Customized List. The data entry fields will be populated with values from the model entry.
After making all necessary changes for the new entry, click Add to create it.
To modify an existing DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List. The data entry fields
will be populated with the current values from the entry. After making all necessary changes,
click Update to save the changes.
To delete a DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List, and then click Delete.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
11
7
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
2
2
V
V
L
L
A
A
N
N
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) allow you to subdivide your LAN to facilitate
management or to improve network security.
Select LAN>>VLAN from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the VLAN Configuration page.
T
T
a
a
g
g
g
g
e
e
d
d
V
V
L
L
A
A
N
N
The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be
carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can
also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for
LAN-side QoS. You can assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router
may also be operating, to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based
multi-subnet.
P
P
o
o
r
r
t
t
-
-
B
B
a
a
s
s
e
e
d
d
V
V
L
L
A
A
N
N
Relative to tag-based VLAN which groups clients with an identifier, port-based VLAN uses
physical ports (P1 ~ P2) to separate the clients into different VLAN group.
Virtual LAN function provides you a very convenient way to manage hosts by grouping them
based on the physical port. The multi-subnet can let a small businesses have much better
isolation for multi-occupancy applications. Go to LAN page and select VLAN. The following
page will appear. Click Enable to invoke VLAN function.
Below is an example page in Vigor2620Ln:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
118
Info
Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration.
LAN P1 – P2– Check the LAN port(s) to group them under the
selected VLAN.
Wireless LAN SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the
selected VLAN.
Subnet Choose one of them to make the selected VLAN mapping to
the specified subnet only. For example, LAN1 is specified for
VLAN0. It means that PCs grouped under VLAN0 can get the
IP address(es) that specified by the subnet.
VLAN Tag
Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with
tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the LAN while sending them out.
Please Enter the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by LAN.
VID – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is
form 0 to 4095. VIDs must be unique.
Priority – Valid values are from 0 to 7, where 1 has the
lowest priority, followed by 0, and finally from 2 to 7 in
increasing order of priority.
Info
Leave one VLAN untagged at least to prevent from not connecting to Vigor
router due to unexpected error.
The Vigor router supports up to 8 VLANs. Each VLAN can be set up to use one or more of the
Ethernet ports and wireless LAN Service Set Identifiers (SSIDs). Within the grid of VLANs
(horizontal rows) and LAN interfaces (vertical columns),
all hosts within the same VLAN (horizontal row) are visible to one another
all hosts connected to the same LAN or WLAN interface (vertical column) are visible to
one another if
- they belong to the same VLAN, or
- they belong to different VLANs, and inter-LAN routing (LAN>>General Setup) between
them is enabled (see below).
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
119
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated. It is
only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled. In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix,
a selected checkbox means that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each
other.
Vigor2620 series features a hugely flexible VLAN system. In its simplest form, each of the
Gigabit LAN ports can be isolated from each other, for example to feed different companies
or departments but keeping their local traffic completely separated.
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
i
i
n
n
g
g
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
-
-
b
b
a
a
s
s
e
e
d
d
V
V
L
L
A
A
N
N
f
f
o
o
r
r
w
w
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
a
a
n
n
d
d
n
n
o
o
n
n
-
-
w
w
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
c
c
l
l
i
i
e
e
n
n
t
t
s
s
1. All the wire network clients are categorized to group VLAN0 in subnet 192.168.1.0/24
(LAN1).
2. All the wireless network clients are categorized to group VLAN1 in subnet
192.168.2.0/24 (LAN2).
3. Open LAN>>VLAN. Check the boxes according to the statement in step 1 and Step 2.
4. Click OK.
5. Open LAN>>General Setup. If you want to let the clients in both groups communicate
with each other, simply activate Inter-LAN Routing by checking the box between LAN1
and LAN2.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
120
Vigor router supports up to six private IP subnets on LAN. Each can be independent
(isolated) or common (able to communicate with each other). This is ideal for
departmental or multi-occupancy applications.
Info
As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on
Vigor Router” for more detailed information.
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
3
3
B
B
i
i
n
n
d
d
I
I
P
P
t
t
o
o
M
M
A
A
C
C
This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in
network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients.
Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address.
Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
121
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function. However,
IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to
Internet.
Disable Click this radio button to disable this function. All the
settings on this page will be invalid.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
122
Strict Bind Check the box to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is
not listed in IP Bind List.
LAN clients will be assigned IP addresses according to the
MAC-to-IP address associations on this page. LAN client
whose MAC address has not been bound to an IP address will
be denied network access.
Note: Before selecting Strict Bind, make sure at least one
valid MAC address has been bound to an IP address.
Otherwise no LAN clients will have network access, and it
will not be possible to connect to the router to make changes
to its configuration.
Apply Strict Bind to Subnet Choose the subnet(s) for
applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC.
ARP Table This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The
information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field.
Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be
selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.
Select All Select all entries in the ARP Table for manipulation.
Sort Reorder the entry based on the IP address.
Refresh Refresh the ARP table listed below to obtain the newest ARP
table information.
Add / Update to IP Bind
List
IP Address Enter the IP address to be associated with a
MAC address.
Mac Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN client’s
network interface.
Comment Type a brief description for the entry.
Add - It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP
table or the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the
table of IP Bind List.
Update - It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP
address and MAC address that you create before.
Delete - You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List.
Simply click and select the one, and click Delete. The
selected item will be removed from the IP Bind List.
IP Bind List It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.
Backup IP Bind List Click Backup and enter a filename to back up IP Bind List to a
file.
Upload From File
Click Browse to select an IP Bind List backup file. Click
Restore to restore the backup and overwrite the existing
list.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
123
Info
Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for
one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user
interface of the router might not be accessed.
When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
124
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
N
N
A
A
T
T
Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a
mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one.
Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP
addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.
When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT
router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router,
select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an
entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server
response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router’s public IP address and the
router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate
with external host smoothly.
The benefit of the NAT includes:
Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT
allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address,
thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.
Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are
many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be
aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.
Info
On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918.
Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before,
the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into
different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be
achieved by using port mapping methods.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
125
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
-
-
1
1
P
P
o
o
r
r
t
t
R
R
e
e
d
d
i
i
r
r
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN),
such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP
address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.
Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the
router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is
to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping
private IP address/port of the server.
The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.
To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port
Redirection Table provides 40 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
126
Each item is explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Display the number of the profile.
Enable Check the box to enable the profile.
Service Name Display the description of the specific network service.
WAN Interface Display the WAN IP address used by the profile.
Protocol Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Public Port Display the port number which will be redirected to the
specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.
Source IP Display the source IP address or object.
Private IP Display the IP address of the internal host providing the
service.
Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
12
7
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.
Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to
choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range.
In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port)
and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the
system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP
automatically.
Service Name Enter the description of the specific network service.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
WAN Interface Select the WAN IP used for port redirection. There are eight
WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port
redirection.
The default setting is All which means all the incoming data
from any port will be redirected to all intefaces.
Public Port Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private
IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the
port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field.
Enter the required number on the first box (as the starting
port) and the second box (as the ending port).
Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Private IP Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing
the service. If you choose Range as the port redirection
mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete
IP address in the first box (as the starting point). The second
one will be assigned automatically later.
Private Port Specify the private port number of the service offered by the
internal host.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
128
Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc.
Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to
reset the router in order to avoid confliction.
For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may
conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you
need to change the router’s http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid
conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You
then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g.,
http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
129
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
-
-
2
2
D
D
M
M
Z
Z
H
H
o
o
s
s
t
t
As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on
particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP
protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor
router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single
host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will
continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user
to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as
Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.
The security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest
you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.
Click DMZ Host to open the following page. You can set different DMZ host for each WAN
interface. Click the WAN tab to switch into the configuration page for that WAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
130
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Choose Private IP or None first.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
IP to select one.
Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private
IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one
private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog,
the IP address will be shown on the following screen. Click OK
to save the setting.
If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE or Static or Dynamic IP mode in WAN
interface, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
IP to select one.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
131
Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of
private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select
one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above
dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK
to save the setting.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
132
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
-
-
3
3
O
O
p
p
e
e
n
n
P
P
o
o
r
r
t
t
s
s
Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications.
Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella,
WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application
involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.
Click Open Ports to open the following page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Indicate the relative number for the particular entry that you
want to offer service in a local host. You should click the
appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding
entry.
Comment Specify the name for the defined network service.
WAN Interface Display the WAN interface used by such index.
Aux. WAN IP Display the IP alias setting used by such index. If no IP alias
setting exists, such field will not appear.
Source IP Display the name of source IP object.
Local IP Address Display the private IP address of the local host offering the
service.
Status Display the state for the corresponding entry. X or V is to
represent the Inactive or Active state.
To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page
will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
133
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry.
Comment Make a name for the defined network application/service.
Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose
IP to select one.
Choose IP - Click this button and, subsequently, a window
having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will
automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of
the local host in the list.
Protocol Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP,
or ----- (none) for selection.
Start Port Specify the starting port number of the service offered by
the local host.
End Port Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the
local host.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
134
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
-
-
4
4
A
A
L
L
G
G
ALG means Application Layer Gateway. There are two methods provided by Vigor router,
RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) ALG and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) ALG, for
processing the packets of voice and video.
RTSP ALG makes RTSP message, RTCP message, and RTP packets of voice and video be
transmitted and received correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
However, SIP ALG makes SIP message and RTP packets of voice be transmitted and received
correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable ALG Check to enable such function.
Listen Port Type a port number for SIP or RTSP protocol.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
135
TCP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from TCP transmit and receive via NAT.
UDP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from UDP transmit and receive via NAT.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
136
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
D
D
N
N
S
S
The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via
your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you
access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic
WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the
specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered
domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is
particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.
Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS
service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service
providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most
popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com,
www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to
register your own domain name for the router.
S
S
c
c
h
h
e
e
d
d
u
u
l
l
e
e
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
R
R
A
A
D
D
I
I
U
U
S
S
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is
widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating
and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a
wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables
centralized remote access authentication for network management.
U
U
P
P
n
n
P
P
The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected
devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly
connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers,
the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside
the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
13
7
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
1
1
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
D
D
N
N
S
S
E
E
n
n
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
t
t
h
h
e
e
F
F
u
u
n
n
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
a
a
n
n
d
d
A
A
d
d
d
d
a
a
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
D
D
N
N
S
S
A
A
c
c
c
c
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say
hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.
2. Open Applications>>Dynamic DNS.
3. In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Dynamic DNS
Setup
Check this box to enable DDNS function.
Set to Factory
Default
Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
View Log Display DDNS log status.
Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.
Auto-Update
interval
Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS
service.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of DDNS setup to set account(s).
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
138
Enable Check the box to enable this account.
Domain Name Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of
DDNS setup.
4. Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS
Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, Enter the registered
hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block.
The following two blocks should be typed your account Login Name: test and Password:
test.
If User-Defined is specified as the service provider, the web page will be changed
slightly as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
139
Enable Dynamic DNS
Account
Check this box to enable the current account. If you did
check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the
Active column of the previous web page in step 2).
Service Provider Select the service provider for the DDNS account.
Provider Host Enter the IP address or the domain name of the host which
provides related service.
Note that such option is available when Customized is
selected as Service Provider.
Service API Enter the API information obtained from DDNS server.
Note that such option is available when Customized is
selected as Service Provider.
(e.g:
/dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j*
***.changeip.org&ip=###IP### &cmd=update&offline=0)
Auth Type Two types can be used for authentication.
Basic – Username and password defined later can be shown
from the packets captured.
URL - Username and password defined later can be shown in
URL.
(e.g., http://ns1.vigorddns.com/ddns.php?username=xxxx&
password=xxxx&domain=xxxx.vigorddns.com)
Note that such option is available when Customized is
selected as Service Provider.
Connection Type There are two connection types (HTTP and HTTPs) to be
specified. Note that such option is available when
Customized is selected as Service Provider.
Server Response Type any text that you want to receive from the DDNS
server.
Note that such option is available when Customized is
selected as Service Provider.
Login Name Enter the login name that you set for applying domain.
Password Enter the password that you set for applying domain.
Wildcard The Wildcard feature is not supported for all Dynamic DNS
providers. You could get more detailed information from
their websites.
Mail Extender If the mail server is defined with another name, please Enter
the name in this area. Such mail server will be used as
backup mail exchange.
Determine WAN IP If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can
enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.
When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this
function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and
use the detected IP address for DDNS update.
There are two methods offered for you to choose:
WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router
is private, DDNS update will take place right away.
Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor
router is private, it will be converted to public IP
before DDNS update takes place.
5. Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
140
D
D
i
i
s
s
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
t
t
h
h
e
e
F
F
u
u
n
n
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
a
a
n
n
d
d
C
C
l
l
e
e
a
a
r
r
a
a
l
l
l
l
D
D
y
y
n
n
a
a
m
m
i
i
c
c
D
D
N
N
S
S
A
A
c
c
c
c
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
s
s
Uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and click Clear All button to disable the function and
clear all accounts from the router.
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
2
2
S
S
c
c
h
h
e
e
d
d
u
u
l
l
e
e
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date
menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router’s clock to current time of your PC.
The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set
up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the
router’s clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Index Click the index number link to access into the setting page of
schedule.
Enable Click the box to enable such schedule profile.
Comment Display the name of the time schedule.
You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and
Remote Access >> LAN to LAN settings.
To add a schedule:
1. Click any index, say Index No. 1.
2. The detailed settings of the schedule with index 1 will be shown below.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
141
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Schedule
Setup
Check to enable the schedule.
Comment Type a short description for such schedule.
Start Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
Specify the starting date of the schedule.
Start Time (hh:mm) Specify the starting time of the schedule.
Duration Time
(hh:mm)
Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
Action Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the
period of the schedule.
Force On -Force the connection to be always on.
Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.
Enable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be
dial-on-demand and the value of idle timeout should be
specified in Idle Timeout field.
Disable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be up
when it has traffic on the line. Once there is no traffic over
idle timeout, the connection will be down and never up again
during the schedule.
Idle Timeout Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
142
How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied.
Once -The schedule will be applied just once
Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should
perform the schedule.
Monthly, on date – The router will only execute the
action applied such schedule on the date (1 to 28) of a
month.
Cycle duration – Type a number as cycle duration.
Then, any action applied such schedule will be
executed per several days. For example, “3” is selected
as cycle duration. That means, the action applied such
schedule will be executed every three days since the
date defined on the Start Date.
3. Click OK button to save the settings.
Example
Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On)
from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be
disconnected (Force Down).
Office
Hour:
(Force On)
Mon - Sun 9:00 am to 6:00 pm
1. Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.
2. Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.
3. Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.
4. Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet
connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action
according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
143
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
3
3
R
R
A
A
D
D
I
I
U
U
S
S
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is
widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating
and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a
wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables
centralized remote access authentication for network management.
Vigor router can be operated as a RADIUS client. Therefore, this page is used to configure
settings for external RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by
such server for network application.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check to enable RADIUS client feature.
Server IP Address /
Hostname
Enter the IP address / hostname of RADIUS server
Destination Port The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The
default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.
Shared Secret The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to
authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides
must be configured to use the same shared secret. The
maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36
characters.
Confirm Shared Secret Re-Enter the Shared Secret for confirmation.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
144
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
4
4
U
U
P
P
n
n
P
P
The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected
devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly
connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers,
the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside
the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Info
UPnP is required for some applications such as PPS, Skype, eMule...and etc.
If you are not familiar with UPnP, it is suggested to turn off this function for
security.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable UPNP Service Accordingly, you can enable either the Connection Control
Service or Connection Status Service.
The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP:
Can't work with Firewall Software
Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly.
This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.
Security Considerations
Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should
consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.
Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you
need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.
Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding
port mappings.
The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware
applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be
removed.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
145
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
5
5
I
I
G
G
M
M
P
P
IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication
protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups.
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
5
5
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of
multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port.
In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.
Interface – Specify an interface for packets passing
through.
IGMP version – At present, two versions (v2 and v3) are
supported by Vigor router. Choose the correct version
based on the IPTV service you subscribe.
General Query Interval – Vigor router will periodically
check which IP obtaining IPTV service by sending query. It
might cause inconvenience for client. Therefore, set a
suitable time (unit: second) as the query interval to limit
the frequency of query sent by Vigor router.
Add PPP header – Check this box if the interface type for
IGMP is PPPoE. It depends on the specifications regulated
by each ISP. If you have no idea to enable or disable, simply
contact your ISP providers.
IGMP Snooping Check this box to enable this function. Multicast traffic will
be forwarded to ports that have members of that group.
Disabling IGMP snooping will make multicast traffic treated
in the same manner as broadcast traffic.
IGMP Fast Leave Check this box to make the router stop forwarding
multicast traffic to a LAN port as soon as it receives a leave
message from that port. Each LAN port should have one
IGMP host connected.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
146
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
5
5
-
-
2
2
W
W
o
o
r
r
k
k
i
i
n
n
g
g
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.
Group ID This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The
available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.254.
P1 to P2 It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
14
7
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
-
-
6
6
S
S
M
M
S
S
A
A
l
l
e
e
r
r
t
t
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
The function of SMS (Short Message Service) Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to
user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the
real-time abnormal situations.
Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to
different conditions.
This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and
when the SMS will be sent.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check the box to enable such profile.
SMS Provider Use the drop down list to choose SMS service provider.
You can click SMS Provider link to define the SMS server.
Recipient Number Enter the phone number of the one who will receive the
SMS.
Notify Profile Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The
recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.
You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content
of the SMS.
Schedule (1-15) Enter the schedule number that the SMS will be sent out.
You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the
schedule.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
148
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
u
u
s
s
e
e
D
D
r
r
a
a
y
y
D
D
D
D
N
N
S
S
?
?
Vigor router supports various DDNS service providers, user can set up user-defined profile to
update the DDNS even the service provider is not on the list. Now, DrayTek starts to support
our own DDNS service - DrayDDNS. We will provide a domain name for each Vigor Router, this
single domain name can record IP addresses of all WAN.
A
A
c
c
t
t
i
i
v
v
a
a
t
t
e
e
D
D
r
r
a
a
y
y
D
D
D
D
N
N
S
S
L
L
i
i
c
c
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
1. Go to Wizards >> Service Activation Wizard, wait for the router to connect to MyVigor
server, then tick DT-DDNS and I have read and accept the above Agreement, click
Next.
2. Confirm the information, then click Activate.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
149
3. MyVigor server will reply with the service activation information.
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
e
e
D
D
D
D
N
N
S
S
P
P
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
1. Go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup,
a. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Setup
b. Click an available profile index
c. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Account
d. Select DrayTek Global (www.drayddns.com) as Service Provider
e. Select the WAN you would like to upload the IP to DDNS server
f. Click Get domain
g. Click OK on the pop up notification window
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
150
2. Wait few seconds for router to get the domain name, then, we can click the profile to
check the information of license and domain name.
M
M
o
o
d
d
i
i
f
f
y
y
D
D
o
o
m
m
a
a
i
i
n
n
N
N
a
a
m
m
e
e
Currently, only the domain name is allowed to be modified MyVigor website. We will need to
register the router to MyVigor server, and log in to MyVigor website to modify it.
1. Please visit https://myvigor.draytek.com/ or go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup
>> DrayDDNS profile and click Edit domain.
2. Log in to MyVigor Website, choose the profile, then click Edit DDNS settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
151
3. Input the desired Domain name (e.g., XXXX25) and click Update.
4. Vigor router will get the modified domain name when the it performs next DDNS
updating. We can click Sync domain to accelerate this process.
After few seconds, the router will get the new domain name and print it on the profiles
list.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
152
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
153
A
A
-
-
2
2
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
e
e
C
C
u
u
s
s
t
t
o
o
m
m
i
i
z
z
e
e
d
d
D
D
D
D
N
N
S
S
?
?
This article describes how to configure customized DDNS on Vigor routers to update your IP to
the DDNS server. We will take “Changeip.org” and “3322.net” as example. Before setting,
please make sure that the WAN connection is up.
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
A
A
:
:
C
C
h
h
a
a
n
n
g
g
e
e
i
i
p
p
.
.
o
o
r
r
g
g
Note that,
Username: jo***
Password: jo********
Host name: j*****.changeip.org
WAN IP address: 1.169.185.242
Following is the screenshot of editing the HTML script on the browser to update your IP to the
DDNS server.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
154
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.
1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for user-defined DDNS
client.
2. Set the Service Provider as User-Defined.
3. Set the Service API as:
/dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j****.changeip.org&ip=###IP
### &cmd=update&offline=0
In which, ###IP### is a value which will be replaced with the current interface IP
address automatically when DDNS service is running. In this case the IP will be
1.169.185.242.
4. After setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to the
DDNS server.
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
B
B
:
:
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
.
.
n
n
e
e
t
t
Username: bi*******
Password: 88********
Host name: bi*******.3322.org
WAN IP address: 111.243.178.53
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
155
To update the IP to the DDNS server via editing the HTML script, we can Enter the following
script on the browser:
good 111.243.178.53” means our IP has been updated to the server successfully.
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.
1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for User-Defined DDNS
client.
2. Set the Service Provider as User-Defined.
3. Set the Provider Host as member.3322.net.
4. Set the Service API as:
/dyndns/update?hostname=yourhost.3322.org&myip=###IP###&wildcard=OFF&mx=mail
.exchanger.ext&backmx=NO&offline=NO
5. Enter your account and password.
6. After the setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to
the DDNS server automatically.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
156
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
C
C
:
:
E
E
x
x
t
t
e
e
n
n
d
d
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
The customized Service Provider is also eligible with the ClouDNS.net.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
15
7
I
I
I
I
-
-
6
6
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need
to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they
match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance,
security, routing decision, and etc.
Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be
used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request. In general, Route Policy can easily
reach the following purposes:
Specify Interface
Through dedicated interface (WAN/LAN/VPN), the data can be sent from the source IP to the
destination IP.
Address Mapping
Allows you specify the outgoing WAN IP address (es) for an internal private IP address or a
range of internal private IP addresses.
Priority
The router will determine which policy will be adopted for transmitting the packet according
to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.
Failover to/Failback
Packets will be sent through another Interface or follow another Policy when the original
interface goes down (Failover to). Once the original interface resumes service (Failback),
the packets will be returned to it immediately.
Other routing
Specify routing policy to determine the direction of the data transmission.
Info
For more detailed information about using policy route, refer to Support
>>FAQ/Application Notes on www.draytek.com.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
158
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
-
-
6
6
-
-
1
1
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
Static routing is an alternative to dynamic routing. It is a process that the system network
administrator can configure network routers with all the required information for packet
forwarding.
Go to Routing >> Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static
route. Both protocols bring different web pages.
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
4
4
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Viewing Routing Table Displays the routing table for your reference.
Index The number (1 to 30) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Enable Check the box to enable such route.
Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
159
A
A
d
d
d
d
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
s
s
t
t
o
o
P
P
r
r
i
i
v
v
a
a
t
t
e
e
a
a
n
n
d
d
P
P
u
u
b
b
l
l
i
i
c
c
N
N
e
e
t
t
w
w
o
o
r
r
k
k
s
s
Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B
locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet
access has been configured and the router works properly:
use the Main Router to surf the Internet.
create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)
create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).
have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.
Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward
recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.
1. Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control.
Then click the OK button.
Info
There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on
1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP
packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet
(192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal
private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the
router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with
different subnets.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
160
2. Click the LAN >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box.
Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to
192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IP
Address
Type an IP address as the destination of such static route.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for such static route.
Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for such
static route.
3. Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another
static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be
forwarded to 192.168.1.3. Click OK.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
161
4. Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
c
c
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following
page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Viewing IPv6 Routing
Table
Displays the routing table for your reference.
Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Enable Check the box to enable such static route.
Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.
Click any underline of index number to get the following page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
162
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IPv6 Address /
Prefix Len
Enter the IP address with the prefix length for this entry.
Gateway IPv6 Address Enter the gateway address for this entry.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static
route.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
163
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
L
L
A
A
N
N
Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users
can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just
like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
164
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
L
L
A
A
N
N
This function is used for “n” model only.
Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth.
Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the
surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via
wireless communication products. The Vigor2620 wireless series router (with “n”, or “ac” in
model name) is designed for maximum flexibility and efficiency of a small office/home. Any
authorized staff can bring a built-in WLAN client PDA or notebook into a meeting room for
conference without laying a clot of LAN cable or drilling holes everywhere. Wireless LAN
enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a
wired LAN as well as Internet access.
The Vigor wireless routers are equipped with a wireless LAN interface compliant with the
standard IEEE 802.11n draft 2 protocol. To boost its performance further, the Vigor Router is
also loaded with advanced wireless technology to lift up data rate up to 300 Mbps*. Hence,
you can finally smoothly enjoy stream music and video.
Vigor2620 wireless router is a highly integrated wireless local area network (WLAN) for 5 GHz
802.11ac or 2.4/5 GHz 802.11n WLAN applications. It supports channel operations of 20/40
MHz at 2.4 GHz and 20/40/80 MHz at 5 GHz. Vigor2620 “ac” series router can support data
rates up to 1.3 Gbps in 802.11ac 80 MHz channels. Vigor2620 “n” series router supports
802.11n up to 300 Mbps for 40 MHz channel operations.
Info
The actual data throughput will vary according to the network conditions
and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, network
overhead and building materials.
In an Infrastructure Mode of wireless network, Vigor wireless router plays a role as an Access
Point (AP) connecting to lots of wireless clients or Stations (STA). All the STAs will share the
same Internet connection via Vigor wireless router. The General Settings will set up the
information of this wireless network, including its SSID as identification, located channel etc.
M
M
u
u
l
l
t
t
i
i
p
p
l
l
e
e
S
S
S
S
I
I
D
D
s
s
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
165
Vigor router supports four SSID settings for wireless connections. Each SSID can be defined
with different name and download/upload rate for selecting by stations connected to the
router wirelessly.
R
R
e
e
a
a
l
l
-
-
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
H
H
a
a
r
r
d
d
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
E
E
n
n
c
c
r
r
y
y
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest
protection to your data without influencing user experience.
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
t
t
e
e
S
S
e
e
c
c
u
u
r
r
i
i
t
t
y
y
S
S
t
t
a
a
n
n
d
d
a
a
r
r
d
d
S
S
e
e
l
l
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several
prevailing standards on market.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via
radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key. Usually access point will preset a set of four keys
and it will communicate with each station using only one out of the four keys.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), the most dominating security mechanism in industry, is
separated into two categories: WPA-personal or called WPA Pre-Share Key (WPA/PSK), and
WPA-Enterprise or called WPA/802.1x.
In WPA-Personal, a pre-defined key is used for encryption during data transmission. WPA
applies Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption while WPA2 applies AES.
The WPA-Enterprise combines not only encryption but also authentication.
Since WEP has been proved vulnerable, you may consider using WPA for the most secure
connection. You should select the appropriate security mechanism according to your needs.
No matter which security suite you select, they all will enhance the over-the-air data
protection and /or privacy on your wireless network. The Vigor wireless router is very flexible
and can support multiple secure connections with both WEP and WPA at the same time.
Info
The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the
label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants
to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK
value for connection.
S
S
e
e
p
p
a
a
r
r
a
a
t
t
e
e
t
t
h
h
e
e
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
a
a
n
n
d
d
t
t
h
h
e
e
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
d
d
L
L
A
A
N
N
-
-
W
W
L
L
A
A
N
N
I
I
s
s
o
o
l
l
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
It enables you to isolate your wireless LAN from wired LAN for either quarantine or limit
access reasons. To isolate means neither of the parties can access each other. To elaborate
an example for business use, you may set up a wireless LAN for visitors only so they can
connect to Internet without hassle of the confidential information leakage. For a more
flexible deployment, you may add filters of MAC addresses to isolate users’ access from wired
LAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
166
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
-
-
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
L
L
i
i
s
s
t
t
It will display all the stations in your wireless network and the status of their connection.
W
W
P
P
S
S
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between
wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and
WPA2.
Info
WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported.
It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router.
Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to
setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press a button on wireless client, and
WPS will connect for client and router automatically.
There are two methods to do network connection through WPS between AP and Stations:
pressing the Start PBC button or using PIN Code.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
167
On the side of Vigor2620 series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the
front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side
of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card.
If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client.
Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.
For WPS is supported in WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode, if you do not choose such mode in
Wireless LAN>>Security, you will see the following message box.
Please click OK and go back Wireless LAN>>Security to choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode
and access WPS again.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
168
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
W
W
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
W
W
i
i
z
z
a
a
r
r
d
d
The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or
internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing
into Internet).
Follow the steps listed below:
1. Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard.
2. The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal
users in a company or your home. Besides, the settings will change based on different
model of Vigor2620 series. In this case, Vigor2620Ln is used as an example.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Enter the SSID name of this router for wireless connection.
The default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name
if required.
Mode At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only,
11n Only, Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11g+11n) and Mixed
(11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed
(11b+11g+11n) mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
169
Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The
default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected
channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of
choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system
determine for you.
Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
“0x321253abcde…”).
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.
3. After typing the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the
wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN
network and VPN connection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.
SSID Enter the SSID name of this router. (SSID1)
Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
170
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Rate Control Check the box to enable the rate control function.
Upload / Download - Enter the values as the limits for data
upload and data download.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.
4. After typing the required information, click Next.
5. The following page will display the configuration summary for wireless setting.
6. Click Finish to complete the wireless settings configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
171
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
By clicking the Wireless LAN>>General Setup, a new web page will appear so that you could
configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more
information.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Wireless LAN Check the box to enable wireless function.
Mode For 2.4GHz: At present, the router can connect to 11b Only,
11g Only, 11n Only(2.4 GHz), Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed
(11g+11n), and Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations
simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed (11b+11g+11n) mode.
Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The
default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected
channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of
choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system
determine for you.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
172
Hide SSID Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder
for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN.
Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the
information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about
Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows
you to set four sets of SSID for different usage. In default,
the first set of SSID will be enabled. You can hide it for your
necessity.
SSID Means the identification of the wireless LAN. SSID can be any
text numbers or various special characters.
Isolate Member –Check this box to make the wireless clients
(stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.
VPN – Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations)
with different VPN not accessing for each other.
Rate Control Enable – Check the box to set the rate limit for data
transmission in upload and download.
It controls the data transmission rate through wireless
connection.
Upload – Check Enable and enter the transmitting rate for
data upload. Default value is 30,000 kbps.
Download – Enter the transmitting rate for data download.
Default value is 30,000 kbps.
Schedule Profiles Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only.
You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default
setting of this field is blank and the function will always
work.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
173
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
S
S
e
e
c
c
u
u
r
r
i
i
t
t
y
y
This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it.
The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the
bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such
router, please input the default PSK value for connection.
By clicking the Wireless LAN>>Security Settings, a new web page will appear so that you
could configure the settings of WPA and WEP.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
174
Mode
There are several modes provided for you to choose.
Info
You should also set RADIUS Server
simultaneously if 802.1x mode is selected.
Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism.
WEP - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key
should be entered in WEP Key.
WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
WPA/802.1x Only - Accepts only WPA clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
WPA2/802.1x Only - Accepts only WPA2 clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) - Accepts WPA and WPA2
clients simultaneously and the encryption key is obtained
dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.
WPA/PSK - Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key
should be entered in PSK.
WPA2/PSK - Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption
key should be entered in PSK.
Mixed (WPA+ WPA2)/PSK - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients
simultaneously and the encryption key should be entered in
PSK.
WPA
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as
012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as
012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Password Strength – The system will display the password
strength (represented with the word of weak, medium or
strong) of the PSK specified above.
WEP
64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such
as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as
0x4142434445.)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
175
128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters,
such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by
0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D).
All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption
bit size and have the same key. Four keys can be entered
here, but only one key can be selected at a time. The keys
can be entered in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you
wish to use.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
l
l
In the Access Control, the router may restrict wireless access to certain wireless clients only
by locking their MAC address into a black or white list. The user may block wireless clients by
inserting their MAC addresses into a black list, or only let them be able to connect by inserting
their MAC addresses into a white list.
In the Access Control web page, users may configure the white/black list modes used by each
SSID and the MAC addresses applied to their lists.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Mac Address Filter
Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN
identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
176
(expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be
grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can
be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you
check SSID 1 and SSID 2.
MAC Address Filter Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.
Client’s MAC Address Manually enter the MAC address of wireless client.
Apply SSID After entering the client’s MAC address, check the box of the
SSIDs desired to insert this MAC address into their access
control list.
Attribute s: Isolate the station from LAN - select to isolate the
wireless connection of the wireless client of the MAC address
from LAN.
Comment Enter a brief description for the specified client’s MAC
address.
Add Add a new MAC address into the list.
Delete Delete the selected MAC address in the list.
Edit Edit the selected MAC address in the list.
Cancel Give up the access control set up.
OK Click it to save the access control list.
Clear All Clean all entries in the MAC address list.
Backup Access Control Settings on this web page can be saved as a file which can be
restored in the future by this device or other device.
Upload From File Restore wireless access control settings and applied onto this
device.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
W
W
P
P
S
S
Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
177
Item Description
Enable WPS Check this box to enable WPS setting.
WPS Status Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless
security (encryption) function of the router is properly
configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here.
SSID Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1
only.
Authentication Mode Display current authentication mode of the router. Only
WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.
Configure via Push Button
Click Start PBC to invoke Push-Button style WPS setup
procedure. The router will wait for WPS requests from
wireless clients about two minutes. The WPS LED on the
router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to
normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS
within two minutes)
Configure via Client
PinCode
Please input the PIN code specified in wireless client you
wish to connect, and click Start PIN button. The WPS LED on
the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will
return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to
setup WPS within two minutes)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
178
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
6
6
W
W
D
D
S
S
WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP)
wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application:
Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air.
Extend the coverage range of a WLAN.
Refer to the following table:
WDS Mode Wireless
Signal
Comparisons
Bridge
Limited
Wireless stations (clients) within the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP.
Wireless stations (clients) out of the effective range of
wireless signal cannot access into Internet through the
router /AP with Bridge mode configured.
The packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded
to local wired or wireless hosts.
Repeater
Extended
Wireless stations (clients) within the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP.
Wireless stations (clients) out of the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP with Repeater mode configured.
The packets received from one Vigor router can be repeated
to another AP (remotely) through WDS links.
Only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.
The WDS - Repeater mode is implemented in Vigor router. The application for the
WDS-Repeater mode is depicted as below:
Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
179
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Mode Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not
invoke any WDS setting. Repeater mode is for the second
one.
Security There are three types for security, Disable, WEP and
Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the
following WEP or Pre-shared key field valid or not. Choose
one of the types for the router.
Pre-shared Key When Pre-Shared Key is selected as Security above,
configure the following settings if required.
Type – There are some types for you to choose. WPA and
WPA2 are used for WDS devices (e.g.2925n wireless router,
you can set the encryption mode as WPA or WPA2 to establish
your WDS system between AP and the router.
Key – Set the encryption key in this field. Type 8 ~ 63 ASCII
characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by “0x”.
Bridge
If you choose Bridge as the connecting mode, please Enter
the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer MAC
addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time.
Yet please disable the unused link to get better
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
180
performance. If you want to invoke the peer MAC address,
remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC
address after typing.
Repeater If you choose Repeater as the connecting mode, please Enter
the peer MAC address (of VigorAP/Vigor router required to
make connection with such Vigor router and used to extend
the wireless signal) in these fields.
Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this
page at one time. Similarly, if you want to invoke the peer
MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of
the MAC address after typing.
Access Point Function Click Enable to make this router serve as an access point.
When Repeater is set as WDS Mode, click Enable to use such
function.
Click Disable if Bridge is set as WDS Mode.
Status It allows user to send “hello” message to peers. Yet, it is
valid only when the peer also supports this function.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
181
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
7
7
A
A
d
d
v
v
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
d
d
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth,
guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Operation Mode Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways
supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards.
However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed
down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.
Green Field – to get the highest throughput, please choose
such mode. Such mode can make the data transmission
happen between 11n systems only. In addition, it does not
have protection mechanism to avoid the conflict with
neighboring devices of 802.11a/b/g.
Channel Bandwidth Vigor router will use 20MHz/40MHz/80MHz for data
transmission and receiving between the AP and the stations.
20/40- Vigor Router will scan for nearby wireless AP, and
then use 20MHz if the number of AP is more than 10, or use
40MHz if it's not.
Guard Interval It is to assure the safety of propagation delays and
reflections for the sensitive digital data. If you choose auto
as guard interval, the AP router will choose short guard
interval (increasing the wireless performance) or long guard
interval for data transmit based on the station capability.
Aggregation MSDU
Aggregation MSDU can combine frames with different sizes
.
It is used for improving MAC layer’s performance for some
brand’s clients. The default setting is Enable.
Long Preamble This option is to define the length of the sync field in an
802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short
preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with
128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless
network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
182
use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind
of devices.
Packet-OVERDRIVE TX
Burst
This feature can enhance the performance in data
transmission about 40%* more (by checking Tx Burst). It is
active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in
wireless client) invoke this function at the same time. That
is, the wireless client must support this feature and invoke
the function, too.
Note: Vigor N61 wireless adapter supports this function.
Therefore, you can use and install it into your PC for
matching with Packet-OVERDRIVE (refer to the following
picture of Vigor N61 wireless utility window, choose Enable
for TxBURST on the tab of Option).
TX Power Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access
point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the
signal will be.
WMM Capable WMM is an abbreviation of Wi-Fi Multimedia. It defines the
priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d
(prioritization tabs). The categories are designed with
specific types of traffic, voice, video, best effort and low
priority data. There are four accessing categories - AC_BE ,
AC_BK, AC_VI and AC_VO for WMM.
To apply WMM parameters for wireless data transmission,
please click the Enable radio button.
APSD Capable APSD (automatic power-save delivery) is an enhancement
over the power-save mechanisms supported by Wi-Fi
networks. It allows devices to take more time in sleeping
state and consume less power to improve the performance
by minimizing transmission latency.
The default setting is Disable.
Rate Adaptation Algorithm
Wireless transmission rate is adapted dynamically. Usually,
performance of “new” algorithm is better than “old”.
Fragment Length
(256 – 2346)
Set the Fragment threshold. Do not modify
default value if
you don’t know what it is, default value is
2346.
RTS Threshold (1 – 2347) Minimize the collision (unit is bytes) between hidden stations
to improve wireless performance.
Set the RTS threshold. Do not modify default
value if you
don’t know what it is, default value is 2347.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
183
Country Code Vigor router broadcasts country codes by following the
802.11d standard. However, some wireless stations will
detect / scan the country code to prevent conflict occurred.
If conflict is detected, wireless station will be warned and is
unable to make network connection. Therefore, changing
the country code to ensure successful network connection
will be necessary for some clients.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
184
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
8
8
A
A
P
P
D
D
i
i
s
s
c
c
o
o
v
v
e
e
r
r
y
y
Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based
on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used
to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5
seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor.
This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which
is in the same channel of this router can be found. Please click Scan to discover all the
connected APs.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Scan It is used to discover all the connected AP. The results will be
shown on the box above this button.
Statistics It displays the statistics for the channels used by APs.
Add to If you want the found AP applying the WDS settings, please
Enter the AP’s MAC address on the bottom of the page and
click Repeater. Next, click Add to. Later, the MAC address of
the AP will be added to Bridge or Repeater field of WDS
settings page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
185
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
9
9
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
L
L
i
i
s
s
t
t
Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status
code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you
can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click this button to refresh the status of station list.
Add Click this button to add current typed MAC address into
Access Control.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
186
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
18
7
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
I
I
V
V
V
V
P
P
N
N
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a
private network that encompasses links across shared
or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN
technology, you can send data between two
computers across a shared or public network in a
manner that emulates the properties of a
point-to-point private link.
It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard
Web browser.
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which
is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains
information such as your name, a serial number,
expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the
certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can
verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router
support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
188
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
V
V
P
P
N
N
a
a
n
n
d
d
R
R
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links
across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send
data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the
properties of a point-to-point private link.
The VPN built is suitable for:
Communication between home office and customer
Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office
Exchange data between remote office and main office
POS between chain store and headquarters
S
S
i
i
t
t
e
e
-
-
t
t
o
o
-
-
S
S
i
i
t
t
e
e
(
(
L
L
A
A
N
N
-
-
t
t
o
o
-
-
L
L
A
A
N
N
)
)
A connection between two router's LAN networks.
Allows employees in branch offices and head office to share the same network resources.
R
R
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
(
(
R
R
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
D
D
i
i
a
a
l
l
-
-
i
i
n
n
)
)
A connection between the remote host and router's LAN network. The host will use an IP
address in the local subnet.
Allows employees to access the company's internal resources when they are traveling.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
189
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
V
V
P
P
N
N
C
C
l
l
i
i
e
e
n
n
t
t
W
W
i
i
z
z
a
a
r
r
d
d
Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the
LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step.
1. Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
LAN-to-LAN Client
Mode Selection
Choose the client mode.
Route Mode/NAT Mode – If the remote network only allows
you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT mode,
otherwise please choose Route Mode.
Please choose a
LAN-to-LAN Profile
There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
190
2. When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following
page.
In this page, you have to select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are six
types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page. After
making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different
configurations based on the selection(s) you made.
Info
The following descriptions for VPN Type are based on the Route Mode
specified in LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection.
When you choose PPTP (None Encryption) or PPTP (Encryption), you will see the
following graphic:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
191
When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic:
When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
192
When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see
the following graphic:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
193
to 10 characters.
Always On Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.
Server IP/Host Name
for VPN
Enter the IP address of the server or Enter the host name for
such VPN profile.
IKE Authentication
Method
IKE Authentication Method usually applies to those are
remote dial-in user or node (LAN to LAN) which uses dynamic
IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP
over IPsec and IPsec tunnel.
Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.
Confirm Pre-Shared Key-Confirm the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature
(X.509)
Click Digital Signature to invoke this function.
Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down
list.
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject
Name First.
Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of
the certificates for using. You have to configure one
certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >>
Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here
will not be effective.
IPsec Security Method
Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is active.
High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload
(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
User Name This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the user name is limited to 11 characters.
Password This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.
Remote Network IP Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Remote Network
Mask
Please Enter the network mask (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Local Network IP Enter the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.
Local Network Mask Enter the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.
3. After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be
shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on
the page and click Finish to execute the next action.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
194
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Go to the VPN
Connection
Management
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN
Connection status.
Do another VPN
Server Wizard Setup
Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server
through VPN Server Wizard.
View more detailed
configuration
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
195
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
V
V
P
P
N
N
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
e
e
r
r
W
W
i
i
z
z
a
a
r
r
d
d
Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the
LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step.
1. Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
VPN Server Mode
Selection
Choose the direction for the VPN server.
Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically,
please choose Site to Site VPN.
Remote Dial-in User –You can manage remote access by
maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can
be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection.
Please choose a
LAN-to-LAN Profile
This item is available when you choose Site to Site VPN
(LAN-to-LAN) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN profiles
for users to set.
Please choose a
Dial-in User Accounts
This item is available when you choose Remote Dial-in User
(Teleworker) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN tunnels
for users to set.
Allowed Dial-in Type This item is available after you choose any one of dial-in user
account profiles. Next, you have to select suitable dial-in
type for the VPN server profile. There are several types
provided here (similar to VPN Client Wizard).
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
196
Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration
page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will
be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site
VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected.
2. After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different
configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing
Site-to-Site VPN as the VPN Server Mode.
When you check PPTP/SSL, you will see the following graphic:
When you check PPTP & IPsec & L2TP (three types) or PPTP & IPsec (two types) or L2TP
with Policy (Nice to Have/Must), you will see the following graphic:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
19
7
When you check IPsec, you will see the following graphic:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited
to 10 characters.
User Name This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
198
Password This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
Pre-Shared Key For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a
pre-shared key.
The length of the name is limited to 64 characters.
Confirm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the pre-shared key again for confirmation.
Digital Signature
(X.509)
Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function.
Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down
list.
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject
Name First.
Peer IP/VPN Client IP Enter the WAN IP address or VPN client IP address for the
remote client.
Peer ID Enter the ID name for the remote client.
The length of the name is limited to 47 characters.
Remote Network IP Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Remote Network
Mask
Please Enter the network mask (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Local Network IP Enter the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.
Local Network Mask Enter the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.
3. After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be
shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on
the page and click Finish to execute the next action.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
199
Item Description
Go to the VPN
Connection
Management
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN
Connection status.
Do another VPN
Server Wizard Setup
Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server
through VPN Server Wizard.
View more detailed
configuration
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
R
R
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
l
l
Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your
LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as
well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.
Open VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Access Control.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
200
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
P
P
P
P
P
P
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over
IPsec.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Dial-In PPP Authentication
PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to
authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option
means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users
with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not
support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol
for authentication.
Dial-In PPP Encryption
(MPPE)
Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE
encryption method will be optionally employed in the router
for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does
not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will
transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE
encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.
Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will
force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE
encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in
user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using
128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE
encryption method is not available, then 40-bit
encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.
Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router
will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum
bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.
Mutual Authentication
(PAP)
The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to
communicate with other routers or clients who need
bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger
security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable
this function when your peer router requires mutual
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
201
authentication. You should further specify the User Name
and Password of the mutual authentication peer.
The length of the name/password is limited to 23/19
characters.
IP Address Assignment for
Dial-In Users
Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection. You
should choose an IP address from the local private network.
For example, if the local private network is
192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, you could choose 192.168.1.200
as the Start IP Address.
You can configure up to four start IP addresses for LAN1 ~
LAN4.
PPP Authentication
Methods
Select the method(s) to be used for authentication in PPP
connection.
While using Radius
Authentication
If PPP connection will be authenticated via RADIUS server, it
is necessary to specify the LAN profile for the dial-in user to
get IP from.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
202
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
I
I
P
P
s
s
e
e
c
c
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.
There are two phases of IPsec.
Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman
parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of
both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that
starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer
tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure
tunnel for IKE Phase 2.
Phase 2: negotiation IPsec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual
examination of the secure tunnel establishment.
There are two encapsulation methods used in IPsec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport
mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload
only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPsec. The Tunnel mode will not only
add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the
whole original IP packet.
Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed
between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to
create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets.
On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and
compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality
and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
IKE Authentication
Method
This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node
(LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and
IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
203
IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router
for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from
remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared
Key.
Certificate for Dial-in –Choose one of the local certificates
from the drop down list.
General Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for general
authentication.
Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.
Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to
confirm the pre-shared key.
Pre-Shared Key for XAuth User - Define the PSK key for
IPsec XAuth authentication.
Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.
Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to
confirm the pre-shared key.
Note: Any packets from the remote dial-in user which does
not match the rule defined in VPN and Remote
Access>>Remote Dial-In User will be applied with the
method specified here.
IPsec Security Method Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is active.
High (ESP) - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You
may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption
Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
204
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
6
6
I
I
P
P
s
s
e
e
c
c
P
P
e
e
e
e
r
r
I
I
d
d
e
e
n
n
t
t
i
i
t
t
y
y
To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote
User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown
below, the router provides 32 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of IPsec Peer Identity.
Name Display the profile name of that index.
Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital
signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The
following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
205
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Enter the name of the profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 32 characters.
Enable this account Check it to enable such account profile.
Accept Any Peer ID Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.
Accept Subject
Alternative Name
Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept
the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address,
Domain, or E-mail. The box under the Type will appear
according to the type you select and ask you to fill in
corresponding setting.
Accept Subject Name Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to
accept the peer with matching value. The field includes
Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O),
Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email
(E).
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
206
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
7
7
R
R
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
D
D
i
i
a
a
l
l
-
-
i
i
n
n
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users
can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including
specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel,
and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
The router provides multiple access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the
user accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following
figure shows the summary table.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of Remote Dial-in User.
Enable Check the box to enable the profile.
User Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the
LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
20
7
profile is empty.
Status Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The
symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be
active and inactive, respectively.
Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the
different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
User account and
Authentication
Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.
Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of
the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default,
the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.
Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN
connection through the Internet. You should set the User
Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.
IPsec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an
IPsec VPN connection through Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to
make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can
select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
208
None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec
policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.
Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in
VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
Must -Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied
on the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an SSL
VPN connection through Internet.
IPsec XAuth – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPsec
VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet.
Specify Remote Node -You can specify the IP address of the
remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE
aggressive mode).
Uncheck the checkbox means the connection type you select
above will apply the authentication methods and security
methods in the general settings.
Netbios Naming Packet -
Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.
Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.
Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.
Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 23 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this
box to make the authentication with mOTP function.
PIN Code – Enter the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP
in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
Subnet Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.
Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for
the subnet you specified.
IKE Authentication
Method
This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP
with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the
remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509)
can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or
without specifying the IP address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke
this function and Enter the required characters (1-63) as the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
209
pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature
to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set
in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
IPsec Security Method This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with
IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the
Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.
Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload
(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID (Optional)- Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in
setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional
and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
8
8
L
L
A
A
N
N
t
t
o
o
L
L
A
A
N
N
Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles.
You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out),
connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and
L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
210
Name Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ???
represents that the profile is empty.
Active V – means the profile has been enabled.
X – means the profile has not been enabled.
Status Online – means such LAN to LAN profile is in use.
Offline – means such LAN to LAN profile isn’t in use even if
the profile has been enabled.
To edit each profile:
1. Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each
LAN-to-LAN profile includes 4 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Common Settings Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the
LAN-to-LAN connection.
Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile.
VPN Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a
proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful
for dial-out only.
WAN1 First/ WAN2 First/ LTE First - While connecting,
the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 as
the first channel for VPN connection. If
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 fails, the router will
use another WAN interface instead.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
211
WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/ LTE Only - While connecting,
the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 as
the only channel for VPN connection.
WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If
WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN
connection.
WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If
WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN
connection.
Netbios Naming Packet
Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.
Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.
Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.
Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
Call Direction - Specify the allowed call direction of this
LAN-to-LAN profile.
Both:-initiator/responder
Dial-Out- initiator only
Dial-In- responder only.
Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN
connection.
Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the
connection has been idled over the value, the router will
drop the connection.
Enable PING to keep IPsec tunnel alive - This function is to
help the router to determine the status of IPsec VPN
connection, especially useful in the case of abnormal VPN
IPsec tunnel disruption. For details, please refer to the note
below. Check to enable the transmission of PING packets to a
specified IP address.
This function is used to handle abnormal IPsec VPN
connection disruption. It will help to provide the state of a
VPN connection for router’s judgment of redial. Normally, if
any one of VPN peers wants to disconnect the connection, it
should follow a serial of packet exchange procedure to
inform each other. However, if the remote peer disconnects
without notice, Vigor router will by no where to know this
situation. To resolve this dilemma, by continuously sending
PING packets to the remote host, the Vigor router can know
the true existence of this VPN connection and react
accordingly. This is independent of DPD (dead peer
detection).
PING to the IP - Enter the IP address of the remote host that
located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel.
Dial-Out Settings Type of Server I am calling - PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN
connection to the server through the Internet. You should set
the identity like User Name and Password below for the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
212
authentication of remote server.
IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server
through Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection
through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or
with IPsec. Select from below:
None: Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec
policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.
Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out
VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied
on the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel - Build an SSL VPN connection to the server
through Internet.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 49 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 15 characters.
PPP Authentication - This field is applicable when you
select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 is the most common
selection due to compatibility.
VJ compression - This field is applicable when you select
PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. VJ
Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression.
Normally set to On to improve bandwidth utilization.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.
Pre-Shared Key - Input 1-63 characters as pre-shared
key.
Digital Signature (X.509) - Select one predefined
Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec
Peer Identity.
Peer ID - Select one of the predefined Profiles set in
VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
Local ID – Specify a local ID (Alternative Subject Name
First or Subject Name First) to be used for Dial-in
setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is
optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.
Local Certificate – Select one of the profiles set in
Certificate Management>>Local Certificate.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.
Medium AH (Authentication Header) means data will
be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.
High (ESP-Encapsulating Security Payl
oad)- means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
Select from below:
DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
213
scheme.
DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption
algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication
algorithm.
3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES
encryption algorithm and not apply any
authentication scheme.
3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES
encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1
authentication algorithm.
AES without Authentication-Use AES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication
scheme.
AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption
algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication
algorithm.
Advanced - Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE
phase, Gateway, etc.
The window of advance setup is shown as below:
IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive
mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security
proposals to create a protected secure channel. Main mode
is more secure than Aggressive mode since more exchanges
are done in a secure channel to set up the IPsec session.
However, the Aggressive mode is faster. The default value in
Vigor router is Main mode.
IKE phase 1 proposal-To propose the local available
authentication schemes and encryption algorithms to
the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match.
Two combinations are available for Aggressive mode
and nine for Main mode. We suggest you select the
combination that covers the most schemes.
IKE phase 2 proposal-To propose the local available
algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to
find a match. Three combinations are available for both
modes. We suggest you select the combination that
covers the most algorithms.
IKE phase 1 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
28800 seconds. You may specify a value in between 900
and 86400 seconds.
IKE phase 2 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
3600 seconds. You may specify a value in between 600
and 86400 seconds.
Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)-The IKE Phase 1 key will
be reused to avoid the computation complexity in
phase 2. The default value is inactive this function.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
214
Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of
the IP address while identity authenticating with
remote VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47
characters.
Schedule Profile - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain
time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of
the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule
setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the
function will always work.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Dial-In Settings Allowed Dial-In Type - Determine the dial-in connection
with different types.
PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP
VPN connection through the Internet. You should set
the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user
below.
IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger
an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user
to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet.
You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select
from below:
None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly,
the VPN connection employed the L2TP without
IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP
connection.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
215
Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the
dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP
connection.
Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely
applied on the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an
SSL VPN connection through Internet.
Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP
address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the
same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.
Also, you should further specify the corresponding security
methods on the right side.
If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select
above will apply the authentication methods and security
methods in the general settings.
Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 11 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 11 characters.
VJ Compression - VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP
protocol header compression. This field is applicable when
you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when
you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only
exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you
select IPsec tunnel either with or without specify the IP
address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to
invoke this function and Enter the required characters
(1-63) as the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) –Check the box of Digital
Signature to invoke this function and select one
predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access
>>IPsec Peer Identity.
Local ID – Specify which one will be inspected
first.
Alternative Subject Name First – The alternative
subject name (configured in Certificate
Management>>Local Certificate) will be
inspected first.
Subject Name First – The subject name
(configured in Certificate Management>>Local
Certificate) will be inspected first.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify
the remote node.
Medium- Authentication Header (AH) means data will
be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.
High- Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
You may select encryption algorithm from Data
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
216
Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
TCP/IP Network
Settings
My WAN IP –This field is only applicable when you select
PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default
value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a PPP
IP address from the remote router during the IPCP
negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote
side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the
default value if you do not select PPTP or L2TP.
Remote Gateway IP - This field is only applicable when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The
default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will
get a remote Gateway PPP IP address from the remote router
during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is
fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do
not change the default value if you do not select PPTP or
L2TP.
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static
route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPsec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Local Network IP / Local Network Mask - Display the local
network IP and mask for TCP / IP configuration. You can
modify the settings if required.
More - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Masks
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.
RIP Direction - The option specifies the direction of RIP
(Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can
enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide
four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.
From first subnet to remote network, you have to do - If
the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP,
please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.
Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to
change the default route with this VPN tunnel.
IPSec VPN with the
Same subnet
For both ends (e.g., different sections in a company) are
within the same subnet, there is a function which allows you
to build Virtual IP mapping between two ends. Thus, when
VPN connection established, the router will change the IP
address according to the settings configured here and block
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
21
7
sessions which are not coming from the IP address defined in
the Virtual IP Mapping list.
After checking the box of IPSec VPN with the Same subnet,
the options under TCP/IP Network Settings will be changed
as shown below:
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static
route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPSec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Translated Local Network – This function is enabled in
default. Use the drop down list to specify a LAN port as the
transferred direction. Then specify an IP address. Click
Advanced to configure detailed settings if required.
Advanced – Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Mask
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.
Translated Type – There are two types for you to choose.
Whole Subnet
Specific IP Address
Virtual IP Mapping – A pop up dialog will appear for you to
specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP
address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
218
2. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
219
I
I
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
9
9
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN
connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool
and clicking Dial button.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Dial-out Tool This filed displays the profile configured in LAN-to-LAN (with
Index number and VPN Server IP address). The VPN
connection built by General Mode does not support VPN
backup function.
Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
220
I
I
V
V
-
-
2
2
S
S
S
S
L
L
V
V
P
P
N
N
An SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that can be used
with a standard Web browser.
There are two benefits that SSL VPN provides:
It is not necessary for users to preinstall VPN client software for executing SSL VPN
connection.
There are less restrictions for the data encrypted through SSL VPN in comparing with
traditional VPN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
221
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This page determines the general configuration for SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Bind to WAN Choose and check WAN interface(s) for SSL VPN tunnel
establishment.
Port Such port is set for SSL VPN server. It will not affect the HTTPS
Port configuration set in System Maintenance>>Management.
In general, the default setting is 443.
Server Certificate When the client does not set any certificate, default
certificate will be used for HTTPS and SSL VPN server. Choose
any one of the user-defined certificates from the drop down
list if users set several certificates previously. Otherwise,
choose Self-signed to use the router’s built-in default
certificate. The default certificate can be used in SSL VPN
server and HTTPS Web Proxy.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
222
I
I
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
A
A
c
c
c
c
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
With SSL VPN, Vigor2620 series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to
central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From
regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a
guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for
secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel
mode or proxy mode. Now, Vigor2620 series allows up to 16 simultaneous incoming users.
For SSL VPN, identity authentication and power management are implemented through
deploying user accounts. Therefore, the user account for SSL VPN must be set together with
remote dial-in user web page. Such menu item will guide to access into VPN and Remote
Access>>Remote Dial-in user.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
223
Click each index to edit one remote user profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
User account and
Authentication
Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.
Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of
the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the
Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.
Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name/password is limited to 23 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name/password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box
to make the authentication with mOTP function.
PIN Code – Enter the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in
the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN
connection through the Internet. You should set the User
Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.
IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPSec
VPN connection through Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
224
Item Description
L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to
make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can
select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select from below:
None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPSec policy
can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.
Nice to Have - Apply the IPSec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN
connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
Must -Specify the IPSec policy to be definitely applied on
the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel - It allows the remote dial-in user to make an SSL
VPN Tunnel connection through Internet, suitable for the
application through network accessing (e.g., PPTP / L2TP /
IPSec).
If you check this box, the function of SSL Tunnel for this
account will be activated immediately.
IPsec XAuth – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPsec
VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet.
Specify Remote Node - Check the checkbox to specify the IP
address of the remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID
(used in IKE aggressive mode). If you uncheck the checkbox,
the connection type you select above will apply the
authentication methods and security methods in the general
settings.
Netbios Naming Packet
Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.
Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.
Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.
Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
Subnet Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.
Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for
the subnet you specified.
IKE Authentication
Method
This group of fields is applicable for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP
with IPSec Policy when you specify the IP address of the
remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509)
can be set when you select IPSec tunnel either with or without
specify the IP address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke
this function and Enter the required characters (1-63) as the
pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature
to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set
in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPSec Peer Identity.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
225
Item Description
IPSec Security Method This group of fields is a must for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with
IPSec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the
Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.
Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is
invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High(ESP-Encapsulating Security Payload) means payload
(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the
LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be
used only in IKE aggressive mode.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
226
I
I
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
S
S
S
S
L
L
P
P
o
o
r
r
t
t
a
a
l
l
O
O
n
n
l
l
i
i
n
n
e
e
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out
corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface.
Next, users can open SSL VPN>> Online Status to view logging status of SSL VPN.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Active User Display current user who visits SSL VPN server.
Host IP Display the IP address for the host.
Time out Display the time remaining for logging out.
Action You can click Drop to drop certain login user from the router's
SSL Portal UI.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
22
7
I
I
V
V
-
-
3
3
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
e
e
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).
It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the
digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the
certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.
Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA
server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate
the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.
Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA
certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that
you can get the correct valid period of certificate.
Below shows the menu items for Certificate Management.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
228
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
I
I
V
V
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
L
L
o
o
c
c
a
a
l
l
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
e
e
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request
window.
Enter all the information that the window requests. Then click
Generate again.
Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification
information.
Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate
request.
Delete Click this button to delete selected name with certification
information.
G
G
E
E
N
N
E
E
R
R
A
A
T
T
E
E
Click this button to open Generate Certificate Signing Request window. Enter all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE again.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
229
Info
Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with router’s
WAN IP or domain name.
After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:
I
I
M
M
P
P
O
O
R
R
T
T
Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then
import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party,
you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a
private key.
Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. There are three types
of local certificate supported by Vigor router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
230
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by
Vigor router and signed by CA server.
If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of
the certificate will be shown as “OK”.
Upload PKCS12
Certificate
It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are
usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually
need passwords.
Note that PKCS12 is a standard for storing private keys and
certificates securely. It is used in (among other things)
Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer with their import
and export options.
Upload Certificate and
Private Key
It is useful when users have separated certificates and private
keys. And the password is needed if the private key is
encrypted.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
231
R
R
E
E
F
F
R
R
E
E
S
S
H
H
Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
V
V
i
i
e
e
w
w
Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.
Info
You have to copy the certificate request information from above window.
Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy
the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be
issued to you by the CA server. You can save it.
D
D
e
e
l
l
e
e
t
t
e
e
Click this button to remove the selected certificate.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
232
I
I
V
V
-
-
3
3
-
-
2
2
T
T
r
r
u
u
s
s
t
t
e
e
d
d
C
C
A
A
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
e
e
Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a
RootCA certificate if required.
When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g.,
IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted
root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates
offered by both ends.
However, the procedure of applying digital certificate from a trusted root certificate
authority is complicated and time-consuming. Therefore, Vigor router offers a mechanism
which allows you to generate root CA to save time and provide convenience for general user.
Later, such root CA generated by DrayTek server can perform the issuing of local certificate.
Info
Root CA can be deleted but not edited. If you want to modify the settings
for a Root CA, please delete the one and create another one by clicking
Create Root CA.
C
C
r
r
e
e
a
a
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
a
a
R
R
o
o
o
o
t
t
C
C
A
A
Click Create to open the following page. Enter all the information that the window request
such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name
type and relational settings for subject name. Then click Generate again.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
233
I
I
m
m
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
a
a
T
T
r
r
u
u
s
s
t
t
e
e
d
d
C
C
A
A
To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following
window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you
imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window.
For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information
window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all
the certificate information.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
234
I
I
V
V
-
-
3
3
-
-
3
3
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
e
e
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
u
u
p
p
Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file.
Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption
password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password
and Confirm password.
Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
235
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
V
V
S
S
e
e
c
c
u
u
r
r
i
i
t
t
y
y
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth
for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance
learning, security has been always the most
concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to
protect your local network against attack from
unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the
local network from accessing the Internet.
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management
which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web
content and URL content to reach a goal of security
management.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
236
V
V
-
-
1
1
F
F
i
i
r
r
e
e
w
w
a
a
l
l
l
l
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications,
or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor
router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also
restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out
specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.
F
F
i
i
r
r
e
e
w
w
a
a
l
l
l
l
F
F
a
a
c
c
i
i
l
l
i
i
t
t
i
i
e
e
s
s
The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:
User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data
Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection
I
I
P
P
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
s
s
Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN
link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter
and Data Filter.
Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all
traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules.
If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet
connection and send the packet to Internet.
Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to
incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal,
the packet will pass the router.
The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic
and outgoing traffic respectively.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
23
7
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
e
e
f
f
u
u
l
l
P
P
a
a
c
c
k
k
e
e
t
t
I
I
n
n
s
s
p
p
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
(
(
S
S
P
P
I
I
)
)
Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy
static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header,
stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all
interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router
not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.
D
D
e
e
n
n
i
i
a
a
l
l
o
o
f
f
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
(
(
D
D
o
o
S
S
)
)
D
D
e
e
f
f
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks
are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks.
The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the
vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the
protocol or operation system.
The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on
the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze
the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning,
if you set up Syslog server.
Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined
parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router
will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.
The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:
1. SYN flood attack
2. UDP flood attack
3. ICMP flood attack
4. Port Scan attack
5. IP options
6. Land attack
7. Smurf attack
8. Trace route
9. SYN fragment
10. Fraggle attack
11. TCP flag scan
12. Tear drop attack
13. Ping of Death attack
14. ICMP fragment
15. Unassigned Numbers
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
238
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
Below shows the menu items for Firewall.
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can
enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can
be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can
configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept
incoming fragmented UDP packets.
Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
Such page allows you to enable / disable Call Filter and Data Filter, determine general rule
for filtering the incoming and outgoing data.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Call Filter Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Call Filter.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
239
Data Filter Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Data Filter.
Always pass inbound
fragmented large
packets…
Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of
fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively
as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these
fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable
Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”. By
checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games.
If security concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable
Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”.
Enable Strict Security
Firewall
For the sake of security, the router will execute strict
security checking for data transmission.
Such feature is enabled in default. All the packets, while
transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall. If the firewall system (e.g., content filter server)
does not make any response (pass or block) for these
packets, then the router’s firewall will block the packets
directly.
Block routing connections
initiated from WAN
Usually, IPv6 network sessions/traffic from WAN to LAN will
be accepted by IPv6 firewall in default.
IPv6 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the packets (routed from WAN to
LAN) via IPv6 being blocked by such router. It is effective
only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by
NAT.
IPv4 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the incoming packets via IPv4
being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the
packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.
Backup Firewall Click Backup to save the firewall configuration.
Restore Firewall Click Select to choose a firewall configuration file. Then
click Restore to apply the file.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
240
D
D
e
e
f
f
a
a
u
u
l
l
t
t
R
R
u
u
l
l
e
e
P
P
a
a
g
g
e
e
Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF,
APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Filter Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with
the filter rules.
Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The
default setting is 60000.
Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
related section later.
APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow
the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile
selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section
of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting
needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
241
URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this
router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>
URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New]
from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box.
It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters
among different languages. Choose correct codepage can
help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter.
The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you
do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be
processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a
codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the
dialog box.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol
(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
242
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout – Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources.
Backup Firewall Click Backup to save the firewall configuration.
Restore Firewall Click Select to choose a firewall configuration file. Then
click Restore to apply the file.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
243
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.
To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page
will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit
each rule. Check Active to enable the rule.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click
the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the
detailed information, refer to the following page.
Enable Check the box to enable the filter rule.
Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
23–character long.
Direction Display the direction of packet.
Src IP / Dst IP Display the IP address of source /destination.
Service Type Display the type and port number of the packet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
244
Action Display the packets to be passed /blocked.
CSM Display the content security managed
Move Up/Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.
Next Filter Set Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the
current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.
Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used settings for filter rule via
several setting pages.
Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule.
To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:
1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.
2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other
LAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
245
Source/Destination IP
Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the
source/destination IP or IP ranges.
Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.
Source Port /
Destination Port
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(>) the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
3. Click Next to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Pass Immediately Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.
APP Enforcement - Select an APP Enforcement profile for
global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for
you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
246
down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts
in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP
Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed
information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement
profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It
will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter - Select one of the URL Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page
to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for URL Content Filter by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
Web Content Filter - Select one of the Web Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page
to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for Web Content Filter by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
Block Immediately Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.
4. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.
5. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
247
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:
1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.
2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable the filter rule.
Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Schedule Profile Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You
may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The
default setting of this field is blank and the function will
always work.
Clear sessions when
schedule ON
Check this box to clear the sessions when the above
schedule profiles are applied.
Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other
LAN.
Source/Destination IP
Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
248
source/destination IP or IP ranges.
To set the IP address manually, please choose Any
Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as
the Address Type and type them in this dialog. In addition,
if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or
objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address
Type.
From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you
want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to
choose the object that you want.
Service Type Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a
suitable service type.
To set the service type manually, please choose User
defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In
addition, if you want to use the service type from defined
groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the
Service Type.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
249
Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will
apply to.
Source/Destination Port –
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(>) the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose
the one that you want.
Fragments Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used
for Data Filter only.
Don’t care -No action will be taken towards fragmented
packets.
Unfragmented -Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.
Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.
Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short
to contain a complete header.
Filter Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the
rule.
Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
dropped immediately.
Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
passed immediately.
Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule,
and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.
Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and
that does not match further rules, will be passed through.
Branch to other Filter
Set
If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule
will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule
to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the
router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will
not return to previous filter rule any more.
Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page.
The default setting is 60000.
MAC Bind IP
Strict Make the MAC address and IP address settings
configured in IP Object for Source IP and Destination IP
are bound for applying such filter rule.
No-Strict - no limitation.
Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
250
related section later.
APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must
follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement
profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to
the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For
troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be
sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail
Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in
CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for URL Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters
among different languages. Choose correct codepage can
help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content
Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
251
If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL
will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose
a codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on
the dialog box.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol
(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources. However, Queue
timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session
timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with
the firewall rule.
DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the
following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web
page. The default setting is Enabled.
Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while
transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall settings configured by Vigor router. When the
resource is inadequate, the packets will be blocked if Strict
Security Checking is enabled. If Strict Security Checking is
not enabled, then the packets will pass through the router.
3. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
252
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
D
D
o
o
S
S
D
D
e
e
f
f
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in
the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
D
D
o
o
S
S
D
D
e
e
f
f
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.
Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed
below.
White/Black List Option – Set white/black list of IPv4/IPv6
address.
Enable SYN flood defense Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from
the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor
router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP
SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for
this is prevent the TCP SYN packets’ attempt to exhaust the
limited-resource of Vigor router.
By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to
2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
253
Enable UDP flood defense
Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the
Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router
will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets
for a period defined in Timeout.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.
Enable ICMP flood defense
Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function.
Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the
Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the
defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo
requests coming from the Internet.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 250
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 250 packets per second received, they will be
regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused
for 10 seconds.
Enable Port Scan
detection
Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets
to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would
respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan
detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration
behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate,
the Vigor router will send out a warning.
By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 2000
packets per second. That means, when 2000 packets per
second received, they will be regarded as “attack event”.
Block IP options Check the box to activate the Block IP options function.
The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option
field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP
option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the
LAN because it will carry significant information, such as
security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of
Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An
eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your
private networks.
Block Land Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the
Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack
technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an
attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical
source and destination addresses, as well as the port
number to victims.
Block Smurf Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The
Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo
request.
Block trace route Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward
any trace route packets.
Block SYN fragment Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function.
The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and
more fragment bit set.
Block Fraggle Attack Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function.
Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is
blocked.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
254
Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block
some legal packets. For example, when you activate the
fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming
from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets
from the Internet might be dropped.
Block TCP flag scan Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function.
Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those
scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK
scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
Block Tear Drop Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function.
Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams
(packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this
type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of
discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length
greater than 1024 octets.
Block Ping of Death Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function.
This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping
packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will
hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers
will block any packets realizing this attacking activity.
Block ICMP Fragment Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment
function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are
dropped.
Block Unassigned Numbers
Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol
function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the
datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over
the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than
100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the
router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of
packets.
Warning Messages We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message
from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive
the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog
Client.
All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be
sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon.
Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a
name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
255
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
-
-
2
2
S
S
p
p
o
o
o
o
f
f
i
i
n
n
g
g
D
D
e
e
f
f
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
Click the Spoofing Defense tab to open the setup page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
256
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
e
e
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
a
a
i
i
n
n
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
s
s
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
n
n
g
g
t
t
o
o
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet
through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get
the source from LAN only.
The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under
Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting
from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2.
1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2. Open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link, choose Advance Mode and choose the
Filter Rule 2 button.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
257
3. Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Enter the comments (e.g., block_all).
Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK.
Info
In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter
Rule 2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for
Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules
starting from Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules
will be processed according to Rule 2.
4. Next, set another rule. Just open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and
choose the Filter Rule 3 button.
5. Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Enter the comments (e.g., open_ip).
Click the Edit button for Source IP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
258
6. A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the
drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the
field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can
access into the Internet.
7. Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set
with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
259
8. Both filter rules have been created. Click OK.
Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within
192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
260
V
V
-
-
2
2
C
C
e
e
n
n
t
t
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
c
c
u
u
r
r
i
i
t
t
y
y
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
(
(
C
C
S
S
M
M
)
)
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P
usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.
A
A
P
P
P
P
E
E
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
c
c
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot
become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to
connect with their customers, some industry may take reserved attitude in order to reduce
employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation
for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but
insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.
U
U
R
R
L
L
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user Enter or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
W
W
e
e
b
b
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be
inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in
your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect
your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and
security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or
chat rooms.
Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories
of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be
checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global
team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your
router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the
categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your
Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of
requests for categorization.
Info
The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
261
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
A
A
P
P
P
P
E
E
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
c
c
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
P
P
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc
application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP
Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.
Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
262
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page.
Clear All Uncheck all the selected boxes.
Enable Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor
router.
The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and
Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
263
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
U
U
R
R
L
L
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
P
P
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user Enter or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
For example, if you add key words such as “sex”, Vigor router will limit web access to web
sites or web pages such as “www.sex.com”, ”www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html”.
Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as “www.sex.com” or “sex.com”.
Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.
Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name Display the name of the URL Content Filter Profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
264
Administration Message You can Enter the message manually for your necessity.
Default Message - You can Enter the message manually for
your necessity or click this button to get the default message
which will be displayed on the field of Administration
Message.
You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile
to open the following web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Priority It determines the action that this router will apply.
Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below passing through. When you choose this
setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access
Control and Web Feature will be inactive.
Both:Block –The router will block all the packages that
match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both
configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web
Feature will be inactive.
Either: URL Access Control First – When all the packages
matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below, such function can determine the
priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router
will process the packages with the conditions set below for
URL first, then Web feature second.
Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages matching
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below, such function can determine the priority for
the actions executed. For this one, the router will process
the packages with the conditions set below for web feature
first, then URL second.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
265
Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL
Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access
Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web
content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the
router will execute the action specified in this field and
ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.
Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to deny
any web surfing activity using IP address, such as
http://202.6.3.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone
dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser
cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates
properly on a web page that you visited before.
Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL
Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is
selected.
Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.
Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding
webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the keyword set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
Exception List – Specify the object profile(s) as the
exception list which will be processed in an opposite manner
to the action selected above.
Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides several
frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports
multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial
noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a
frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In
addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character
long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline
the connection request to the website whose URL string
matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed
that the more simplified the blocking keyword list is, the
more efficiently the Vigor router performs.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
266
Web Feature Enable Web Feature Restriction- Check this box to make
the keyword being blocked or passed.
Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL
Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is
selected.
Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the keywords listed on the box below.
Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you
configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects
previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.
Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission
from inside to outside world to protect the local user's
privacy.
Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To
control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of
great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters
out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.
Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of
web page.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
267
V
V
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
W
W
e
e
b
b
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
P
P
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing
into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is
necessary for you to access into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using
corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account.
WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider (e.g., DrayTek).
No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to
click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with Vigor
router currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want
to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.
Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default
setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another
server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for
searching another qualified and suitable one.
Info 1
Web Content Filter (WCF) is not a built-in service of Vigor router but a
service powered by Commtouch. If you want to use such service (trial or
formal edition), you have to perform the procedure of activation first. For
the service of formal edition, please contact with your dealer/distributor
for detailed information.
Info 2
Commtouch is merged by Cyren, and GlobalView services will be continued
to deliver powerful cloud-based information security solutions! Refer to:
http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239
025151.html
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
268
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.
Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize
searching when you type URL in browser based on the web
content filter profile.
Find more - Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for
searching another qualified and suitable server.
Setup Test Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected.
Find more - Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for
searching another qualified and suitable server.
Cache None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is
normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL
matching.
L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it
will be stored in the router to be accessed quickly if
required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with
faster rate.
L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the
IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized
for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
269
user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will
check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the
page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL
matching with the fastest rate.
L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast
processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.
Set to Factory Default Click this link to retrieve the factory settings.
Administration Message You can Enter the message manually for your necessity or
click Default Message button to get the default text
displayed on the field of Administration Message.
Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under
Profile to open the following web page. The items listed in Categories will be changed
according to the different service providers. If you have and activate another web content
filter license, the items will be changed simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web
content filter will be deleted automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you
change the web content filter license.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Black/White List Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile.
URL keywords – Click Edit to choose the group or object
profile as the content of white/black list.
Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web
pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they
will be processed with the categories listed on the box
below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
270
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the
box below.
Action Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the categories listed on the box below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the categories listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
271
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
C
C
r
r
e
e
a
a
t
t
e
e
a
a
n
n
A
A
c
c
c
c
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
f
f
o
o
r
r
M
M
y
y
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several
useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering
the web pages for the sake of protecting your system.
To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.
C
C
r
r
e
e
a
a
t
t
e
e
a
a
n
n
A
A
c
c
c
c
o
o
u
u
n
n
t
t
v
v
i
i
a
a
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.
Or
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
272
2. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.
3. Click the link of Create an account now.
4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over.
If yes, click I am 16 or over.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
273
If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my
legal guardian agree.
5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree.
6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click
Continue.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
274
7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.
8. Now you have created an account successfully.
9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter
from myvigor.draytek.com.
10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following
screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.
11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just
created) in the fields of UserName and Password.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
275
12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to
activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
276
A
A
-
-
2
2
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
B
B
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
F
F
a
a
c
c
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
k
k
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
e
e
d
d
b
b
y
y
t
t
h
h
e
e
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
s
s
v
v
i
i
a
a
W
W
e
e
b
b
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
/
/
U
U
R
R
L
L
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter.
Web Content Filter,
Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block.
Note: License is required.
URL Content Filter,
Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage.
Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.)
I
I
.
.
V
V
i
i
a
a
W
W
e
e
b
b
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
t
t
F
F
i
i
l
l
t
t
e
e
r
r
1. Make sure the Web Content Filter (powered by Commtouch) license is valid.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
27
7
2. Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social
Networking with Action, Block.
3. Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
278
4. Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be
blocked and the following message would be displayed instead.
II. Via URL Content Filter
A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook”
1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2. In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following
figure.
3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4. Configure the settings as the following figure.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
279
5. When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.
6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.
B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook
1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2. In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the
following figure.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
280
3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4. Configure the settings as the following figure.
5. When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup.
6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
281
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
282
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
283
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
V
V
I
I
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
There are several items offered for the Vigor router
system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator
Password, User Password, Configuration Backup,
Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, SNMP, Management,
Panel Control, Self-Signed Certificate, Reboot System,
Firmware Upgrade, and Activation.
It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission
through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth
Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
284
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
S
S
y
y
s
s
t
t
e
e
m
m
M
M
a
a
i
i
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration:
System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Configuration Backup, Syslog
/Mail Alert, Time and Date, SNMP, Management, Panel Control, Self-Signed Certificate,
Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation.
Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
285
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
S
S
y
y
s
s
t
t
e
e
m
m
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN
interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware
related information from this presentation.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Model Name Display the model name of the router.
Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the router.
Build Date/Time Display the date and time of the current firmware build.
LAN MAC Address
- Display the MAC address of the LAN Interface.
IP Address
- Display the IP address of the LAN interface.
Subnet Mask
- Display the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.
DHCP Server
- Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN
interface.
DNS
- Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.
WAN Link Status
- Display current connection status.
MAC Address
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
286
- Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface.
Connection
- Display the connection type.
IP Address
- Display the IP address of the WAN interface.
Default Gateway
- Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway.
IPv6 Address - Display the IPv6 address for LAN.
Scope - Display the scope of IPv6 address. For example, IPv6
Link Local could only be used for direct IPv6 link. It can't be
used for IPv6 internet.
Internet Access Mode – Display the connection mode chosen
for accessing into Internet.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
28
7
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
T
T
R
R
-
-
0
0
6
6
9
9
This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a
TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server
, e.g., VigorACS.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Tr069 Click Enable to activate the settings on this page.
ACS Server On Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.
ACS Server URL/Username/Password – Such data must be typed
according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to
link. Please refer to Auto Configuration Server user’s manual
for detailed information.
Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS server,
port number and the handler.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
288
Test With Inform – Click it to send a message based on the
event code selection to test if such CPE is able to
communicate with VigorACS SI server.
Event Code – Use the drop down menu to specify an event to
perform the test.
Last Inform Response Time – Display the time that VigorACS
server made a response while receiving Inform message from
CPE last time.
CPE Client Such information is useful for Auto Configuration Server.
Enable/Disable – Allow/Deny the CPE Client to connect with
Auto Configuration Server.
Port – Sometimes, port conflict might be occurred. To solve
such problem, you might change port number for CPE.
Username and Password – Enter the username and password
that VigorACS can use to access into such CPE.
Periodic Inform Settings The default setting is Enable. Please set interval time or
schedule time for the router to send notification to CPE. Or
click Disable to close the mechanism of notification.
STUN Settings The default is Disable. If you click Enable, please Enter the
relational settings listed below:
Server Address – Enter the IP address of the STUN server.
Server Port – Enter the port number of the STUN server.
Minimum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE
must send binding request to the server for the purpose of
maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a
number as the minimum period. The default setting is “60
seconds”.
Maximum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE
must send binding request to the server for the purpose of
maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a
number as the maximum period. A value of “-1” indicates
that no maximum period is specified.
Apply Settings to APs This feature is able to apply TR-069 settings (including STUN
and ACS server settings) to all of APs managed by Vigor2620
at the same time.
Disable – Related settings will not be applied to VigorAP.
Enable – Above STUN settings will be applied to VigorAP after
clicking OK. If such feature is enabled, you have to Enter the
password for accessing VigorAP.
AP Password – Enter the password of the VigorAP that you
want to apply Vigor2620’s TR-069 settings.
Apply Specific STUN Settings to APs – After clicking the
Enable radio button for Apply Settings to APs, if you want to
apply specific STUN settings (not the STUN Settings
configured for Vigor2620) to VigorAPs to meet specific
requirements, simply check this box. Then, Enter the server
IP address, server port, minimum keep alive period and
maxmum keep alive period respectively.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
289
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
A
A
d
d
m
m
i
i
n
n
i
i
s
s
t
t
r
r
a
a
t
t
o
o
r
r
P
P
a
a
s
s
s
s
w
w
o
o
r
r
d
d
This page allows you to set new password.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Administrator Password Old Password - Enter the old password. The factory default
setting for password is “admin”.
New Password -Enter new password in this field. The length
of the password is limited to 23 characters.
Confirm Password -Enter the new password again.
When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into
the web user interface again.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
290
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
P
P
a
a
s
s
s
s
w
w
o
o
r
r
d
d
This page allows you to set new password for user operation.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable User Mode for
simple web configuration
After checking this box, you can access into the web user
interface with the password typed here for simple web
configuration.
The settings on simple web user interface will be different
with full web user interface accessed by using the
administrator password.
Password Enter new password in this field. The length of the password
is limited to 31 characters.
Confirm Password Enter the new password again.
Password Strength Display the security strength of the password specified
above.
Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting.
When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into
the web user interface again. Below shows an example for accessing into User Operation with
User Password.
1. Open System Maintenance>>User Password.
2. Check the box of Enable User Mode for simple web configuration to enable user mode
operation. Type a new password in the field of New Password and click OK.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
291
3. The following screen will appear. Simply click OK.
4. Log out Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button.
5. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. Enter the new user
password in the filed of Password and click Login.
6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown on the web page.
Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic
configuration settings will be available in User Mode.
Info
Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
292
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
u
u
p
p
Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by other Vigor router to
Vigor2620.
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
u
u
p
p
t
t
h
h
e
e
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.
1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be
popped-up, as shown below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Restore Choose File – Click it to specify a file to be restored.
Restore - Restore the configuration. If the file is encrypted,
the system will ask you to Enter the password to decrypt the
configuration file.
Backup Click it to perform the configuration backup of this router.
2. Click Backup button to get into the following dialog. Click Save button to open another
dialog for saving configuration as a file.
3. In Save As dialog, the default filename is config.cfg. You could give it another name by
yourself.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
293
4. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a
file named config.cfg.
The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux
platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available.
Info
Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration
Backup does not include information of Certificate.
R
R
e
e
s
s
t
t
o
o
r
r
e
e
C
C
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
u
u
r
r
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be
popped-up, as shown below.
2. Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the
router.
3. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that
the restoration procedure is successful.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
294
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
6
6
S
S
y
y
s
s
l
l
o
o
g
g
/
/
M
M
a
a
i
i
l
l
A
A
l
l
e
e
r
r
t
t
SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog.
Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog
server.
Router Name Display the name for such router configured in System
Maintenance>>Management.
If there is no name here, simply lick the link to access into
System Maintenance>>Management to set the router name.
Server IP /Hostname -The IP address of the Syslog server.
Destination Port - Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.
Enable syslog message - Check the box listed on this web
page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN,
User Access, WAN, Router/DSL information and WLAN to
Syslog.
Mail Alert Setup Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.
Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail
address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address
first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail
address is available or not.
SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the
SMTP server.
Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out.
Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from
outside.
Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
295
some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.
Authentication - Check this box to activate this function
while using e-mail application.
User Name - Enter the user name for authentication.
Password - Enter the password for authentication.
Enable E-mail Alert - Check the box to send alert message to
the e-mail box while the router detecting the item(s) you
specify here.
Click OK to save these settings.
For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:
1. Just set your monitor PC’s IP address in the field of Server IP Address
2. Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the
Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.
3. From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in
Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router.
Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
296
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
7
7
T
T
i
i
m
m
e
e
a
a
n
n
d
d
D
D
a
a
t
t
e
e
It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Current System Time Click Inquire Time to get the current time.
Use Browser Time Select this option to use the browser time from the remote
administrator PC host as router’s system time.
Use Internet Time Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the
Internet using assigned protocol.
Time Server Enter the web site of the time server.
Priority Choose Auto or IPv6 First as the priority.
Time Zone Select the time zone where the router is located.
Enable Daylight Saving Check the box to enable the daylight saving. Such feature is
available for certain area.
Advanced – Click it to open a pop up dialog.
Use the default time setting or set user defined time for your
requirement.
Automatically Update Select a time interval for updating from the NTP server.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
29
7
Interval
Send NTP Request
Through
Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time
synchronization.
Click OK to save these settings.
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
8
8
S
S
N
N
M
M
P
P
This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services.
The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES)
and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable SNMP Agent Check it to enable this function.
Get Community Set the name for getting community by typing a proper
character. The default setting is public.
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Set Community Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting
is private.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
298
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Manager Host IP (IPv4) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please Enter IPv4 address to specify certain host.
Manager Host IP (IPv6) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please Enter IPv6 address to specify certain host.
Trap Community Set trap community by typing a proper name. The default
setting is public.
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Notification Host IP (IPv4)
Set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap
community.
Notification Host IP (IPv6)
Set the IPv6 address of the host that will receive the trap
community.
Trap Timeout The default setting is 10 seconds.
Enable SNMPV3 Agent Check it to enable this function.
USM User USM means user-based security mode.
Type a username which will be used for authentication. The
maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Auth Algorithm Choose one of the encryption methods listed below as the
authentication algorithm.
Auth Password Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of
the text is limited to 23 characters.
Privacy Algorithm Choose one of the methods listed below as the privacy
algorithm.
Privacy Password Type a password for privacy. The maximum length of the
text is limited to 23 characters.
Click OK to save these settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
299
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
9
9
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from
Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device
Management.
The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different.
F
F
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
4
4
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Router Name Enter the router name provided by ISP.
Default: Disable
Auto-Logout
If it is enabled, the function of auto-logout for web user
interface will be disabled.
The web user interface will be open until you click the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
300
Logout icon manually.
Internet Access Control Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox
to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
There are several servers provided by the system to allow
you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to
specify.
Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to
reject all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue,
this function is enabled by default.
LAN Access Control Allow management from LAN - Enable the checkbox to allow
system administrators to login from LAN interface. There are
several servers provided by the system which allow you to
manage the router from LAN interface. Check the box(es) to
specify.
Apply To Subnet - Check the LAN interface for the
administrator to use for accessing into web user interface of
Vigor router.
Access List from the
Internet
You could specify that the system administrator can only
login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A
maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
Management Port Setup User Define Ports - Check to specify user-defined port
numbers for the Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TR-069 and SSH
servers.
Default Ports - Check to use standard port numbers for the
Telnet and HTTP servers.
Brute Force Protection Any client trying to access into Internet via Vigor router will
be asked for passing through user authentication. Such
feature can prevent Vigor router from attacks when a hacker
tries every possible combination of letters, numbers and
symbols until find out the correct combination of password.
Enable brute force login protection – Enable the protection
mechanism.
Maximum login failure – Specify the maximum number of
wrong password that client can try for logging to Vigor
router.
Penalty period – Set a period of time to block the IP address
which is used (by user or hacker) for passing through the user
authentication again and again but failed always. When the
time is up, Vigor system will unblock that IP and allow it to
access into Vigor router again.
Blocked IP List
Open another web page which displays
current blocked IPs.
TLS/SSL Encryption Setup Enable SSL 3.0 and / or TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 – Check the box to
enable the function of SSL 3.0 and/or TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 if
required.
Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL
VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If
you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client,
you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
301
connect, however, it's not recommended.
AP Management Enable AP Management – Check it to enable the function of
Central Management>>AP. If unchecked, menu items
related to Central Management>>AP will be hidden.
Device Management Check the box to enable the device management function for
Vigor2620.
Respond to external device – If it is enabled, Vigor2620 will
be regarded as slave device. When the external device
(master device) sends request packet to Vigor2620,
Vigor2620 would send back information to respond the
request coming from the external device which is able to
manage Vigor2620.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
F
F
o
o
r
r
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Management Access
Control
Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox
to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
There are several servers provided by the system to allow
you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to
specify.
Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to
disable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue,
this function is enabled by default.
Access List You could specify that the system administrator can only
login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A
maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
302
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
0
0
P
P
a
a
n
n
e
e
l
l
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
l
l
The behavior of the buttons on the front panel of the Vigor router can be customized as
desired.
F
F
o
o
r
r
B
B
u
u
t
t
t
t
o
o
n
n
The Factory Reset and Wireless ON/OFF/WPS buttons on the front panel are enabled by
default and can be enabled or disabled if required. Disabling the Factory Reset button will
prevent tampering by unauthorized parties, or to avoid accidental triggering of a router reset
when being used wake up LEDs. Disabling the wireless button will prevent changing the
wireless setting when LED Sleep Mode is enabled, and the buttons are primarily used to turn
the LEDs on and off.
Click the Button tab to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.
Enable Wireless Button The default value is Enabled.
Deselect to disable the ability of the Wireless button to
control WLAN and WPS functions.
Disabling the wireless button only prevents it from being
used to control WLAN functions. It can still be used to wake
up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.
Enable Factory Reset
Button
The default value is Enabled.
Deselect to disable the reset function of the factory reset
button.
Disabling the Factory Reset button only prevents it from
being used to reboot Vigor router with default settings. It
can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is
enabled.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
303
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
S
S
e
e
l
l
f
f
-
-
S
S
i
i
g
g
n
n
e
e
d
d
C
C
e
e
r
r
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
e
e
A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which
generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is
signed with its own private key.
The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be
created for free by using a wide variety of tools.
Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window. Enter all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
304
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
305
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
2
2
R
R
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
t
t
S
S
y
y
s
s
t
t
e
e
m
m
The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System
Maintenance to open the following page.
Schedule Profile - You can Enter four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All
the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use
the number that you have set in that web page.
If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current
configuration and click Reboot Now. To reset the router settings to default values, check
Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. The router will take 5 seconds to
reboot the system.
Info
When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web
settings, please click Reboot Now to reboot your router for ensuring normal
operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
306
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
3
3
F
F
i
i
r
r
m
m
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
U
U
p
p
g
g
r
r
a
a
d
d
e
e
Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to proceed to firmware upgrade.
Click Select to specify the one you just download. After choosing the file you want, click
Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router automatically.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
30
7
V
V
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
4
4
A
A
c
c
t
t
i
i
v
v
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is
the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing
http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Activate via Interface Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating
Web Content Filter.
Activate The Activate link brings you accessing into
www.vigorpro.com to finish the activation of the account
and the router.
Authentication Message As for authentication information of web filter, the process
of authenticating will be displayed on this field for your
reference.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
308
Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
309
V
V
I
I
-
-
2
2
B
B
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
S
S
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
L
L
i
i
m
m
i
i
t
t
A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will
generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications
(e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over
resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can
use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.
B
B
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
L
L
i
i
m
m
i
i
t
t
The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of
bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to
make the bandwidth usage more efficient.
Q
Q
u
u
a
a
l
l
i
i
t
t
y
y
o
o
f
f
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
(
(
Q
Q
o
o
S
S
)
)
Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the
service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed
one important aspect of modern enterprise network.
One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their
transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If
other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in
the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay
or jitter (delay variation).
Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of
interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can
be throttled back to a lower speed. If there’s no defined priority to specify which packets
should be discarded (or in another term “dropped”) from an overflowing queue, packets of
sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect
application performance?
There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:
Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for
high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.
Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and
associated service types
The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on
the service Enterformation in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the
headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for
HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.
One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated
Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP
Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes,
DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In
a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain
owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define
the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these
domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The
definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best
Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of
drop precedence in each class.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
310
Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header
of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing,
classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking
before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the
whole QoS-enabled network.
However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking
since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It’s not
easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole
network with merely Vigor router’s effort.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
311
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.
V
V
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
1
1
S
S
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
L
L
i
i
m
m
i
i
t
t
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit session for IPv4 and/or IPv6, simply click Enable and set the
default session limit.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Session Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit
session.
Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit
session.
Default Max Sessions - Defines the default session number
used for each computer in LAN.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
312
Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Specific Limitation Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session.
End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session.
Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number
for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do
not set the session number in this field, the system will use
the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for
each index.
Add - Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allows you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.
Administration Message Enter the words which will be displayed when reaches the
maximum number of Internet sessions permitted.
Default Message - Click this button to apply the default
message offered by the router.
Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can Enter four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
313
V
V
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
2
2
B
B
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
L
L
i
i
m
m
i
i
t
t
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit bandwidth for IPv4 and /or IPv6, simply click Enable and set
the default upstream and downstream limit.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Bandwidth Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit
bandwidth.
IP Routed Subnet Check this box to apply the bandwidth
limit to the second subnet specified in LAN>>General Setup.
It is available for IPv4 settings only.
Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit
bandwidth.
Default TX limit Per User- Define the default speed of the
upstream for each computer in LAN.
Default RX limit Per User- Define the default speed of the
downstream for each computer in LAN.
Limitation List Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
314
Specific Limitation Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit bandwidth.
End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.
Each /Shared - Select Each to make each IP within the range
of Start IP and End IP having the same speed defined in TX
limit and RX limit fields; select Shared to make all the IPs
within the range of Start IP and End IP share the speed
defined in TX limit and RX limit fields.
TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system
will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set
for each index.
RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific limitation
you set for each index.
Add - Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allow you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.
Allow auto adjustment
Check this box to make the best utilization of available
bandwidth.
Smart Bandwidth Limit Check this box to have the bandwidth limit determined by
the system automatically.
TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system
will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set
for each index.
RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific limitation
you set for each index.
Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can Enter four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
315
V
V
I
I
-
-
2
2
-
-
3
3
Q
Q
u
u
a
a
l
l
i
i
t
t
y
y
o
o
f
f
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
General Setup
Index Display the WAN interface number link that you can
edit.
Enable Check the box to enable the QoS function for WAN
interface. If it is enabled, you can configure general QoS
setting for each WAN interface.
Direction Define which traffic the QoS Control settings
will apply to.
IN- apply to incoming traffic only.
OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.
BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Inbound/Outbound Bandwidth Set the connecting
rate of data input/output for other WAN. For example, if
your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K
upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default
value is 10000kbps.
Class 1 ~ 3 / Others Define the ratio of bandwidth to
upstream speed and bandwidth to downstream speed.
There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first
three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for
your necessity. In which, the “Others” field is used for
the packets which are not suitable for the three class
rules.
Status Display the online statistics of WAN interface.
Class Rule
Index Display the class number that you can edit.
Name Display the name of the class.
Rule Allow to configure detailed settings for the selected
Class.
Service Type Allow to configure detailed settings for the
service type.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
316
Click the WAN1/WAN2/LTE link to access into next page for the general setup of WAN
interface. As to class rule, simply click the Edit link to access into next for configuration.
You can configure general setup for the WAN interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the
Service Type for the Class Rule for your request.
O
O
n
n
l
l
i
i
n
n
e
e
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
s
s
t
t
i
i
c
c
s
s
Click the Status link to display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference.
This feature is available only when the Quality of Service for WAN interface is enabled.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
31
7
G
G
e
e
n
n
e
e
r
r
a
a
l
l
S
S
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
f
f
o
o
r
r
W
W
A
A
N
N
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
Click WAN interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN
interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable UDP Bandwidth
Control
Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP
application traffic since UDP application traffic such as
streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.
Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved
for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
Outbound TCP ACK
Prioritize
The difference in bandwidth between download and upload
are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed
might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check
this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network
traffic.
Info
The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to
ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value
for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by
ISP to maximize the QoS performance.
E
E
d
d
i
i
t
t
t
t
h
h
e
e
C
C
l
l
a
a
s
s
s
s
R
R
u
u
l
l
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
Q
Q
o
o
S
S
1. The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. To add,
edit or delete the class rule, please click the Edit link of that one.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
318
2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. Now you can define the
name for that Class. In this case, “Test” is used as the name of Class Index #1.
3. For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Check this box to invoke these settings.
Ethernet Type Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for
this rule.
Local Address Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for
the rule.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
319
Remote Address Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on
LAN/WAN) for the rule.
Address Type – Determine the address type for the source
address.
For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.
For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
End IP address.
For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
Subnet Mask.
DiffServ CodePoint All the packets of data will be divided with different levels
and will be processed according to the level type by the
system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for
processing with QoS control.
Service Type It determines the service type of the data for processing with
QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the
predefined service type from the Service Type drop down
list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the
one that you want for using by current QoS.
4. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
By the way, you can set up to 20 rules for one Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please
select the radio button of that one and click Edit to open the rule edit page for modification.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
320
E
E
d
d
i
i
t
t
t
t
h
h
e
e
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
C
C
l
l
a
a
s
s
s
s
R
R
u
u
l
l
e
e
1. To add a new service type, edit or delete an existed service type, please click the Edit
link under Service Type field.
2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page.
3. For adding a new service type, click Add to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Service Name Enter a new service for your request. The maximum length of
the name you can set is 11 characters.
Service Type Choose the type (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP or other) for the new
service.
Port Configuration Type - Click Single or Range as the Type. If you select
Range, you have to Enter the starting port number and the
end porting number on the boxes below.
Port Number – Enter the starting port number and the end
porting number here if you choose Range as the type.
5. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
321
By the way, you can set up to 10 service types. If you want to edit/delete an existed service
type, please select the radio button of that one and click Edit/Edit for modification.
R
R
e
e
t
t
a
a
g
g
t
t
h
h
e
e
P
P
a
a
c
c
k
k
e
e
t
t
s
s
f
f
o
o
r
r
I
I
d
d
e
e
n
n
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Packets coming from LAN IP can be retagged through QoS setting. When the packets sent out
through WAN interface, all of them will be tagged with certain header and that will be easily
to be identified by server on ISP.
For example, in the following illustration, the VoIP packets in LAN go into Vigor router
without any header. However, when they go forward to the Server on ISP through Vigor router,
all of the packets are tagged with AF (configured in Bandwidth >>QoS>>Class) automatically.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
322
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
O
O
p
p
t
t
i
i
m
m
i
i
z
z
e
e
t
t
h
h
e
e
B
B
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
t
t
h
h
r
r
o
o
u
u
g
g
h
h
Q
Q
o
o
S
S
T
T
e
e
c
c
h
h
n
n
o
o
l
l
o
o
g
g
y
y
Have you ever gotten any problems in uploading/downloading files (Voice, video or
email/data only) with the narrow/districted bandwidth you may share from the common
Internet connection line? The advanced bandwidth management technology-QoS (Quality of
Service) helps you to well allocate the bandwidth upon your demand of Voice, Video, or Data
transferring. Let's see how to get the optimum bandwidth per your request by using DrayTek
Vigor router as below.
Scenario: The Internet connection you got from ISP line is 2MB/512Kb. There are VoIP
telephony network, IPTV set top box and data server at your home. Assume you want to
allocate 30% of the bandwidth you got to VoIP demand, 50% for IPTV, 15% for mail/data, 5%
for others. Let's see how easily it is to do the setting as below:
1. Open Bandwidth Management>> Quality of Service.
2. You will get the following page. Click the Edit link for Class 1.
3. In the following page, type a name (e.g., VoIP) for such class and click Add.
4. Check the box of ACT. Click Edit to specify the local address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
323
5. In the pop-up window, choose Range Address as the Address Type and Enter the start IP
address and end IP address in relational fields. Click OK to save the settings and exit the
window.
6. Click OK again to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
324
7. The class rule for VoIP has been set. Click OK to return to previous page.
8. Do the same steps to add class rules for IPTV and Data/Email with IP addresses as shown
below.
and
9. Assuming you get 2MB/512Kb Internet line. You can check Enable of WAN1 to set up the
bandwidth for different groups among VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
325
10. Enter 30, 50 and 15 in the boxes for VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email respectively.
11. Click the WAN1 link and check the box of Enable UDP Bandwidth Control.
12. Click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
326
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
C
C
e
e
n
n
t
t
r
r
a
a
l
l
M
M
a
a
n
n
a
a
g
g
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
(
(
A
A
P
P
)
)
Vigor2620L can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP
Management.
A
A
P
P
M
M
a
a
p
p
AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room
is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from the list
to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly indicated
through simulated signal strength
A
A
P
P
M
M
a
a
i
i
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade
and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the
administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the
access point.
L
L
o
o
a
a
d
d
B
B
a
a
l
l
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
f
f
o
o
r
r
A
A
P
P
The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the
access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain
access points.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
32
7
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
D
D
a
a
s
s
h
h
b
b
o
o
a
a
r
r
d
d
This page shows VigorAP’s information about Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station
Number by displaying VigorAP icon, text and histogram. Just move and click your mouse
cursor on Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number. Corresponding web pages will
be open immediately.
To access into the web user interface of VigorAP, simply move your mouse cursor on the
VigorAP icon and click it. The system will guide you to access into the web user interface of
VigorAP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
328
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
2
2
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption,
channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router. Please
open Central AP Management>>Function Support List to check what AP Models are
supported.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Click the index number link for viewing the settings summary
of the access point.
Device Name The name of the AP managed by Vigor router will be displayed
here.
IP Address Display the true IP address of the access point.
SSID Display the SSID configured for the access point(s) connected
to Vigor2620.
Ch. Display the channel used by the access point.
STA List Display the number of wireless clients (stations) connecting to
the access point.
In which, 0/64 means that up to 64 clients are allowed to
connect to the access point. But, now no one connects to the
access point.
The number displayed on the left side means 2.4GHz; and the
number displayed on the right side means 5GHz.
AP List Display the number of the AP around the device.
Uptime Display the duration of the AP powered up.
Version Display the firmware version used by the access point.
Password Vigor2620 can get related information of the access point by
accessing into the web user interface of the access point.
This button is used to modify the logging password of the
connected access point.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
329
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
3
3
W
W
L
L
A
A
N
N
P
P
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the
administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface
of the access point.
Click the number link of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. Available
settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile There are five WLAN profiles offered to be configured. Simply
click the index number link to open the modification page.
Name Display the name of the profile.
The default profile cannot be renamed.
Main SSID Display the SSID configured by such wireless profile.
Security Display the security mode selected by such wireless profile.
Multi-SSID Enable means multiple SSIDs (more than one) are active.
Disable means only SSID1 is active.
WLAN ACL Display the name of the access control list.
Rate Ctrl Display the upload and/or download transmission rate.
Clone It can copy settings from an existing WLAN profile to another
WLAN profile.
First, you have to check the box of the existing profile as the
original profile. Second, click Clone. The following dialog will
appear.
Third, choose the profile index to accept the settings from the
original profile. Forth, type a new name in the field of
Renamed as. Last, click Apply to save the settings on this
dialog.
The new profile has been created with the settings coming
from the original profile.
To AP Click it to apply the selected wireless profile to the specified
Access Point.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
330
Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field.
Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then,
click OK.
The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected
access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot.
To Local WLAN Profile configured in this page is specified for VigorAP
connected to Vigor router.
If required, these settings also can be applied to Vigor router.
Select and check one of wireless profiles and click this button
to apply the settings onto the WI-Fi wireless settings
configured for such Vigor router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
331
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
e
e
d
d
i
i
t
t
t
t
h
h
e
e
w
w
i
i
r
r
e
e
l
l
e
e
s
s
s
s
L
L
A
A
N
N
p
p
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
?
?
1. Select the WLAN profile (index number 1 to 5) you want to edit.
2. Click the index number link to display the following page.
Info
The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
332
3. After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page
for 2.4G wireless security settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
333
4. After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page
for 5G wireless security settings.
5. When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to
the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
334
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
4
4
A
A
P
P
M
M
a
a
i
i
n
n
t
t
e
e
n
n
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade
and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the
administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the
access point.
Info
Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions
(e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed
to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor2620.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Action There are four actions provided by Vigor router to manage the
access points.
Vigor router can backup the configuration of the selected AP,
restore the configuration for the selected AP, perform the
firmware upgrade of the selected AP, reboot the selected AP
remotely and perform the factory reset for the selected AP.
File/Path Specify the file and the path which will be used to perform
Config Restore or Firmware Upgrade.
Select Device Display all the available access points managed by Vigor
router. Simply click << or >> to move the device(s) between
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
335
Select Device and Selected Device areas.
Selected Device Display the access points that will be applied by such function
after clicking OK.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action.
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
5
5
T
T
r
r
a
a
f
f
f
f
i
i
c
c
G
G
r
r
a
a
p
p
h
h
Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A
or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the
graph at any time.
The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in
kbps).
Info
Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External
Devices function.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
336
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
6
6
T
T
e
e
m
m
p
p
e
e
r
r
a
a
t
t
u
u
r
r
e
e
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
Many VigorAPs and Vigor routers can be installed with temperature sensor. If VigorAP (e.g.,
VigorAP 910C) is managed under Vigor router, then Vigor router can obtain the temperature
change graph of the USB temperature sensor installed onto VigorAP.
This page displays data including current temperature, maximum temperature, minimum
temperature and average temperature.
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
7
7
E
E
v
v
e
e
n
n
t
t
L
L
o
o
g
g
Time and event log for all of the APs managed by Vigor router will be shown on this page. It is
useful for troubleshooting if required.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
33
7
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
8
8
T
T
o
o
t
t
a
a
l
l
T
T
r
r
a
a
f
f
f
f
i
i
c
c
Such page will display the total traffic of data receiving and data transmitting for VigorAPs
managed by Vigor router.
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
9
9
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
u
u
m
m
b
b
e
e
r
r
The total number of the wireless clients will be shown on this page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
338
V
V
I
I
-
-
3
3
-
-
1
1
0
0
L
L
o
o
a
a
d
d
B
B
a
a
l
l
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e
The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the
access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain
access points.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
AP Load Balance It is used to determine the operation mode when the system
detects overload between access points.
Disable – Disable the function of AP load balance.
By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be
executed based on the station number configured in this page.
It is used to limit the allowed number for the station
connecting to the access point. The purpose is to prevent lots
of stations connecting to access point at the same time and
causing traffic unbalanced. Please define the required station
number for WLAN (2.4GHz) and WLAN (5GHz) separately.
By Traffic – The operation of load balance will executed
according to the traffic configuration in this page.
By Station Number or Traffic - The operation of load balance
will be executed based on the station number or the traffic
configuration.
Station Number
Threshold
Set the number of stations as a threshold to activate AP load
balance.
Traffic Threshold Upload Limit –Use the drop down list to specify the traffic
limit for uploading.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
339
Download Limit – Use the drop down list to specify the traffic
limit for downloading.
Action When Threshold
Exceeded
Stop accepting new connections – When the number of
stations or the traffic reaches the threshold defined in this
web page, Vigor router will stop any new connection asked by
other access point.
Dissociate existing station by longest idel time - When the
access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station
number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the
network connection of the client’s station which is idle for a
longest time.
Dissociate existing station by worst signal strength if it is
less than - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching
the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will
terminate the network connection of the client’s station with
the weakest signal.
Choose to Apply The settings configured for Load Balance can be applied to all
of AP devices or selected AP devices.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
340
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
341
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
V
V
I
I
I
I
O
O
t
t
h
h
e
e
r
r
s
s
Define objects such as IP address, service type,
keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
342
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
s
s
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
s
s
Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
343
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
I
I
P
P
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring
router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for
using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all
the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address).
You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
344
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
View Use the drop down list to choose a type (Single Address,
Range Address, Subnet Address, Mac Address or all) that IP
object with the selected type will be shown on this page.
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Search Type a string of the IP object that you want to search.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Address Display the IP address configured for the object profile.
Export IP Object Usually, the IP objects can be created one by one through
the web page of Objects>>IP Object. However, to a user
who wants to save more time in bulk creating IP objects, a
quick method is offered by Vigor router to modify the IP
objects with a single file, a CSV file.
All of the IP objects (or the template) can be exported as a
file by clicking Download. Then the user can open the CSV
file through Microsoft Excel and modify all the IP objects at
the same time.
Backup the current IP Objects with a CSV file – Click it to
backup current IP objecsts as a CSV file. Such file can be
restored for future use.
Download the default CSV template to edit – After clicking
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
345
it, press Download to store the default CSM template (a table
without any input data) to your hard disk.
Download – Download the CSV file from Vigor router and
store in your hard disk.
Restore IP Object Select – Click it to specify a predefined CSV file.
Restore – Import the selected CSV file onto Vigor router.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface Choose a proper interface.
For example, the Direction setting in Edit Filter Rule will
ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN/RT/VPN or any
IP address. If you choose LAN/ RT/VPN as the Interface here,
and choose LAN/RT/VPN as the direction setting in Edit
Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses specified with LAN/
RT/VPN interface will be opened for you to choose in Edit
Filter Rule page.
Address Type Determine the address type for the IP address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
IP address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address Enter the start IP address for Single Address type.
End IP Address Enter the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
346
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.
Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. Below is
an example of IP objects settings.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
34
7
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
I
I
P
P
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
348
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP
objects with the specified interface.
Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface
chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
You can set up to 64 sets of IPv6 Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
349
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPv6s
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
IPv6 address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IPv6 address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
Mac Address Enter the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address Enter the start IP address for Single Address type.
End IP Address Enter the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected.
Prefix Length Enter the number (e.g., 64) for the prefix length of IPv6
address.
Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
350
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
351
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available IPv6
Objects
All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface
chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IPv6 Objects
Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
352
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.
Source/Destination
Port
Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available
for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols.
The filter rule will filter out any port number.
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and
last values are different, it indicates that all the ports
except the range defined here are available for this service
type.
(>) the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) the port number less than this value is available for this
profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
353
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
6
6
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the group profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
354
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available Service
Type Objects
All the available service objects that you have added on
Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this
box.
Selected Service Type
Objects
Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
355
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
7
7
K
K
e
e
y
y
w
w
o
o
r
r
d
d
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web
Content Filter Profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
356
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15
characters are allowed.
Contents Enter the content for such profile. For example, type
gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the
page with gambling information will be watched out and be
passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall
settings.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
35
7
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
8
8
K
K
e
e
y
y
w
w
o
o
r
r
d
d
G
G
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set
here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
358
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available Keyword
Objects
You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page
within one keyword group. All the available Keyword
objects that you have created will be shown in this box.
Selected Keyword
Objects
Click
button to add the selected Keyword objects in
this box.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
9
9
F
F
i
i
l
l
e
e
E
E
x
x
t
t
e
e
n
n
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter.
All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to
the chosen action.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Profile Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
359
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 7 characters.
3. Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be
processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
360
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
0
0
S
S
M
M
S
S
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS Service
Object.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Profile Name Display the name for such SMS profile.
SMS Provider Display the service provider which offers SMS service.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of
the name you can set is 31 characters.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
361
Service Provider Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which
offers SMS service.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 31
characters.
Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Quota Enter the number of the credit that you purchase from the
service provider chosen above.
Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the
standard route.
Sending Interval To avoid quota being exhausted soon, type time interval for
sending the SMS.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
362
C
C
u
u
s
s
t
t
o
o
m
m
i
i
z
z
e
e
d
d
S
S
M
M
S
S
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your
service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index
10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed.
You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Display the name of this profile. It cannot be modified.
Service Provider Enter the website of the service provider.
Enter the URL string in the box under the filed of Service
Provider. You have to contact your SMS provider to obtain
the exact URL string.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 31
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
363
characters.
Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Quota Enter the total number of the messages that the router will
send out.
Sending Interval Enter the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
N
N
o
o
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS Alert
Service.
You can set an object with different monitoring situation.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index
column for configuration in details.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
364
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum
length of the name you can set is 15 characters.
Category Display the types that will be monitored.
Status Display the status for the category. You can check the box to
be monitored.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
365
V
V
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
2
2
S
S
t
t
r
r
i
i
n
n
g
g
O
O
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
This page allows you to set string profiles which will be applied in route policy (domain name
selection for destination) and etc.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Add Click it to open the following page for adding a new string
object.
Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all of the settings in this page.
Index Display the number link of the string profile.
String Display the string defined.
Clear Choose the string that you want to remove. Then click this
check box to delete the selected string.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
366
A
A
p
p
p
p
l
l
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
N
N
o
o
t
t
e
e
s
s
A
A
-
-
1
1
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
S
S
e
e
n
n
d
d
a
a
N
N
o
o
t
t
i
i
f
f
i
i
c
c
a
a
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
t
t
o
o
S
S
p
p
e
e
c
c
i
i
f
f
i
i
e
e
d
d
P
P
h
h
o
o
n
n
e
e
N
N
u
u
m
m
b
b
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
a
a
S
S
M
M
S
S
S
S
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
i
i
n
n
W
W
A
A
N
N
D
D
i
i
s
s
c
c
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Follow the steps listed below:
1. Log into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2. Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS Server Object to get the
following page.
Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider. If the SMS
service provider is not on the list, you can configure Index 9 and Index 10 to add the new
service provider to Vigor router.
3. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure the SMS Provider
setting. In the following page, Enter the username and password and set the quota that
the router can send the message out.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
36
7
4. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished
the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting.
5. Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the
notification.
6. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending
the SMS. In the following page, Enter the name of the profile and check the
Disconnected and Reconnected boxes for WAN to work in concert with the topic of this
paper.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
368
7. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the
configuration of the notification object profile setting.
8. Now, open Applications >> SMS Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose SMS
Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, Enter the phone
number in the field of Recipient Number (the one who will receive the SMS).
9. Click OK to save the settings. Later, if one of the WAN connections fails in your router,
the system will send out SMS to the phone number specified. If the router has only one
WAN interface, the system will send out SMS to the phone number while reconnecting
the WAN interface successfully.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
369
R
R
e
e
m
m
a
a
r
r
k
k
:
:
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
h
h
e
e
c
c
u
u
s
s
t
t
o
o
m
m
i
i
z
z
e
e
t
t
h
h
e
e
S
S
M
M
S
S
P
P
r
r
o
o
v
v
i
i
d
d
e
e
r
r
Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the
web page, Enter the URL string of the SMS provider and Enter the username and password.
After clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to
specify for sending SMS out.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
370
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
371
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
r
r
o
o
u
u
b
b
l
l
e
e
s
s
h
h
o
o
o
o
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if
you cannot access into the Internet after installing the
router and finishing the web configuration.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
372
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
D
D
i
i
a
a
g
g
n
n
o
o
s
s
t
t
i
i
c
c
s
s
This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet
after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to
check your basic installation status stage by stage.
Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.
Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.
Pinging the router from your computer.
Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.
Backing to factory default setting if necessary.
If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to
contact your dealer or DrayTek technical support for advanced help.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
373
W
W
e
e
b
b
U
U
s
s
e
e
r
r
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way
to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router.
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
D
D
i
i
a
a
l
l
-
-
o
o
u
u
t
t
T
T
r
r
i
i
g
g
g
g
e
e
r
r
i
i
n
n
g
g
Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet
connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Decoded Format It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP
(remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
374
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
2
2
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
375
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
3
3
A
A
R
R
P
P
C
C
a
a
c
c
h
h
e
e
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an
Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Show Specify LAN and VLAN to display related information.
In default, this page will display all of the information
about LAN and VLAN.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
376
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
4
4
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
N
N
e
e
i
i
g
g
h
h
b
b
o
o
u
u
r
r
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6
address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address
conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
37
7
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
5
5
D
D
H
H
C
C
P
P
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in
diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Index It displays the connection item number.
IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified
PC.
MAC Address It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP
assigned IP address for it.
Leased Time It displays the leased time of the specified PC.
HOST ID It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
378
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
6
6
N
N
A
A
T
T
S
S
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
s
s
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.
#Pseudo Port It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.
Peer IP:Port It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote
host.
Interface It displays the representing number for different interface.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
379
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
7
7
D
D
N
N
S
S
C
C
a
a
c
c
h
h
e
e
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page.
The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from
LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS
Cache Table.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.
When an entry’s TTL is
larger than….
Check the box the Enter the value of TTL (time to live) for
each entry. Click OK to enable such function.
It means when the TTL value of each DNS query reaches the
threshold of the value specified here, the corresponding
record will be deleted from router’s Cache automatically.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
380
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
8
8
P
P
i
i
n
n
g
g
D
D
i
i
a
a
g
g
n
n
o
o
s
s
i
i
s
s
Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page.
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
IPV4 /IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.
Ping through Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you
want to ping through or choose Auto to be determined by the
router automatically.
Ping to Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
381
want to ping.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.
Ping IPv6 Address Enter the IPv6 address that you want to ping.
Run Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be
displayed on the screen.
Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
9
9
D
D
a
a
t
t
a
a
F
F
l
l
o
o
w
w
M
M
o
o
n
n
i
i
t
t
o
o
r
r
This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data
in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth
Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoking Data
Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.
Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address,
TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
382
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function.
Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of
refreshing data flow that will be done by the system
automatically.
Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually.
Index Display the number of the data flow.
IP Address Display the IP address of the monitored device.
TX rate (kbps) Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.
RX rate (kbps) Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.
Sessions Display the session number that you specified in Limit
Session web page.
Action Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet
within 5 minutes.
Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for
five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the
session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
383
Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate
for WAN interface.
Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in
data transmission.
Speed means line speed specified in WAN>>General Setup.
If you do not specify any rate at that page, here will display
Auto for instead.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
384
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
0
0
T
T
r
r
a
a
f
f
f
f
i
i
c
c
G
G
r
r
a
a
p
p
h
h
Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose WAN1 Bandwidth,
Sessions, Ping Detect, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero
the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted) data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the
graph at any time.
The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings. For
WAN1/WAN2/LTE Bandwidth chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the
numbers of the transmitted and received packets in the past.
For Sessions chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the NAT
sessions during the past.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
385
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
T
T
r
r
a
a
c
c
e
e
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace
the routes from router to the host. Simply Enter the IP address of the host in the box and click
Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen.
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it.
Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want
to ping through.
Protocol Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
386
to ping through.
Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host.
Trace Host/IP Address It indicates the IPv6 address of the host.
Run Click this button to start route tracing work.
Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
2
2
I
I
P
P
v
v
6
6
T
T
S
S
P
P
C
C
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
IPv6 TSPC status web page could help you to diagnose the connection status of TSPC.
If TSPC has configured properly, the router will display the following page when the user
connects to tunnel broker successfully.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually.
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
3
3
D
D
S
S
L
L
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
Such page is useful for RD debug or web technician.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
38
7
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
4
4
D
D
o
o
S
S
F
F
l
l
o
o
o
o
d
d
T
T
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism.
It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network
environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection.
Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood
attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.
Moreover, IP address detected and suspected to attack the network system can be blocked
shortly by clicking the Block button shown on pages of SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood.
Info
The icon -
- means there is something wrong (e.g., attacking the
system) with that IP address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
388
However, if an IP address is comfirmed to be blocked due to its abnormal behavior, click the
Blocking IP List tab to block it forever. For example, IP address “192.168.1.123” (displayed
on the following web page) will be blocked forever.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
White Passing IP List /
Black Blocking IP List
Enter the IP address in this field and click Add. It will be added
to the IP List and appear in the right frame.
IP list in the right frame will be blocked by Vigor system
permanatly.
Remove – It is used to remove selected IP address from the
Blocking IP List.
Refresh Click this link to refresh current page.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
389
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
2
2
C
C
h
h
e
e
c
c
k
k
i
i
n
n
g
g
I
I
f
f
t
t
h
h
e
e
H
H
a
a
r
r
d
d
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
S
S
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
I
I
s
s
O
O
K
K
o
o
r
r
N
N
o
o
t
t
Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.
1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections.
Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details.
2. Turn on the router. Make sure the Activity LED blink once per second and the
correspondent LAN LED is bright.
3. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to
“I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try
again.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
390
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
3
3
C
C
h
h
e
e
c
c
k
k
i
i
n
n
g
g
I
I
f
f
t
t
h
h
e
e
N
N
e
e
t
t
w
w
o
o
r
r
k
k
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
s
s
o
o
n
n
Y
Y
o
o
u
u
r
r
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
I
I
s
s
O
O
K
K
o
o
r
r
N
N
o
o
t
t
Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying
the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure
the network connection settings is OK.
F
F
o
o
r
r
W
W
i
i
n
n
d
d
o
o
w
w
s
s
Info
The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation
systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in
www.DrayTek.com.
1. Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Control Panel. Click Network and Sharing
Center.
2. In the following window, click Change adapter settings.
3. Icons of network connection will be shown on the window. Right-click on Local Area
Connection and click on Properties.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
391
4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.
5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address
automatically. Finally, click OK.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
392
F
F
o
o
r
r
M
M
a
a
c
c
O
O
S
S
1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.
2. Open the Application folder and get into Network.
3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
393
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
4
4
P
P
i
i
n
n
g
g
i
i
n
n
g
g
t
t
h
h
e
e
R
R
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
f
f
r
r
o
o
m
m
Y
Y
o
o
u
u
r
r
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need
to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is
that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP
address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP
automatically. (Please refer to the previous section IX-3)
Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.
F
F
o
o
r
r
W
W
i
i
n
n
d
d
o
o
w
w
s
s
1. Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).
2. Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/7).
The DOS command dialog will appear.
3. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “Reply from
192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255 will appear.
4. If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.
F
F
o
o
r
r
M
M
a
a
c
c
O
O
S
S
(
(
T
T
e
e
r
r
m
m
i
i
n
n
a
a
l
l
)
)
1. Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.
2. Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.
3. Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.
4. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “64 bytes from
192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms” will appear.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
394
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
395
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
5
5
C
C
h
h
e
e
c
c
k
k
i
i
n
n
g
g
I
I
f
f
t
t
h
h
e
e
I
I
S
S
P
P
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
s
s
a
a
r
r
e
e
O
O
K
K
o
o
r
r
N
N
o
o
t
t
If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed
on section 1.2) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please:
Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex).
Next, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.
If not, please install an additional switch for connecting both Vigor router and the modem
offered by ISP. Then, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.
If the problem of LEDs cannot be solved by the above measures, please contact with the
nearest reseller, or send an e-mail to DrayTek FAE for technical support.
Check if the settings offered by ISP are configured well or not.
When the LEDs are on and correct, yet the WAN connection still cannot be up, please:
Open WAN >> Internet Access page and then check whether the ISP settings are set
correctly. Click Details Page of WAN1 to review the settings that you configured
previously.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
396
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
6
6
B
B
a
a
c
c
k
k
i
i
n
n
g
g
t
t
o
o
F
F
a
a
c
c
t
t
o
o
r
r
y
y
D
D
e
e
f
f
a
a
u
u
l
l
t
t
S
S
e
e
t
t
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
I
I
f
f
N
N
e
e
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
a
a
r
r
y
y
Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to
reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.
Info
After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did
before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing.
The password of factory default is null.
S
S
o
o
f
f
t
t
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
R
R
e
e
s
s
e
e
t
t
You can reset the router to factory default via Web page. Such function is available in Admin
Mode only.
Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen
will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. After few
seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.
H
H
a
a
r
r
d
d
w
w
a
a
r
r
e
e
R
R
e
e
s
s
e
e
t
t
While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for
more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button.
Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.
After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again
to fit your personal request.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
39
7
V
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
7
7
C
C
o
o
n
n
t
t
a
a
c
c
t
t
i
i
n
n
g
g
D
D
r
r
a
a
y
y
T
T
e
e
k
k
If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer
for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to
support@DrayTek.com.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
398
This page is left blank.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
399
P
P
a
a
r
r
t
t
I
I
X
X
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
s
s
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
400
A
A
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
n
n
g
g
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
o
o
f
f
V
V
i
i
g
g
o
o
r
r
2
2
6
6
2
2
0
0
This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the
firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.
Info
For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet
Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.
Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.
In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP
address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default,
enter the current IP address of the router.
Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. Then, type ?. You will see a list of
valid/common commands depending on the router that your use.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
401
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
402
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
t
t
x
x
p
p
c
c
t
t
/
/
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
r
r
x
x
p
p
c
c
t
t
This command allows the user to adjust the percentage of data transmission
(receiving/transmitting) for QoS application.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl txpct <auto/percent>
adsl rxpct <auto/percent>
Parameter Description
<auto> It means auto detection of ADSL transmission packet.
<percent> Specify the percentage of ADSL transmission packet.
Available range is 10-100.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl txpct auto
% tx percentage : 80
> adsl txpct 75
% tx percentage : 75
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command is used to display current status of ADSL setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl status <more / counts/hlog / qln / snr/ bandinfo/ olr>
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl status
---------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A/B/C) -----------
Running Mode : State : TRAINING
DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps
DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps
DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast
DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0
NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB
DS actual PSD : 0.0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB
NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0
NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0
Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0
ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000
VDSL Firmware Version : 05-04-08-00-00-06
Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA
Test Mode : DISABLE
------------------------- ATU-C Info ---------------------------------
Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB
CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000
DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < ----- >
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
p
p
p
p
p
p
This command can set the Internet Access mode for the router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
403
adsl ppp <?><pvc_no> <vci> <vpi> <Encap> <Proto> <modu> <acqIP> <idle> <Username>
<Password>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<?> Display the command syntax of “adsl ppp”.
<pvc_no> It means the PVC number and the adjustable range is from
0 (Channel-1) to 7(Channel-8).
<Encap> Different numbers represent different modes.
0 : VC_MUX,
1: LLC/SNAP,
2: LLC_Bridge,
3: LLC_Route,
4: VCMUX_Bridge
5: VCMUX_Route,
6: IPoE.
<Proto> It means the protocol used to connect Internet. Different
numbers represent different protocols.
0: PPPoA,
1: PPPoE,
2: MPoA.
<modu> 0: T1.413,
2: G.dmt,
4: Multi,
5: ADSL2,
7: ADSL2_AnnexM
8: ADSL2+
14: ADSL2+_AnnexM.
<acqIP> It means the way to acquire IP address. Type the number to
determine the IP address by specifying or assigned
dynamically by DHCP server.
0: fix_ip,
1: dhcp_client/PPPoE/PPPoA.(acquire IP method)
<idle> Type number to determine the network connection will be
kept for always or idle after a certain time.
-1: always on, else idle timeout secs. Only for
PPPoE/PPPoA.
<Username> This parameter is used only for PPPoE/PPPoA
<Password> This parameter is used only for PPPoE/PPPoA
You have to reboot the system when you set it on Route mode.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl ppp o 35 8 1 1 4 1 -1 draytek draytek
pvc no.=0
vci=35
vpi=8
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
404
encap=LLC(1)
proto=PPPoE(1)
modu=MULTI(4)
AcquireIP: Dhcp_client(1)
Idle timeout:-1
Username=draytek
Password=draytek
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
b
b
r
r
i
i
d
d
g
g
e
e
This command can specify a LAN port (LAN1 to LAN4) for mapping to certain PVC, and the
mapping port/PVC will be operated in bridge mode.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl bridge <pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable> <on/off/clear/tag tag_no><service type>
<px ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<pvc_no> It means pvc number and must be between 0(Channel 1) to
7(Channel 8).
pvc_no=0~7
<status> It means to shown the whole bridge status.
<save> It means to save the configuration to flash.
<enable> It means to enable the Multi-VLAN function.
<disable> It means to disable the Multi-VLAN function.
<on/off> It means to turn on/off bridge mode for the specific
channel.
<clear> It means to turn off and clear all the PVC settings.
<tag tag_no> It means to set tag number.
tag_no= 0-4095, -1 means no tag.
<pri pri_no> The number 0 to 7 can be set to indicate the priority. “7” is
the highest.
pri_no= 0~7
<service type> Two number can be set:
service type=0: for Normal (all the applications will be
processed with the same PVC).
service type=1: for the IGMP with different PVC which is
used for special ISP.
<px…> It means the number of LAN port (x=2~4). Port 1 is locked for NAT.
px=2~4
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl bridge 4 on p2 p3
PVC Bridge p1 p2 p3 p4 Service Type Tag Pri
------------------------------------------------------------
4 ON 0 0 1 0 Normal -1(OFF) 0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
405
PVC 0 & 1 can't set for bridge mode.
Please use 'save' to save config.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
i
i
d
d
l
l
e
e
This command can make the router accessing into the idle status. If you want to invoke the
router again, you have to reboot the router by using “reboot” command.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl idle <on / tcpmessage / tcpmessage_off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on> DSL is under test mode.
DSL debug tool mode is off.
<tcpmessage> DSL debug tool mode is on.
<tcpmessage_off> DSL debug tool mode is off.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl idle on
% DSL is under [IDLE/QUIET] test mode.
% DSL debug tool mode is off.
> adsl idle tcpmessage
% Set DSL debug tool mode on. Please reboot system to take effect.
> adsl idle tcpmessage_off
% Set DSL debug tool mode off. Please reboot system to take effect.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
d
d
r
r
i
i
v
v
e
e
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
This command is useful for laboratory to measure largest power of data transmission. Please
follow the steps below to set adsl drivermode.
1. Please connect dsl line to the DSLAM.
2. Waiting for dsl SHOWTIME.
3. Drop the dsl line.
4. Now, it is on continuous sending mode, and adsl2/2+ led is always ON.
5. Use 'adsl reboot' to restart dsl to normal mode.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
r
r
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
t
t
This command can reboot the router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl reboot
% Adsl is Rebooting...
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
406
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
o
o
a
a
m
m
l
l
b
b
This command is used to test if the connection between CPE and CO is OK or not.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl oamlb <n><type>
adsl oamlb chklink <on/off>
adsl oamlb <log_on/log_off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<n> It means the total number of transmitted packets.
n=F4~F5
<type> It means the protocol that you can use.
type=1 : F4 Seg-to-Seg (VP level)
type=2 : F4 End-to-End (VP level)
type=4 : F5 Seg-to-Seg (VC level)
type=5 : F5 End-to-End (VC level)
chklink Check the DSL connection.
<log_on/log_off> Enable or disable the OAM log for debug.
log_on= enable
log_off= disable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl oamlb chklink on
OAM checking dsl link is ON.
> adsl oamlb F5 4
Tx cnt=0
Rx Cnt=0
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
v
v
c
c
i
i
l
l
i
i
m
m
i
i
t
t
This command can cancel the limit for vci value.
Some ISP might set the vci value under 32. In such case, we can cancel such limit manually by
using this command. Do not set the number greater than 254.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl vcilimit <n>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<n> The number shall be between 1 ~ 254.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl vcilimit 33
change VCI limitation from 32 to 33.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
407
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
a
a
n
n
n
n
e
e
x
x
This command can display the annex interface of this router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl annex
% hardware is annex A.
% VDSL2 modem code is annex A/B/C
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
a
a
u
u
t
t
o
o
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
This command is used to add or remove ADSL modes (such as ANNEXL, ANNEXM and ANNEXJ)
supported by Multimode.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl automode <add/remove/set/default/show> <adsl_mode>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<add> It means to add ADSL mode.
<remove> It means to remove ADSL mode.
<set> It means to use default settings plus the new added ADSL
mode.
<default> It means to use default settings.
<show> It means to display current setting.
<adsl_mode> There are three modes to be choose, ANNEXL, ANNEXM
(annexA: ADSL over POTS) and ANNEXJ (annexB: ADSL over
ISDN).
<adsl_mode>= ANNEXL, ANNEXM, ANNEXJ
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl automode set ANNEXJ
Automode supported : T1.413, G.DMT, ADSL2, ADSL2+, ANNEXJ,
> adsl automode default
Automode supported : T1.413, G.DMT, ADSL2, ADSL2+,
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
b
b
i
i
n
n
s
s
This command can display the allocation for each Bin (Tone) SNR, Gain, and Bits.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl showbins <startbin endbin / up>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<startbin> The number is between 0 ~ 4092.
<endbin> The number is between 4 ~ 4095.
<up> Show upstream information.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
408
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl showbins 2 30
DOWNSTREAM :
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi
dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts
--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --
--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --
Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi
dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
o
o
p
p
t
t
n
n
This command allows you to configure DSL line feature.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl optn <FUNC> <us/ds/bi> <value/on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<FUNC> Available functions contain:
'trellis',
'bitswap',
'sra',
'retx',
'aelem',
'status',
'g.vector',
'default'.
<us/ds/bi> us: upstream
ds: downstream
bi: bidirection.
'aelem' and 'g.vector' can be only on/off.
<value> The value set here is for bitswap / sra only.
For bitswap, value=0~2,
For sra, value=0,2,3,4.
<on/off> Type “on” for enabling such function.
Type “off” for disabling such function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl optn default
trellis [US] = ON, [DS] = ON.
bitswap [US] = 0, [DS] = 0.
[0: default(ON), 1: ON, 2: OFF]
sra [US] = 0, [DS] = 0.
[0: default(=3), 2: OFF, 3: ON , 4: DYNAMIC_SOS]
retx [US] = ON, [DS] = ON.
aelem ON
G.Vector ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
a
a
v
v
e
e
c
c
f
f
g
g
This command can save the configuration into FLASH with a file format of cfg.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
409
> adsl savecfg
% Xdsl Cfg Save OK!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
v
v
e
e
n
n
d
d
o
o
r
r
i
i
d
d
This command allows you to configure user-defined CPE vendor ID.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl vendorid <status/on/off> <set vid0 vid1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<status> Display current status of user-defined vendor ID.
<on> Enable the user-defined function.
<off> Disable the user-defined function.
<set vid0 vid1> It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1.
The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244:
79612f21.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl vendorid status
% User define CPE Vendor ID is OFF
% vid0:vid1 = 0x00fe7244:79612f21
> adsl vendorid on set vid0 vid1
% User define CPE Vendor ID is ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
a
a
t
t
m
m
This command can set QoS parameter for ATM.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl atm pcr <pvc_no> <PCR> <max>
adsl atm scr <pvc_no> <SCR>
adsl atm mbs <pvc_no> <MBS>
adsl atm status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<pvc_no> It means pvc number and must be between 0(Channel 1) to
7(Channel 8).
pvc_no=0~7
<PCR> It means Peak Cell Rate for upstream.
PCR=1~2539
<max> It means to get the highest speed for the upstream.
<SCR> It means Sustainable Cell Rate.
<MBS> It means Maximum Burst Size.
<status> It means to display PCR/SCR/MBS setting.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
410
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl atm pcr 1 200 max
% PCR is 200 for pvc 1.
> adsl atm pcr status
pvc channel PCR
---------------------------
0 1 0
1 2 200
2 3 0
3 4 0
4 5 0
5 6 0
6 7 0
7 8 0
> adsl atm mbs 2 300 max
% MBS is 300 for pvc 2.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
p
p
v
v
c
c
b
b
i
i
n
n
d
d
i
i
n
n
g
g
This command can configure PVC to PVC binding. Such command is available only for PPPoE
and MPoA 1483 Bridge mode.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl pvcbinding <pvc_x>< pvc_y>
adsl pvcbinding status
adsl pvcbinding -1
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<pvc_x> It means the PVC number for the source.
pvc_x=2~7
<pvc_y> It means the PVC number that the source PVC will be bound
to.
pvc_y=0~7
status Display a table for PVC binding group.
-1 It means to clear specific PVC binding.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl pvcbinding 3 5
set done. bind pvc3 to pvc5.
The above example means PVC3 has been bound to PVC5.
> adsl pvcbinding 3 -1
clear pvc-1 binding
The above example means the PVC3 binding group has been removed.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
i
i
n
n
v
v
e
e
n
n
t
t
o
o
r
r
y
y
This command is used to display information about CO or CPE.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
adsl inventory co
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
411
adsl inventory cpe
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
co It means DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer)
or CO (Central Office).
cpe It means CPE (Customer Premise Equipment).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> adsl inventory co
xDSL inventory info only available in showtime.
> adsl inventory cpe
G.994 vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E5444
G.994.1 country code : 0XB500
G.994.1 provider code : IFTN
G.994.1 vendor info : 0X5444
System vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E0000
System country code : 0XB500
System provider code : IFTN
System vendor info : 0X000
Version number : 3.8.2_RC4a_STD
Version number(16 octets) : 0X332E382E325F524334615F5354440000
Self-test result : PASS
Transmission mode capability : 0X40004004C010400
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command is used to display current status of VDSL setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl status <more / counts / hlog / qln / snr/ bandinfo / olr>
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl status
---------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A/B/C) -----------
Running Mode : State : TRAINING
DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps
DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps
DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast
DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0
NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB
DS actual PSD : 0. 0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB
NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0
NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0
Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0
ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000
VDSL Firmware Version : 05-04-08-00-00-06
Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA
Test Mode : DISABLE
---------------------- ATU-C Info ---------------------------------
Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB
CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000
DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < unknown >
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
412
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
i
i
d
d
l
l
e
e
This command can make the router accessing into the idle status. If you want to invoke the
router again, you have to reboot the router by using “reboot” command.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl idle <on / tcpmessage /tcpmessage_off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on DSL is under test mode.
DSL debug tool mode is off.
tcpmessage DSL debug tool mode is on.
tcpmessage_off DSL debug tool mode is off.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl idle on
% DSL is under [IDLE/QUIET] test mode.
% DSL debug tool mode is off.
> vdsl idle tcpmessage
% Set DSL debug tool mode on. Please reboot system to take effect.
> vdsl idle tcpmessage_off
% Set DSL debug tool mode off. Please reboot system to take effect.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
d
d
r
r
i
i
v
v
e
e
r
r
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
This command is useful for laboratory to measure largest power of data transmission. Please
follow the steps below to set vdsl drivermode.
1. Please connect dsl line to the DSLAM.
2. Waiting for dsl SHOWTIME.
3. Drop the dsl line.
4. Now, it is on continuous sending mode, and vdsl2/2+ led is always ON.
5. Use 'vdsl reboot' to restart dsl to normal mode.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
r
r
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
t
t
This command can reboot the DSL router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl reboot
% Adsl is Rebooting...
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
a
a
n
n
n
n
e
e
x
x
This command can display the annex interface of this router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl annex
% hardware is annex A.
% ADSL modem code is annex A
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
b
b
i
i
n
n
s
s
This command can display the allocation for each Bin (Tone) SNR, Gain, and Bits.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
413
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl showbins <startbin> <endbin>
vdsl showbins up
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<startbin> Enter a number as startbin.
startbin= 0 ~ 4092.
<endbin> Enter a number as endbin.
Endbin= 4 ~ 4095.
up Show upstream information.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl showbins 2 30
DOWNSTREAM :
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi
dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts
--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --
--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --
Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi
dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
o
o
p
p
t
t
n
n
This command allows you to configure DSL line feature.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl optn <FUNC><us/ds/bi> <value><on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<FUNC> Available settings contain:
'trellis',
'bitswap',
'sra',
'retx',
'aelem',
'status',
'g.vector',
'default'.
<us/ds/bi> us: upstream
ds: downstream
bi: bidirection.
'aelem' and 'g.vector' can be only on/off.
<value> The value set here is for bitswap / sra only.
For bitswap, value=0~2,
For sra, value=0,2,3,4.
<on/off> Type “on” for enabling such function.
Type “off” for disabling such function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl optn trellis us off
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
414
trellis [US] = OFF, [DS] = ON.
> vdsl optn default
trellis [US] = ON, [DS] = ON.
bitswap [US] = 0, [DS] = 0.
[0: default(ON), 1: ON, 2: OFF]
sra [US] = 0, [DS] = 0.
[0: default(=3), 2: OFF, 3: ON , 4: DYNAMIC_SOS]
retx [US] = ON, [DS] = ON.
aelem ON
G.Vector ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
s
s
a
a
v
v
e
e
c
c
f
f
g
g
This command can save the configuration into FLASH with a file format of cfg.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl savecfg
% Xdsl Cfg Save OK!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
v
v
e
e
n
n
d
d
o
o
r
r
i
i
d
d
This command allows you to configure user-defined CPE vendor ID.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl vendorid <status/on/off>
vdsl vendorid set< vid0 vid1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
status Display current status of user-defined vendor ID.
<on/off> Type “on” for enabling such function.
Type “off” for disabling such function.
set <vid0 vid1> It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1.
The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244:
79612f21.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl vendorid status
% User define CPE Vendor ID is OFF
% vid0:vid1 = 0x00fe7244:79612f21
> vdsl vendorid on set vid0 vid1
% User define CPE Vendor ID is ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
d
d
s
s
l
l
i
i
n
n
v
v
e
e
n
n
t
t
o
o
r
r
y
y
This command is used to display information about CO or CPE.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vdsl inventory co
vdsl inventory cpe
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
415
Parameter Description
co It means DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer)
or CO (Central Office).
cpe It means CPE (Customer Premise Equipment).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vdsl inventory co
xDSL inventory info only available in showtime.
> vdsl inventory cpe
G.994 vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E5444
G.994.1 country code : 0XB500
G.994.1 provider code : IFTN
G.994.1 vendor info : 0X5444
System vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E0000
System country code : 0XB500
System provider code : IFTN
System vendor info : 0X000
Version number : 3.8.2_RC4a_STD
Version number(16 octets) : 0X332E382E325F524334615F5354440000
Self-test result : PASS
Transmission mode capability : 0X40004004C010400
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
a
a
p
p
p
p
e
e
p
p
r
r
o
o
f
f
Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy
of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application.
“csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be
applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
csm appe prof -i <INDEX> <-v>
csm appe prof -i <INDEX> -n <NAME>
csm appe prof -i <INDEX> <setdefault>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~32.
- v It means to view the configuration of the CSM profile.
- n <NAME> It means to set a name for the CSM profile.
<NAME>: Specify a name for the CSM profile, less then 15
characters.
setdefault Reset to default settings.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm appe prof -i 1 -n game
The name of APPE Profile 1 was setted.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
416
> csm appe prof -i 1 setdefault
APPE Profile 1 was reseted.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
a
a
p
p
p
p
e
e
s
s
e
e
t
t
It is used to configure group settings for IM/P2P/Protocol and Others in APP Enforcement
Profile.
csm appe set -i INDEX -v <GROUP>
csm appe set -i INDEX -e <AP_IDX>
csm appe set -i INDEX -d <AP_IDX>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~32.
- v <GROUP> View the IM/P2P/Protocol or Others configuration of the CSM
profile.
<GROUP>= IM, P2P, Protocol,or Others.
-e Enable to block specific application.
-d Disable to block specific application.
<AP_IDX> Specify the index number of the application here.
AP_IDX=1~119
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm appe set -i 1 -e 1
Profile 1 - : AIM is enabled.
> csm appe set -i 32 -e 90
Profile 32 - : PPTV is enabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
a
a
p
p
p
p
e
e
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile.
csm appe show <-a/-i/-p/-t/-m>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-a View the configuration status for All groups.
-i View the configuration status of IM group.
-p View the configuration status of P2P group.
-t View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m View the configuration status of Others group.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>csm appe show -t
Type Index Name Version Advance
Advanced Option: (M)essage, (F)ile Transfer, (G)ame, (C)onference, and (O)ther
Activities
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
417
-------------------------------------------------------------
PROTOCOL 52 DB2
PROTOCOL 53 DNS
PROTOCOL 54 FTP
PROTOCOL 55 HTTP 1.1
PROTOCOL 56 IMAP 4.1
PROTOCOL 57 IMAP STARTTLS 4.1
PROTOCOL 58 IRC 2.4.0 …………
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
a
a
p
p
p
p
e
e
c
c
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
It is used to display the configuration status (enabled or disabled) for IM/P2P/Protocol/Other
applications.
csm appe config -v <INDEX><-i/-p/-t/-m>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~32.
-i View the configuration status of IM group.
-p View the configuration status of P2P group.
-t View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m View the configuration status of Others group.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm appe config -v 1 -m
Group Type Index Name Enable A
vance Enable
Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other
Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O
-------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHERS TUNNEL 75 DNSCrypt Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 76 DynaPass Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 77 FreeU Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 78 HTTP Proxy Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 79 HTTP Tunnel Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 80 Hamachi Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 81 Hotspot Shield Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 82 MS Teredo Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 83 PGPNet Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 84 Ping Tunnel Disable
.
.
.
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 66 APPs
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
u
u
c
c
f
f
It is used to configure settings for URL control filter profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
csm ucf show
csm ucf setdefault
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
418
csm ucf msg MSG
csm ucf obj <INDEX> -n <PROFILE_NAME> -l <P/B/A> <uac>< wf>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> -n <PROFILE_NAME>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> -p <VALUE>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> <-l P/B/A>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to display all of the profiles.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all of the profile.
msg MSG It means de set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the
message itself.
obj It means to specify the object for the profile.
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~8.
-n <PROFILE_NAME> It means to set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME: Enter the name of the profile (less than 16
characters).
-p <VALUE> Set the priority (defined by the number specified in VALUE)
for the profile. Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions.
VALUE=0: It means Bundle: Pass.
VALUE=1: It means Bundle: Block.
VALUE=2: It means Either: URL Access Control First.
VALUE=3: It means Either: Web Feature First.
-l <P/B/A> It means the log type of the profile. They are:
P: Pass,
B: Block,
A: All
uac It means to set URL Access Control part.
wf It means to set Web Feature part.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm ucf obj 1 -n game -l B
Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[game]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
u
u
c
c
f
f
o
o
b
b
j
j
I
I
N
N
D
D
E
E
X
X
u
u
a
a
c
c
It means to configure the settings regarding to URL Access Control (uac).
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -v
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -e
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -d
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -a <P/B>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
419
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -i <E/D>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -o <KEY_WORD_Object_Index>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> uac -g <KEY_WORD_Group_Index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~8.
-v It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.
-e It means to enable the function of URL Access Control.
-d It means to disable the function of URL Access Control.
-a <P/B> Set the action of specific application, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be
blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be
passed.
-i <E/D> Prevent the web access from any IP address.
E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP
address will be blocked.
D: Disable the function.
-o <
KEY_WORD_Object_Index>
Set the keyword object.
KEY_WORD_Object_Index: Specify the index number of the
object profile.
-g <
KEY_WORD_Group_Index>
Set the keyword group.
KEY_WORD_Group_Index: Specify the index number of the
group profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm ucf obj 1 uac -i E
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
-----------------------------------------------
URL Access Control
[ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[pass]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO. Object Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
No Grp NO. Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
> csm ucf obj 1 uac -a B
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
-----------------------------------------------
URL Access Control
[ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[block]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO. Object Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
No Grp NO. Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
420
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
u
u
c
c
f
f
o
o
b
b
j
j
I
I
N
N
D
D
E
E
X
X
w
w
f
f
It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf).
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -v
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -e
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -d
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -a <P/B>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -s <WEB_FEATURE>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -u <WEB_FEATURE>
csm ucf obj <INDEX> wf -f <File_Extension_Object_index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~8.
-v It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM
profile.
-e It means to enable the restriction of web feature.
-d It means to disable the restriction of web feature.
-a <P/B> Set the action of web feature, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be
blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be
passed.
-s <WEB_FEATURE> It means to enable the the Web Feature configuration.
Features available for configuration are:
<WEB_FEATURE>=c: Cookie
<WEB_FEATURE>=p: Proxy
<WEB_FEATURE>=u: Upload
-u <WEB_FEATURE> It means to cancel the web feature configuration.
-f
<
File_Extension_Object_ind
ex
>
It means to set the file extension object index number.
File_Extension_Object_index=1 to 8
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm ucf obj 1 wf -s c
-----------------------------------------------
Web Feature
[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature Action:[pass]
File Extension Object Index : [0] Profile Name : []
[V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
421
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
c
c
s
s
m
m
w
w
c
c
f
f
It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
csm wcf show
csm wcf look
csm wcf cache
csm wcf server WCF_SERVER
csm wcf msg MSG
csm wcf setdefault
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -v
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -a <P/B>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -n <PROFILE_NAME>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -l <N/P/B/A>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -o <KEY_WORD Object Index>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -g <KEY_WORD Group Index>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -w <E/D/P/B>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -s <CATEGORY/WEB_GROUP>
csm wcf obj <INDEX> -u <CATEGORY/WEB_GROUP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to display the web content filter profiles.
Look It means to display the license information of WCF.
cache It means to set the cache level for the profile.
server WCF_SERVER It means to set web content filter server.
msg MSG It means de set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the
message itself.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all of the profile.
obj It means to specify the object profile.
<INDEX> It means to specify the index number of CSM profile.
INDEX= 1~8.
-v It means to view the web content filter profile.
-a <P/B> Set the action of web content filter profile, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be
blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be
passed.
-n <PROFILE_NAME> It means to set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME: Enter the name of the profile (less than 16
characters)
-l <N/P/B/A> It means the log type of the profile. They are:
P: Pass,
B: Block,
A: All,
N: None
-o <KEY_WORD Object
Index>
Set the keyword object.
<KEY_WORD Object Index>= Specify the index number of the
object profile.
-g <KEY_WORD Group Index> Set the keyword group.
<KEY_WORD Group Index>= Specify the index number of the
group profile.
-w <E/D/P/B> It means to set the action for the black and white list.
E:Enable,
D:Disable,
P:Pass,
B:Block
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
422
-s <CATEGORY/WEB_GROUP> It means to select the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
<WEB_GROUP>: Includes
"Child Protection Group", "Leisure Group", "Business Group",
"Chating Group", "Computer Internet Group", "Other Group"
<CATEGORY>: Includes
"Advertisement & Pop-Ups", "Alcohol & Tobacco",
"Anonymizers", "Arts", "Business", "Transportation", "Chat",
"Forums & Newsgroups", "Compromised", "Computers &
Technology", "Criminal & Activity", "Dating & Personals",
"Down sites", "Education", "Entertainment", "Finance",
"Gambling", "Games", "Government", "Hate & Intolerance",
"Health & Medicine", "Illegal Drug", "Job Search", "Streaming
Media & Downloads", "News", "Non-profits & NGOs", "Nudity",
"Persional Sites", "Phishing & Fraud", "Politics", "Pornography
& Sexually explicit", "Real Estate", "Religion", "Restaurants &
Dining", "Search engines & Portals", "Shopping", "Social
Networking", "Spam sites", "Sports", "Malware", "Translators",
"Travel", "Violence", "Weapons", "Web-Based Email",
"General", "Leisure & Recreation", "Botnets", "Cults", "Fashion
& Beauty", "Greeting Cards", "Hacking", "Illegal Softwares",
"Image Sharing", "Information Security", "Instant Messaging",
"Network Errors", "Parked Domains", "Peer-to-Peer", "Private
IP Address", "School Cheating", "Sex Education", "Tasteless",
"Child Abuse Images", "Uncategorised Sites"
-u
<CATEGORY/WEB_GROUP>
It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
<WEB_GROUP>: Includes
"Child Protection Group", "Leisure Group", "Business Group",
"Chating Group", "Computer Internet Group", "Other Group"
<CATEGORY>: Includes
"Advertisement & Pop-Ups", "Alcohol & Tobacco",
"Anonymizers", "Arts", "Business", "Transportation", "Chat",
"Forums & Newsgroups", "Compromised", "Computers &
Technology", "Criminal & Activity", "Dating & Personals",
"Down sites", "Education", "Entertainment", "Finance",
"Gambling", "Games", "Government", "Hate & Intolerance",
"Health & Medicine", "Illegal Drug", "Job Search", "Streaming
Media & Downloads", "News", "Non-profits & NGOs", "Nudity",
"Persional Sites", "Phishing & Fraud", "Politics", "Pornography
& Sexually explicit", "Real Estate", "Religion", "Restaurants &
Dining", "Search engines & Portals", "Shopping", "Social
Networking", "Spam sites", "Sports", "Malware", "Translators",
"Travel", "Violence", "Weapons", "Web-Based Email",
"General", "Leisure & Recreation", "Botnets", "Cults", "Fashion
& Beauty", "Greeting Cards", "Hacking", "Illegal Softwares",
"Image Sharing", "Information Security", "Instant Messaging",
"Network Errors", "Parked Domains", "Peer-to-Peer", "Private
IP Address", "School Cheating", "Sex Education", "Tasteless",
"Child Abuse Images", "Uncategorised Sites"
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
423
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[test_wcf]
[]White/Black list
Action:[block]
No Obj NO. Object Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
No Grp NO. Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
Action:[block]
Log:[block]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
child Protection Group:
[v]Alcohol & Tobacco [v]Criminal & Activity [v]Gambling
[v]Hate & Intolerance [v]Illegal Drug [v]Nudity
[v]Pornography & Sexually explicit [v]Violence [v]Weapons
[v]School Cheating [v]Sex Education [v]Tasteless
[v]Child Abuse Images
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
leisure Group:
[ ]Entertainment [ ]Games [ ]Sports
[ ]Travel [ ]Leisure & Recreation [ ]Fashion & Beauty
.
.
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
l
l
o
o
g
g
Displays the DDNS log.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ddns log
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
e
e
n
n
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
Enables or disables the DDNS function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ddns enable <0/1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<0/1> 0 - Disable the DDNS function.
1 - Enable the DDNS function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ddns enable 1
> Enable Dynamic DNS Setup
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
424
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
s
s
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to set Dynamica DNS account.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ddns set option <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-i <value> It means index number of Dynamic DNS Account.
<value>=1~6
-E <value> It means to enable /disable Dynamic DNS Account.
<value>=0~1
0: Disable
1: Enable
-W <value> It means to specify WAN Interface.
<value>=1~4
1: WAN1 First
2: WAN1 Only
3: WAN2 First
4: WAN2 Only
example: To set WAN Interface: WAN1 First
-L <value> It means to type Login Name.
[value]: limit up to 64 characters
-P <value> It means to type Password.
[value]: limit up to 24 characters
-C <value> It means to enable /disable Wildcards.
<value>=0~1
0: Disable
1: Enable
-B <value> It means to enable / disable Backup MX.
<value>=0~1
0: Disable
1: Enable
-M <value> It means to type Mail Extender.
[value]: limit up to 60 characters
-R <value> It means to type Determine Real WAN IP.
<value>=0~1
0: WAN IP,
1: Internet IP
-S <value> It means to specify Servive Provider.
If user want to set User-Defined page, value must select 1.
<value>= 1~19
1: User-Defined
2:3322 DDNS (www.3322.org)
3: ChangeIP.com (www.changeip.com)
4:ddns.com.cn (www.ddns.com.cn)
5: DtDNS (www.dtdns.com)
6: dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
7: DynAccess (www.dynaccess.com)
8: dynami.co.za (www.dynami.co.za)
9: freedns.afraid.org (freedns.afraid.org)
10: NO-IP.COM Free (www.no-ip.com)
11: opendns.com (www.opendns.com)
12: OVH (www.ovh.com)
13: Strato (www.strato.eu)
14: TwoDNS (www.twodns.de)
15: TZO (www.tzo.com)
16: ubddns.org (ubddns.org)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
425
17: Viettel DDNS (vddns.vn)
18: vigorddns.com (www.vigorddns.com)
19: ZoneEdit DDNS (dynamic.zoneedit.com)
T <value> It means to type Servive Type.
<value>= 1~3
1: Dynamic
2: Custom
3: Static
-D <Host Name> <sub
Domain Name>
It means to type Domain Name.
i.e: Account index 1 setting Domain Name for Dynamic
Service Type
>> ddns set -i 1 -T 1 -D "host ddns.com.cn"
i.e: Account index 2 setting Domain Name for Custom
Service Type
>> ddns set -i 2 -T 2 -D "domain name"
i.e: Account index 3 setting Domain Name for Static Service
Type
>> ddns set -i 3 -T 3 -D "domain name"
-H <value> It means to type User-Defined Provider Host.
<value>= limit up to 64 characters
-A <value> It means to type User-Defined Service API.
<value>= limit up to 256 characters
-a <value> It means to type User-Defined Auth Type.
<value>=0~1
0: basic
1: URL
-N <value> It means to type User-Defined Connection Type.
<value>=0~1
0: Http
1: Https
-O <value> It means to type User-Defined Server Response.
<value>: limit up to 32 characters
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ddns set -i 1 -S 6 -T 1 -D "hostname dnsalias.net" -L user1 -P pwd1
> Save OK
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
Sets and displays the DDNS time.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ddns time <update in minutes>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
update in minutes Enter the value as DDNS time.
<update in minutes>=1 ~ 14400.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ddns time
ddns time <update in minutes>
Valid: 1 ~ 1440
%Now: 1440
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
426
> ddns time 1000
ddns time <update in minutes>
Valid: 1 ~ 1440
%Now: 1000
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
f
f
o
o
r
r
c
c
e
e
u
u
p
p
d
d
a
a
t
t
e
e
This command will update DDNS automatically.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ddns forceupdate
Now updating DDNS ...
Please check result by using command "ddns log"
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
s
s
e
e
t
t
d
d
e
e
f
f
a
a
u
u
l
l
t
t
This command will return DDS with factory default settings.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ddns setdefault
>Set to Factory Default.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
d
d
n
n
s
s
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
This command allows users to check the content of selected DDNS account.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ddns show -i <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-i <value> Display the content of selected DDNS account by entering
the index number of the account.
<value>=1~6
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ddns show -i 1
--------------------------------------------------
Index: 1
[ ] Enable Dynamic DNS Account
WAN Interface: WAN1 First
Service Provider: dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
Service Type: Dynamic
Domain Name: [].[]
Login Name:
[ ] Wildcards
[ ] Backup MX
Mail Extender:
Determine Real WAN IP: WAN IP
DrayTek>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
427
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
d
d
o
o
s
s
This command allows users to configure the settings for DoS defense system.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
dos <-V / D / A>
dos -s <ATTACK_F> <THRESHOLD> <TIMEOUT>
dos <-a /-e> <ATTACK_F><ATTACK_0>
dos -d <ATTACK_F><ATTACK_0>
dos -o <LOG_TYPE> -p<LOG_TYPE> -l <LOG_TYPE>
dos <-P/-B> add4 <ipv4_addr>
dos <-P/-B> remove4 <ipv4_addr/all>
dos <-P/-B> add6 <ipv6_addr>
dos <-P/-B> remove6 <ipv6_addr/all>
dos <-P/-B> show
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-V It means to view the configuration of DoS defense system.
-D It means to deactivate the DoS defense system.
-A It means to activate the DoS defense system.
-s <ATTACK_F>
<THRESHOLD> <TIMEOUT>
It means to enable the defense function for a specific attack
and set its parameter(s).
<ATTACK_F>: Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or
portscan, e.g., synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
<THRESHOLD>: It means the packet rate (packet/second)
that a flooding attack will be detected. Set a value larger
than 20.
<TIMEOUT>: It means the time (seconds) that a flooding
attack will be blocked. Set a value larger than 5.
-a <ATTACK_F> <ATTACK_0> It means to enable the defense function for all attacks listed
in ATTACK_0.
<ATTACK_F>: Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or
portscan, e.g., synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
< ATTACK_0>: Specify a name of the following attacks:
ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath,
traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.
-e <ATTACK_F> <ATTACK_0> It means to enable defense function for a specific attack(s).
<ATTACK_F>: Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or
portscan, e.g., synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
< ATTACK_0>: Specify a name of the following attacks:
ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath,
traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.
-d <ATTACK_F> <ATTACK_0> It means to disable the defense function for a specific
attack(s).
<ATTACK_F>: Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or
portscan, e.g., synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
< ATTACK_0>: Specify a name of the following attacks:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
428
ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath,
traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.
-o <LOG_TYPE>
It means to enable/disable DOS defense log.
<LOG_TYPE>= 0~1
0:Disable
1:Enable
-p <LOG_TYPE>
It means to enable/disable spoofing defense log.
<LOG_TYPE>= 0~1
0:Disable
1:Enable
-l <LOG_TYPE>
It means to enable/disable black and white list log.
<LOG_TYPE>= 0~3
0:None
1:WhiteList
2:BlackList
3:All
<-P/-B> add4 <ipv4_addr> It means to set Passing List or Blocking List.
<ipv4_addr>= Enter an IPv4 address.
<-P/-B> remove4
<ipv4_addr/all>
It means to remove IPv4 address in Passing List or Blocking
List.
<ipv6_addr/all>= Enter an IPv4 address or enter all.
<-P/-B> add6 <ipv6_addr> It means to add an IPv6 address to Passing List or Blocking
List.
<ipv6_addr>= Enter an IPv6 address.
<-P/-B> remove6
<ipv6_addr/all>
It means to remove IPv6 address in Passing List or Blocking
List.
<ipv6_addr/all>= Enter an IPv6 address or enter all.
<-P/-B> show It means to show the Passing List or Blocking List.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>dos –A
The Dos Defense system is Activated
>dos –s synflood 50 10
Synflood is enabled! Threshold=50 <pke/sec> timeout=10 <pke/sec>
DrayTek> dos -P add4 192.168.1.59
Add IP in Passing IP List success.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
e
e
x
x
i
i
t
t
Type this command will leave telnet window.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows you to configure detailed settings for WAN connection.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
internet -<command> <parameter> | ...
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
429
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command><parameter>|
…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-M <n> M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n
means different modes (represented by 0 – 3)
n=0: Offline
n=1: PPPoE
n=2: Dynamic IP
n=3: Static IP
n=A: 3G/4G USB Modem(PPP mode)
n=B: 3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP mode
-S <isp name> It means to set ISP Name (max. 23 characters).
-P <on/off> It means to enable PPPoE Service.
-u <username> It means to set username (max. 49 characters) for Internet
accessing.
-p <password> It means to set password (max. 49 characters) for Internet
accessing.
-a <n> It means to set PPP Authentication Type and n means
different types (represented by 0-1).
n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting)
n=1: PAP Only
-t <n> It means to set connection duration and n means different
conditions.
n=1~999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds)
n=-1: Always-on
-i <ip address> It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified
here for CPE (PPPoE client).
If you type 0.0.0.0 as the <ip address>, ISP will assign
suitable IP address for you. However, if you type an IP
address here, the router will use that one as a fixed IP.
-w <ip address> It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection.
Please type an IP address here for WAN port.
-n <netmask> It means to assign netmask for WAN connection. You have to
type 255.255.255.xxx (x is changeable) as the netmask for
WAN port.
-g <gateway> It means to assign gateway IP for such WAN connection.
-A <idx> Set to Always On mode, and <idx> as backup WAN#.
-B <mode> Set to Backup mode;
<mode> 0: When any WAN disconnect; 1: When all WAN
disconnect.
-V It means to view Internet Access profile.
-C <sim pin code> Set SIM PIN code (max. 15 characters) for USB PPP mode.
-O <init string> Set Modem Initial String (max. 47 characters) for USB PPP
mode.
-T <init string2> Set Modem Initial String2 (max. 47 characters) for USB PPP
mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
430
-D <dial string> Set Modem Dial String (max. 31 characters) for USB PPP
mode.
-v <service name> Set Service Name (max. 23 characters) for USB PPP mode.
-m <ppp username> Set PPP Username (max. 63 characters) for USB PPP mode.
-o <ppp password> Set PPP Password (max. 62 characters) for USB PPP mode.
-e <n> Set PPP Authentication Type for USB PPP mode.
n= 0: PAP/CHAP (default)
1: PAP Only
-q <n> Set the first schedule for USB PPP mode.
n=1~15
-x <n> Set the second schedule for USB PPP mode.
n=1~15
-y <n> Set the third schedule for USB PPP mode.
n=1~15
-z <n> Set the fourth schedule for USB PPP mode.
n=1~15
-Q <mode> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection
Mode.
<mode>
0: ARP Detect;
1: Ping Detect
-I <ping ip> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection
Ping IP for USB DHCP or PPP mode.
<ping ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: WAN Connection Detection Ping IP
-L <n> Set WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value for USB PPP
mode.
N=1~255
-E <sim pin code> Set SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters) for USB DHCP mode.
-G <mode> Set Network Mode for USB DHCP mode.
<mode>
0: 4G/3G/2G;
1: 4G Only;
2: 3G Only;
3: 2G Only
-N <apn name> Set APN Name (max. 47 characters) for USB DHCP mode.
-U <n> Set MTU(1000-1440) for USB DHCP mode.
n=1000~1440
-f <n> Set DSL Mode.
n= 0: Auto,
n=1: ADSL Only,
n=2: VDSL Only
-j <on/off> Separate Account for ADSL.
on: enable.
off: disable.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
431
-k <username> Set ADSL account Username (max. 49 characters) when
Separate Account is enabled.
-l <password> Set ADSL account Password (max. 49 characters) when
Separate Account is enabled.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.0
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom
WAN1 Username set to username
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on
WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0
> internet -V
WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE
ISP Name: tcom
Username: username
Authentication: PAP/CHAP
Idle Timeout: -1
WAN IP: Dynamic IP
> internet -M 1 -u link1 -p link1 -a 0
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 Username set to link1
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
p
p
u
u
b
b
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to enable or disable the public subnet for your router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip pubsubnet <Enable/Disable>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<Enable/Disable> Enable or disable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip pubsubnet enable
public subnet enabled!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
p
p
u
u
b
b
a
a
d
d
d
d
r
r
This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip pubaddr ?
ip pubaddr <public subnet IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
432
Parameter Description
? Display current IP address which allows users set as the
public subnet IP address.
<public subnet IP
address>
Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you
specified as the public subnet IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip pubaddr ?
% ip addr <public subnet IP address>
% Now: 192.168.0.1
> ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5
% Set public subnet IP address done !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
p
p
u
u
b
b
m
m
a
a
s
s
k
k
This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip pubmask ?
ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
? Display current IP address which allows users set as the
public subnet mask.
<public subnet IP
address>
Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you
specified as the public subnet mask.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip pubmask ?
% ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
% Now: 255.255.255.0
> ip pubmask 255.255.0.0
% Set public subnet mask done !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
a
a
u
u
x
x
This command is used for configuring WAN IP Alias.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip aux add <IP> <Join to NAT Pool>
ip aux remove <index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
add <IP> <Join to NAT Pool> It means to create a new WAN IP address.
<IP>=Enter an IP address as the auxiliary WAN IP address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
433
<Join to NAT Pool>=0~1, 0 (disable) or 1 (enable).
Remove < index > It means to delete an existed WAN IP address.
<index>= Enter the index number of the table displayed on
your screen.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip aux add 192.168.1.65 1
% 192.168.1.65 has added in index 2.
DrayTek> ip aux ?
%% ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool]
%% ip aux remove [Index]
%% Where IP = Auxiliary WAN IP Address.
%% Join to NAT Pool = 0 or 1.
%% Index = The Index number of table.
Now auxiliary WAN1 IP Address table:
Index no. Status IP address NAT IP pool
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0 Yes
2 Enable 192.168.1.65 Yes
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
434
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
a
a
d
d
d
d
r
r
This command allows users to set/add a specified LAN IP your router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip addr <IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP address> It means the LAN IP address.
<IP address>=Enter an IPv4 address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ip addr 192.168.50.1
% Set IP address OK !!!
Info
When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are
still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being
consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network
segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP
address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web
user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP
server.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
n
n
m
m
a
a
s
s
k
k
This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip nmask <IP netmask>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP netmask> It means the netmask of LAN IP.
<IP netmask>=Enter the netmask.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip nmask 255.255.0.0
% Set IP netmask OK !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
a
a
r
r
p
p
ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip arp add <IP address> <MAC address> <LAN / WAN>
ip arp del <IP address> <LAN / WAN>
ip arp flush
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
435
ip arp status
ip arp accept <0/1/2/3/4/5/status>
ip arp setCacheLife <time>
In which, arp add allows users to add a new IP address into the ARP table; arp del allows users
to remove an IP address; arp flush allows users to clear arp cache; arp status allows users to
review current status for the arp table; arp accept allows to accept or reject the source
/destination MAC address; arp setCacheLife allows users to configure the duration in which
ARP caches can be stored on the system. If ip arp setCacheLife is set with “60”, it means you
have an ARP cache at 0 second. Sixty seconds later without any ARP messages received, the
system will think such ARP cache is expired. The system will issue a few ARP request to see if
this cache is still valid.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
add <IP address> <MAC
address> <LAN / WAN>
It means to add one LAN IP address with subnet mask on
selected interface.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address.
<MAC address>: Enter the MAC address of your router.
<LAN / WAN>:It indicates the direction for the arp function.
del <IP address> <LAN /
WAN>
It means to delete one LAN IP address on selected interface.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address.
<LAN / WAN>:It indicates the direction for the arp function
accept
<0/1/2/3/4/5/status>
0: disable to accept illegal source mac address
1: enable to accept illegal source mac address
2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address
3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address
4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table
5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table
status: display the setting status.
setCacheLife <time> Available settings will be 10, 20, 30,....2550 seconds.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip arp accept status
Accept illegal source mac arp: disable
Accept illegal dest mac arp: disable
Accept VRRP mac into arp table: disable
> ip arp status
[ARP Table]
Index IP Address MAC Address Netbios Name
1 192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE A1000351
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
c
c
This command is available for WAN DHCP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip dhcpc option
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
436
ip dhcpc option -l
ip dhcpc option -d <idx>
ip dhcpc option -e <1 or 0> -w <wan unmber> -c<option number> -v <option value>
ip dhcpc option -e <1 or 0> -w <wan unmber> -c <option number> –x <option value>
ip dhcpc option -e <1 or 0> -w <wan unmber> -c<option number> –a <option value>
ip dhcpc option -u <idx unmber>
ip dhcpc release <wan number>
ip dhcpc renew <wan number>
ip dhcpc status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
option It is an optional setting for DHCP server.
-h: display usage
-l: list all custom set DHCP options
-d: delete custom dhcp client option by index number
-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable
-w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1)
-c: set option number: 0~255
-v: set option value by string
-x: set option value by raw byte (hex)
-u: update by index number
release It means to release current WAN IP address.
renew It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another
new one.
status It displays current status of DHCP client.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip dhcpc option -e 1 -w 1/2 -c 18 -v /path1
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
p
p
i
i
n
n
g
g
This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2/PVC3/PVC4/PVC5 for verifying
if the WAN connection is OK or not.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip ping <IP address> <AUTO/WAN1/PVC3/PVC4/PVC5> <Source IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP address> It means the WAN IP address.
<AUTO/WAN1/PVC3/PVC4/
PVC5>
It means the WAN port /PVC that the above IP address
passes through.
<Source IP address> Enter the IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip ping 192.168.1.1 AUTO
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
437
Pinging 192.168.1.1 with 64 bytes of Data through LAN
Receive reply from 192.168.1.1, time<1ms
Receive reply from 192.168.1.1, time<1ms
Receive reply from 192.168.1.1, time<1ms
Receive reply from 192.168.1.1, time<1msReceive reply from 192.168.1.1,
time<1ms
Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 (0% loss)
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
t
t
r
r
a
a
c
c
e
e
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip tracert <IP address> <WAN1/WAN2/WAN3> <Udp/Icmp>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
< IP address> It means the target IP address.
<WAN1/WAN2/WAN3> It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes
through.
<Udp/Icmp> It means the UDP or ICMP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1
Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max
1 172.16.3.7 10ms
2 172.16.1.2 10ms
3 Request Time out.
4 168.95.90.66 50ms
5 211.22.38.134 50ms
6 220.128.2.62 50ms
Trace complete
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
t
t
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to access specified device by telnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip telnet <IP address><Port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP address> Enter the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device.
<Port> Type a port number (e.g., 23).
Available settings: 0 ~65535.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip telnet 172.17.3.252 23
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
438
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
r
r
i
i
p
p
This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of IP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip rip <0/1/2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<0/1/2> 0 means disable; 1 means first subnet and 2 means second
subnet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip rip 1
%% Set RIP LAN1.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
439
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
w
w
a
a
n
n
r
r
i
i
p
p
This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<ifno> It means the connection interface.
1: WAN1, 2:WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs.
-e <0/1>
It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN
interface.
1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP.
0: Disable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1, 2:WAN2
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:
WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[5] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[6] Rip Protocol enable
WAN[7] Rip Protocol enable
> ip wanrip 5 -e 1
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:
WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[5] Rip Protocol enable
WAN[6] Rip Protocol enable
WAN[7] Rip Protocol enable
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
440
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
r
r
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
This command allows users to set static route.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip route add <dst> <netmask> <gateway> <ifno> <rtype>
ip route del <dst> <netmask> <rtype>
ip route status
ip route cnc
ip route default off
ip route clean <1/0>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
add <dst> <netmask>
<gateway> <ifno>
<rtype>
It means to add an IP address as static route.
<dst>: Enter the IP address of the destination.
<netmask>:Enter the netmask of the specified IP address.
<gateway>: Enter the gateway of the connected router.
<ifno>: Speicfy the connection interface.
3=WAN1 4=WAN2 7=WAN5,8=WAN6,9=WAN7
<rtype>: Enter the type (default or static) of the route.
del <dst> <netmask>
<rtype>
It means to delete specified IP address.
<dst>:Enter the IP address of the destination.
<netmask>: Enter the netmask of the specified IP address.
<rtype>: Enter the type (default or static) of the route.
status It means current status of static route.
cnc It means current IP range for CNC Network.
default off It is available for NAT subnet only.
Set the default route as off.
clean <1/0> Clean all of the route settings.
1: Enable the function.
0: Disable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip route add 172.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.4 3 static
> ip route status
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private
C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN1
S 172.16.2.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 172.16.2.4, WAN1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
441
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
i
i
g
g
m
m
p
p
_
_
p
p
r
r
o
o
x
x
y
y
This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip igmp_proxy set
ip igmp_proxy reset
ip igmp_proxy wan <1~4>
ip igmp_proxy query
ip igmp_proxy ppp <0/1>
ip igmp_proxy status
ip igmp_proxy version <v2/v3/auto/show>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
set It means to enable proxy server.
reset It means to disable proxy server.
wan <1~4> It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service.
t_home It means to specify t_home proxy server for using.
on/off/show/help It means to turn on/off/display or get more information of
the T_home service.
query <value> It means to set IGMP general query interval.
<value>: Enter a number. The default value is 125000 ms.
ppp <0/1> It means to enable or disable the function.
0: No need to set IGMP with PPP header.
1: Set IGMP with PPP header.
status It means to display current status for proxy server.
version <v2/v3/auto/show> It means to change or display current version of IGMP proxy
server.
v2: version v2
v3: version v3
auto: version used will be detected automatically
show: Disply current version used.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip igmp_proxy query 130000
This command is for setting IGMP General Query Interval
The default value is 125000 ms
Current Setting is:130000 ms
> DrayTek> ip igmp_proxy version show
igmp version rule: auto
wan ver: v2
lan ver: v3
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
442
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
i
i
g
g
m
m
p
p
_
_
s
s
n
n
o
o
o
o
p
p
This command allows users to enable or disable IGMP snoop function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip igmp_snoop enable
ip igmp_snoop disable
ip igmp_snoop status
ip igmp_snoop txquery <on/off> <v2/v3>
ip igmp_snoop chkleave
ip igmp_snoop separate <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
enable It means to enable igmp snoop function
disable It means to disable igmp snoop function.
status It means to display current igmp configuration.
txquery <on/off> <v2/v3> It means to send out IGMP QUERY to LAN periodically.
On: enable
Off: disable
v2: version v2
v3: version v3
chkleave <on/off> It means to check the leave status.
On: enable the IGMP snoop leave checking function.
Off: it will drop LEAVE if still clients on the same group.
separate <on/off> It means to set IGMP packets being separated by NAT/Bridge.
On: The packets will be separated.
Off: The packets will not be separated by NAT/Bridge.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip igmp_snoop enable
%% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.
> ip igmp_snoop disable
%% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Disabled.
> ip igmp_snoop separate ?
% ip igmp separate [on/off]
igmp snoop seprate is ON now.
igmp packets will be separated by NAT/Bridge.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
443
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
i
i
g
g
m
m
p
p
_
_
f
f
l
l
This command allows users to enable or disable IGMP Fast Leave function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip igmp_fl enable
ip igmp_fl disable
ip igmp_fl status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
enable It means to enable IGMP Fast Leave function
disable It means to disable IGMP Fast Leave function.
status It means to display current IGMP Fast Leave configuration.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip igmp_fl enable ?
If you want to use IGMP fast leave , you "MUST" enable IGMP snooping.
> ip igmp_snoop enable
% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.
> ip igmp_fl enable
%% ip igmp_fl [enable|disable|status], IGMP Fast Leave is Enabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
d
d
m
m
z
z
Specify MAC address of certain device as the DMZ host.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip dmz <mac>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<mac> It means the MAC address of the device that you want to
specify
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ip dmz ?
% ip dmz <mac>, now : 00-00-00-00-00-00
> ip dmz 11-22-33-44-55-66
> ip dmz ?
% ip dmz <mac>, now : 11-22-33-44-55-66
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
d
d
m
m
z
z
s
s
w
w
i
i
t
t
c
c
h
h
This command allows users to set DMZ mode.
ip dmzswitch off
ip dmzswitch private
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
444
ip dmzswitch active_trueip
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
off It means to turn off DMZ function.
private It means to set DMZ with private IP.
active_trueip It means to set the DMZ with active true IP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ip dmzswitch off
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
s
s
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
This command allows users to set maximum session limit number for the specified IP; set
message for exceeding session limit and set how many seconds the IP session block works.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip session on
ip session off
ip session default <num>
ip session defaultp2p <num>
ip session status
ip session show
ip session timer <num>
ip session <block/unblock><IP>
ip session <add/del><IP1-IP2><num><p2pnum>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to turn on session limit for each IP.
off It means to turn off session limit for each IP.
default <num> It means to set the default number of session num limit.
defautlp2p <num> It means to set the default number of session num limit for
p2p.
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all session limit settings in the IP range.
timer <num> It means to set when the IP session block works.
The unit is second.
<block/unblock><IP> It means to block/unblock the specified IP address.
Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router.
Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the
router.
<add/del><IP1-IP2><num
><p2pnum>
It means to add / delete the session limits in an IP range.
<IP1-IP2>: It means the range of IP address specified for this
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
445
command.
<num>: It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100.
<p2pnum>: It means the number of the session limits, e.g.,
50 for P2P.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip session default 100
> ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50
> ip session on
> ip session status
IP range:
192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.100 : 100
Current ip session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
b
b
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
This command allows users to set maximum bandwidth limit number for the specified IP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip bandwidth on
ip bandwidth off
ip bandwidth default <tx_rate><rx_rate>
ip bandwidth status
ip bandwidth show
ip bandwidth <add/del> <IP1-IP2><tx><rx><shared>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to turn on the IP bandwidth limit.
off It means to turn off the IP bandwidth limit.
default <tx_rate><rx_rate>
<tx_rate><rx_rate>: It means to set default tx and rx rate
of bandwidth limit. The range is from 0 – 65535 Kpbs.
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all the bandwidth limits settings within
the IP range.
<add/del>
<IP1-IP2><tx><rx><shared>
It means to add / delete the bandwidth within the IP range.
<IP1-IP2>: It means the range of IP address specified for
this command.
<tx>: It means to set transmission rate for bandwidth limit.
<rx>: It means to set receiving rate for bandwidth limit.
<shared>: It means that the bandwidth will be shared for
the IP range.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
446
> ip bandwidth default 200 800
> ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60
> ip bandwidth status
IP range:
192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K
Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off
Auto adjustment is off
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
b
b
i
i
n
n
d
d
m
m
a
a
c
c
This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip bindmac on
ip bindmac off
ip bindmac <strict_on/strict_off>
ip bindmac add <IP><MAC><Comment>
ip bindmac del <IP>/<all>
ip bindmac subnet <all/set LAN_Index/unset LAN_Index/clear/show>
ip bindmac show
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to turn on IP bandmac policy. Even the IP is not in
the policy table, it can still access into network.
off It means to turn off all the bindmac policy.
<strict_on / strict_off> It means that only those IP address in IP bindmac policy table
can / can not access into network.
add
<IP><MAC><Comment>
It means to add one ip bindmac.
<IP>: It means to enter the IP address for binding with
specified MAC address.
<MAC>: It means to Enter the MAC address for binding with
the IP address specified.
<Comment>: It means to type words as a brief description.
del <IP>/<all> It means to delete one ip bindmac.
<IP>: It means to enter the IP address for binding with
specified MAC address.
<all>: It means to delete all the IP bindmac settings.
subnet <all/set
LAN_Index/unset
LAN_Index/clear/show>
It means to set LAN subnet to bind strict mode.
<all>: It means to set all the LAN subnet to bind the strict
mode.
<set LAN_Index>: It means to specify the index number (1~4)
of LAN subnet to enable the subnet setting.
<unset LAN_Index>: It means to specify the index number
(1~4) of LAN subnet to disable the subnet setting.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
44
7
<clear>: Remove the subnet settings.
<show>: Display the subnet settings.
show It means to display the IP address and MAC address of the
pair of binded one.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test
> ip bindmac show
ip bind mac function is turned OFF
ip bind mac function is STRICT OFF
Show all IP Bind MAC entries.
IP : 192.168.1.46 bind MAC : 00-50-7f-22-33-55 HOST ID : (null)
Comment : just
> ip bindmac subnet set 2
Set LAN 1 is OK.
> ip bindmac subnet show
LAN 2
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
448
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
m
m
a
a
x
x
n
n
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
e
e
r
r
This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip maxnatuser <user no>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<user no> A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor
router supports.
0 – It means no limitation.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip maxnatuser 100
% Max NAT user = 100
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
s
s
p
p
o
o
o
o
f
f
d
d
e
e
f
f
This command is used to enable/disable the IP Spoofing Defense.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip spoofdef <WAN/LAN><0/1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<WAN/LAN> It means to block IP packet from WAN/LAN with inconsistent
source IP address.
<0/1> 0: Disable the function.
1: Enable the funciton.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip spoofdef WAN 1
Setting saved:
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
a
a
d
d
d
d
r
r
This command allows users to set the IPv6 address for your router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 addr -s <prefix> <prefix-length> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>
ip6 addr -d <prefix> <prefix-length> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>
ip6 addr -a <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32> -u
ip6 addr -v <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 addr -t <old-prefix><old-prefix-length><new-prefix> <new-prefix-length>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 addr -o <1/2>
ip6 addr -o 3 <prefix> <prefix-length> <WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
449
ip6 addr -l <prefix> <prefix-length> <LAN1/LAN2>
ip6 addr <-p/-b> <prefix> <prefix-length> <WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 addr -x <LAN1|LAN2>
ip6 addr -c <LAN1|LAN2>
ip6 addr -e <type> <LAN1|LAN2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-s <prefix> <prefix-length>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>
It means to add a static ipv6 address.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
<
LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>: It means
to specify LAN/WAN/USB/VPN interface for such address.
-d <prefix> <prefix-length>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>
It means to delete an ipv6 address.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
<
LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>: It means
to specify LAN/WAN/USB/VPN interface for such address.
-a
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32> -u
It means to show current address(es) status.
<
LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2/VPN1/..VPN32>: It means
to specify LAN/WAN/USB/VPN interface.
<-u>: It means to show unicast address only.
-v
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to show prefix list status.
-t
<old-prefix><old-prefix-leng
th><new-prefix>
<new-prefix-length>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to update WAN static IPv6 address table.
<old-prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<old prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the
length of the prefix.
<new-prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<new-prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the
length of the prefix.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2 >: It means to specify
LAN/WAN/USB interface for such address.
-o <1/2> <1>: It means to show old prefix list.
<2>: It means to send old prefix option by RA.
-o <3> <prefix>
<prefix-length>
<WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
<3>: It means to set old prefix.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
<WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2 >: It means to specify a WAN/USB
interface for such address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
450
-l <prefix> <prefix-length>
<LAN1/LAN2>
It means to add a ULA.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
<LAN1/LAN2 >: It means to specify a LAN interface for such
address.
-p/-b <prefix>
<prefix-length>
<WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
It means to add/delete an prefix to/from prefix list.
p: Add a prefix to a prefix list.
b: Delete a prefix from a prefix list.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
<WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2 >: It means to specify a WAN/USB
interface for such address.
-x <LAN1/LAN2> It means to generate a ULA automatically.
<LAN1/LAN2 >: It means to specify a LAN interface.
-c <LAN1/LAN2> It means to delete a ULA .
<LAN1/LAN2 >: It means to specify a LAN interface.
-e <type> <LAN1/LAN2> It means to set ULA type.
<type>: 0, disable; 1, static; 2, auto
<LAN1/LAN2 >: It means to specify a LAN interface.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 addr -a
LAN
Unicast Address:
FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link)
Multicast Address:
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF00:0
FF02::1
> ip6 addr -o 3 2001:: 64 WAN2
% set WAN2 2001::/64 ok
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
r
r
e
e
q
q
_
_
o
o
p
p
t
t
This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 dhcp req_opt <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2> [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
req_opt It means option-request.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to specify LAN or WAN or USB interface for such
address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
451
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-s It means to ask the SIP.
-S It means to ask the SIP name.
-d It means to ask the DNS setting.
-D It means to ask the DNS name.
-n It means to ask NTP.
-i It means to ask NIS.
-I It means to ask NIS name.
-p It means to ask NISP.
-P It means to ask NISP name.
-b It means to ask BCMCS.
-B It means to ask BCMCS name.
-r It means to ask refresh time.
Parameter 1: the parameter related to the request will be displayed.
0: the parameter related to the request will not be
displayed.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -S 1
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -r 1
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -a
% Interface WAN2 is set to request following DHCPv6 options:
% sip name
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
c
c
l
l
i
i
e
e
n
n
t
t
This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 dhcp client <WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2><-<command> <parameter>/ ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
client It means the dhcp client settings.
<<command>
<parameter>|…>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one
line.
-r It means to send a RELEASE message.
-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-p <IAID> It means to request identity association ID for Prefix
Delegation.
-n <IAID> It means to request identity association ID for
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
452
Non-temporary Address.
-t <time> It means to set solicit interval.
<time>: 0 ~ 7 seconds (default value is 0).
-c <parameter> It means to send rapid commit to server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-i <parameter> It means to send information request to server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-e <parameter> It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-m <parameter> It means to enable/disable server DUID set by Link layer
and time.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-d It means to display the client DUID.
-A <parameter> It means to set authentication protocol.
0: Undefine
2: delayed protocol
-R <parameter> It means to set realm value (max: 31 characters) in delayed
protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a string.
-S <parameter> It means to set shared secret (max: 31 characters) in
delayed protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a string.
-K <parameter> It means to set key ID (1~65535) in delayed protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a number.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –p 2008::1
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_PD whose IAID equals to 2008
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –n 1023456
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_NA whose IAID equals to 2008
> system reboot
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
s
s
e
e
r
r
v
v
e
e
r
r
This command allows you to configure DHCPv6 server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 dhcp server -<<command> <parameter>/ ...>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
453
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
server It means the dhcp server settings.
<<command>
<parameter>/…>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-b It means to show current DHCPv6 IP Assignment Table.
-n <name> It means to set a profile name.
<name>: Enter a string as profile name.
-c <parameter> It means to send rapid commit to server.
<parameter>: Enter 1 or 0.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-e <parameter> It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.
<parameter>: Enter 1 or 0.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-t <time> It means to set prefer lifetime.
<time>: Enter a value.
-y <time> It means to set valid lifetime.
<time>: Enter a value.
-u <time> It means to set T1 time.
<time>: Enter a value.
-o <time> It means to set T2 time.
<time>: Enter a value.
-i <pool_min_addr> It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool.
<pool_min_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
-x <pool_max_addr> It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool.
<pool_max_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
-R
It means to send reconfigure packet to a client.
-r <1/0> It means to enable (1) or disable (0) auto_range.
-N <1/0> It means to enable (1) or disable (0) random address
allocation.
-d <addr> It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address.
<addr> : Enter an IPv6 address.
-D <addr> It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address.
<addr> : Enter an IPv6 address.
-m <1/0> It means to enable(1) or disable (0) the server DUID set by
Link Layter and Time.
-q <name> It means to set DNS domain search list.
<name>: Enter a name.
-z<1/0> It means enable (1) or disable (0) the DHCP PD.
pdadd It means to add PD node.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
454
<suffix><prefix_len><clie
nt linklocal><client DUID>
pddel <PD index> It means to delete PD node.
<PD index>: Enter a number.
-A <parameter> It means to set authentication protocol.
<parameter>: Enter 0, 2 or 3.
0: Undefine
2: delayed protocol
3: Reconfigure key
- M <parameter> It means to set realm value (max: 31 characters) in delayed
protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a string.
-S <parameter> It means to set shared secret (max: 31 characters) in delayed
protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a string.
-K <parameter> It means to set key ID (1~65535) in delayed protocol.
<parameter>: Enter a number.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1
> ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1
> ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3
> ip6 dhcp server -a
% Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings:
% DHCPv6 server disabled
% maximum address of the pool: FF02::3
% minimum address of the pool: FF02::1
% 1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
i
i
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 internet <-<command> <parameter> | ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command>
<parameter>/…
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-W <n> W means to set WAN interface and n means different
selections. Default is WAN1.
n=1: WAN1
n=2: WAN2
n=3: WAN3
.
.
n=X: WANx
-M <n> M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n
means different modes (represented by 0 – 5)
n=0: Offline,
n=1: PPP,
n=2: TSPC,
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
455
n=3: AICCU,
n=4: DHCPv6,
n=5: Static
n=6: 6in4-Static
n=7: 6rd
-m n It means to set IPv6 MTU.
n = any value (0 means “unspecified”).
6rd
-C <n> It means to set 6rd connection mode.
n=0: Auto
n=1: Static
-s <server> It means to set 6rd IPv4 Border Relay.
<server>: Enter a string.
-m <n> It means to set 6rd IPv4 address mask length.
<n>: Enter a number.
-p <prefix> It means to set IPv6 prefix for 6rd connection.
<prefix>: Enter a prefix number of IPv6 address.
-l <n> It means to set the prefix length for 6rd connection.
<n>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length of the
prefix.
6in4
-s <server> It means to set 6in4 remote endpoint IPv4 address.
-I <IPv6 Addr> It means to set the IPv6 address for 6in4 connection.
-P <n> It means to set IPv6 WAN prefix length for 6in4 connection.
-p <prefix> It means to set 6in4 LAN Routed Prefix.
-l <n> It means to set 6in4 LAN Routed Prefix length.
-T <n> It means to set 6in4 Tunnel TTL.
TSPC/AICCU
-u <username> It means to set username (max. 63 characters).
<username>: Enter a string.
-P <password> It means to set Password (max. 63 characters).
<password>: Enter a password.
-s <server> It means to set Tunnel Server IP.
<server>: Enter an IPv4 Address or URL (max. 63 characters)
AICCU
-p <prefix> It means to set Subnet Prefix (AICCU).
<prefix>: Enter a prefix number of IPv6 address.
-l <n> It means to set Subnet Prefix length (AICCU).
<n>: Enter a number.
-o <1/0> It means to set AICCU always on.
1: on
0: off
-f It means to set AICCU tunnel ID.
Static
-w <addr> It means to set Default Gateway.
<addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
Others
-d <server> It means to set 1st DNS Server IP.
<server>: Enter an IPv6 address.
-D <server> It means to set 2nd DNS Server IP.
<server>: Enter an IPv6 address.
-t <dhcp/ra/none> It means to set ipv6 PPP WAN test mode for DHCP or RA.
<dhcp/ra/none> : Enter dhcp, ra or none.
-V It means to view IPv6 Internet Access Profile.
-k It means to dial the Tunnel on the WAN.
-j It means to drop the Tunnel on the WAN.
-r n It means to set Prefix State Machine RA timeout.
-c n It means to set Prefix State Machine DHCPv6 Client timeout.
-q <0/1/2> It means to set WAN detection mode.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
456
0:NS Detect
1:Ping Detect
2:Always On
-z <value> It means to set Ping Detect TTL (0-255).
<value>: Enter 0~255.
-x <hostname/ IPv6 addr> It means to set Ping Detect Host (hostname or IPv6 address).
<hostname/ipv6 addr> : Enter a hostname or an IPv6
address.
-i <value> It means to set ipv6 connection interval.
<value>: Enter a number (1500-60000 (unit:10ms)).
-b <0/1> It means to enable DNSv6 based on DHCPv6.
1 = on
0 = off
-R <0/1> It means to Enable RIPng.
1 = on
0 = off
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 internet -W 2 -M 2 -u 88886666 -p draytek123456 –s amsterdam.freenet6.net
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> system reboot
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
45
7
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
n
n
e
e
i
i
g
g
h
h
This command allows you to set a IPv6 neighbour table.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 neigh -s <inet6_addr> <eth_addr> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 neigh -d <inet6_addr> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 neigh -a <inet6_addr> <-N LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-s <inet6_addr> <eth_addr>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to add a neighbour.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<eth_addr>: Enter a submask address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for
the neighbor.
-d <inet6_addr>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to delete a neighbour.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for
the neighbor.
-a <inet6_addr> -N
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to show neighbour status.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for
the neighbor.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 neigh -s 2001:2222:3333::1111 00:50:7F:11:ac:22:WAN1
Neighbour 2001:2222:3333::1111 successfully added!
> ip6 neigh -a
I/F ADDR MAC STATE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN1 2001:2222:3333::1111 IN_TIMER
LAN4 :: NONE
LAN3 :: NONE
LAN1 :: NONE
LAN2 :: NONE
DMZ :: NONE
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
458
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
p
p
n
n
e
e
i
i
g
g
h
h
This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 pneigh -s <inet6_addr> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 pneigh -d <inet6_addr><LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
ip6 pneigh -a <inet6_addr> <-N LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-s <inet6_addr>
<eth_addr>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN
2/USB1/USB2>
It means to add a proxy neighbour.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<eth_addr>: Enter a submask address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for the
proxy neighbor.
-d <inet6_addr>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN
2/USB1/USB2>
It means to delete a proxy neighbour.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for the
proxy neighbor.
-a <inet6_addr> -N
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN
2/USB1/USB2>
It means to show proxy neighbour status.
<inet6_addr>: Enter an IPv6 address.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>: Specify an interface for the
proxy neighbor.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 neigh -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 LAN1
% Neighbour FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 successfully added!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
r
r
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
This command allows you to set route for IPv6 connection.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 route -s <prefix> <prefix-length> <gateway> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/
USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32> <-D>
ip6 route -d <prefix> <prefix-length>
ip6 route -a <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/ USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32>
ip6 route -l
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-s <prefix> <prefix-length>
<gateway>
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/
USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32>
<-D>
It means to add a route.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the
length of the prefix.
<gateway>: It means to enter the gateway of the router.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/ USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32>: It means
to specify LAN or WAN or VPN interface for such address.
<-D>: It means that such route will be treated as the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
459
default route.
-d <prefix> <prefix-length> It means to delete a route.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the
length of the prefix.
-a <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/
USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32>
It means to show the route status.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/ USB1/USB2/VPN1~VPN32>: It means
to specify LAN or WAN or VPN interface for such address.
-l It means to clear the routing table.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 route -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500 16 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 LAN1
% Route FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500/16 successfully added!
> ip6 route -a LAN1
PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN I/F METRIC FLAG NEXT-HOP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
::0.0.0.1/128 LAN1 0 U ::
FE80::/128 LAN1 0 U ::
FE80::21D:AAFF:FE00:0/128 LAN1 0 U ::
FE80::/64 LAN1 256 U ::
FE80::/16 LAN1 1024 UGS
FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100
FF00::/8 LAN1 256 U ::
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
p
p
i
i
n
n
g
g
This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a host.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 ping <IPv6 address/Host> <LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2> <send count>
<data_size>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IPV6 address/Host> It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN
2/USB1/USB2>
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
<send count> It means to set the request number of ping. Default number
is 5.
<data_size> It means to set the data size (1 to 1452).
<data_size>: Enter a value.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 ping 2001:4860:4860::8888 WAN1
Pinging 2001:4860:4860::8888 with 64 bytes of Data:
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
460
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms
Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <% loss>
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
t
t
r
r
a
a
c
c
e
e
r
r
t
t
This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 tracert <IPV6 address/Host><LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IPV6 address/Host> It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
<LAN1/LAN2/WAN1/WAN2/U
SB1/USB2>
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 tracert 2001:4860:4860::8888
traceroute to 2001:4860:4860::8888, 30 hops max through protocol ICMP
1 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 340 ms
2 2001:4DE0:1000:A22::1 330 ms
3 2001:4DE0:A::1 330 ms
4 2001:4DE0:1000:34::1 340 ms
5 2001:7F8:1: :A501:5169:1 330 ms
6 2001:4860::1:0:4B3 350 ms
7 2001:4860::8:0:2DAF 330 ms
8 2001:4860::2:0:66
E
340 ms
9 Request timed out. *
10 2001:4860:4860::8888 350 ms
Trace complete.
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
t
t
s
s
p
p
c
c
This command allows you to display TSPC status.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 tspc <ifno>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<Ifno> It means the connection interface.
Ifno=1 (means WAN1)
Ifno=2 (means WAN2)
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 tspc 1
Local Endpoint v4 Address : 111.243.177.223
Local Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b9
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
461
Router DNS name : 8886666.broker.freenet6.net
Remote Endpoint v4 Address :81.171.72.11
Remote Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b8
Tspc Prefixlen : 56
Tunnel Broker: Amsterdam.freenet.net
Status: Connected
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
r
r
a
a
d
d
v
v
d
d
This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Ip6 radvd <LAN1/LAN2> <-<command> <parameter>/ ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<<command>
<parameter>/…>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-s <0/1> It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the
RADVD server.
1: Enable the RADVD server.
0: Disable the RADVD server.
-D <0/1/2> It means to set RDNSS Disable/Enable/Deploy (0/1/2) when
WAN is up.
-d <lifetme> It means to set RA default lifetime.
-i <lifetme> It means to set RA min interval time(sec).
-I <lifetme> It means to set RA MAX interval time(sec).
-h <hoplimit> It means to set RA hop limit.
-m <mtu/auto> It means to set RA MTU, 1280-1500.
mtu: auto - auto select MTU from WAN,
-e <time> It means to set reachable time.
-a <time/infinity> It means to set retransmit timer /infinity.
-p <0/1/2> It means to set radvd default preference Low/Medium/High.
0-low
1-medium
2-high
-v It means to view radvd configuration.
-V It means to view setting in RA.
-L <time/infinity> It means to set prefix valid lifetime.
-P <time/infinity> It means to set prefix preferred lifetime.
-r <num> It means to to set RA test for item.
<num>: 0, 121, 124
0: default,
121: logo 121,
124: logo 124..
-R It means to reload Config and send RA for subnets.
-u It means to view MTU on all interfaces.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 radvd LAN1 -V
% [LAN1] setting !
% Default Lifetime : 0 seconds
% min interval time : 200 seconds
% MAX interval time : 600 seconds
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
462
% Hop limit : 64
% MTU : 0
% Reachable time : 0
% Retransmit time : 0
% Preference : Medium
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
This command allows you to manage the settings for access list.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 mngt list
ip6 mngt list add <Index> <prefix><prefix-length>
ip6 mngt list remove <Index>
ip6 mngt list flush
ip6 mngt status
ip6 mngt <internet/ http/telnet/ping/https/ssh/enforce_https> <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
list It means to show the setting information of the access list.
status It means to show the status of IPv6 management.
add <Index>
<prefix><prefix-length>
It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute
management through Internet.
<index>: It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be
configured for IPv6 management.
<prefix>: It means to enter the prefix number of IPv6
address.
<prefix-length>: It means to enter a fixed value as the length
of the prefix.
remove <Index> It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with
IPv6 settings.
<index>: It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be
configured for IPv6 management.
flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table.
status It means to dispaly current status of IPv6 access list.
<internet/
http/telnet/ping/https/s
sh/enforce_https>
These protocols are used for accessing Internet.
<on/off> It means to enable (on) or disable (off) the Internet accessing
through http/telnet/ping.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 mngt list add 1 2607:f0d0:1002:51::4 64
> ip6 mngt status
% IPv6 Remote Management :
internet access : off,
t
elnet : off, http : off, https : off, ssh :
off, ping : off, enforce_https : off
> ip6 mngt list
% IPv6 Access List :
Index IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length
========================================
1 2607:F0D0:1002:51::4 64
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
o
o
n
n
l
l
i
i
n
n
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
463
This command allows you to check the online status of IPv6 WAN/USB.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 online <WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<WAN1/WAN2/USB1/USB2>
It means the connection interface.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 online WAN1
% WAN1 online status :
% IPv6 WAN1 Disabled
% Default Gateway : ::
% Interface : DOWN
% UpTime : 0:00:00
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0
% MTU Onlink: 1280 , Config MTU : 0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
a
a
i
i
c
c
c
c
u
u
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of
AICCU.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 aiccu -i <ifno> -r
ip6 aiccu -i <ifno> -s
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<Ifno> It means the connection interface.
1=WAN1
2=WAN2
-r It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with
IPv6 settings.
-s It means to display the AICCU status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 aiccu -i 1 -s
Status: Idle
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
n
n
t
t
p
p
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for NTP (Network Time Protocols) server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 ntp –h
ip6 ntp –v
ip6 ntp –p <0/1>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
464
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
–h It is used to display the usage of such command.
-v It is used to show the NTP state.
-p <0/1> It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6.
0 – Auto
1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 ntp -p 1
% Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
l
l
a
a
n
n
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for LAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 lan -l n <-<l:w:d:D:m:o:s> <parameter> / ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
–h It is used to display the usage of such command.
-l <n> It means to selete LAN interface to be set.
n= 1: LAN1
n= 2: LAN2, ... x: LANx. Default is LAN1
-w <n> It means to selete WAN interface to be primary interface.
n= 0: None,
n=1: WAN1 ,
n=2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-d <server> It means to set 1st DNS Server IP.
<server>: Enter the IPv6 Address.
-D <server> It means to set 2nd DNS Server IP.
<server>: Enter the IPv6 Address.
-m <n> It means to set ipv6 LAN management.
n=0:OFF
n=1:SLAAC. Default is SLAAC
n=2:DHCPv6
-o <n> It means to enable Other option(O-bit) flag. (O-bit is
redundant when management is DHCPv6)
n=0: Disable
n=1: Enable.
-e <n> It means to add an extension WAN.
n: 1: WAN1, 2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-E <n> It means to delete an extension WAN.
n: 1: WAN1 ,2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-b <map> It means to set bit map(decimal) for extension WAN.
<map>: 0: WAN1; 1: WAN2, ... n: WAN(n+1).
-f <n> It means to disable IPv6.
n=1: Disable IPv6,
n=0: Enable IPv6.
-R <n> It means to enable /disable RIPng.
n=1: Enable RIPng,
n=0: Disable RIPng.
-s <n> It means to show IPv6 LAN setting.
n=0:show all. Default is show all.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
465
n=1: LAN1
n=2: LAN2,
n=3: DMZ.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 lan -l 1 -w 1 -d 2001:4860:4860::8888 -o 1 -f 0 -s 2
% Set primary WAN1!
% Set 1st DNS server 2001:4860:4860::8888
% Set Other Option Enable!
% [LAN1] support ipv6!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
% [LAN2] setting:
% Primary WAN : WAN1
% Management : SLAAC
% Other Option : Disable
% WAN Exten : None
% Subnet ID : 2
% Static IP(0) : ::/0
% [ifno: 0, enable: 0]
% Static IP(1) : ::/0
% [ifno: 0, enable: 0]
% Static IP(2) : ::/0
% [ifno: 0, enable: 0]
% Static IP(3) : ::/0
% [ifno: 0, enable: 0]
% DNS1 : 2001:4860:4860::8888
% DNS2 : 2001:4860:4860::8844
% ULA Type : OFF
% RIPng : Enable
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
s
s
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
This command allows you to set sessions limit for IPv6 address.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 session on
ip6 session off
ip6 session default <num>
ip6 session status
ip6 session show
ip6 session add <P1-IP2><num>
ip6 session del <P1>/<all>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to turn on session limit for each IP.
off It means to turn off session limit for each IP.
default <num> It means to set the default number of session num limit.
<num>: Enter a number.
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all IP range session limit settings.
add <P1-IP2><num> <add/del>: It means to add the session limit for an IPv6
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
466
range.
<IP1-IP2> : Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
<num>: Enter a number.
del<IP1> /all <del>: It means to delete the session limit for an IPv6 range.
<IP1> : Specify the first IPv6 address within the IPv6 range.
all: Delete all the session limits.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 session on
> ip6 session add 2100:ABCD::2-2100:ABCD::10 100
> ip6 session status
IPv6 range:
2100:ABCD::2 - 2100:ABCD::10 : 100
Current ip6 session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
6
6
b
b
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
i
i
d
d
t
t
h
h
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ip6 bandwidth on
ip6 bandwidth off
ip6 bandwidth default <tx_rate> <rx_rate>
ip6 bandwidth status
ip6 bandwidth show
ip6 bandwidth add <IP1-IP2> <tx><rx><shared>
ip6 bandwidth del <IP1> /all
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to turn on bandwidth limit for each IP.
off It means to turn off bandwidth limit for each IP.
default <tx_rate>
<rx_rate>
It means to set the default transmission (tx), receiving (rx)
rate of bandwidth limit (0-30000 Kbps/Mbps).
<tx_rate>: Enter a number.
<rx_rate>: Enter a number.
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all IP range bandwidth limit settings.
add <IP1-IP2>
<tx><rx><shared>
<add>: It means to add the bandwidth limit for an IPv6
range.
<del>: It means to delete the bandwidth limit for an IPv6
range by first IP (IP1) or 'del all'.
<IP1-IP2> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
<tx><rx>: It means the bandwidth limit for transmission and
receivign rate.
<shared>: I
t means the bandwidth will be shared for the IPv6
range.
del <IP1> /all It means to delete the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range by
first IP (IP1) or 'del all'.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
46
7
<IP1> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
all: Delete all the bandwidth limits.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip6 bandwidth on
> ip6 bandwidth add 2001:ABCD::2-2001:ABCD::10 512 5M shared
> ip6 bandwidth status
IPv6 range:
2001:ABCD::2 - 2001:ABCD::10 : Tx:512K Rx:5M shared
Current ip6 Bandwidth limit is turn on
Current default ip6 Bandwidth rate is Tx:2000K Rx:8000K bps
> ip6 bandwidth del 2001:ABCD::2
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
f
f
v
v
i
i
e
e
w
w
IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP
filter rules.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ipf view <-command/...>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-V It means to show the version of this IP filter.
-c It means to show the running call filter rules.
-d It means to show the running data filter rules.
-h It means to show the hit-number of the filter rules.
-r It means to show the running call and data filter rules.
-t It means to display all the information at one time.
-z It means to clear a filter rule’s statistics.
-Z It means to clear IP filter’s gross statistics.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ipf view -V -c -d
ipf: IP Filter: v3.3.1 (1824)
Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1
Running: yes
Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip
Default: pass all, Logging: available
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
i
i
p
p
f
f
f
f
l
l
o
o
w
w
t
t
r
r
a
a
c
c
k
k
This command is used to set and view flowtrack sessions.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
ipf flowtrack set -r
ipf flowtrack set -e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
468
ipf flowtrack view -f
ipf flowtrack view -b
ipf flowtrack view -i <IP address> -p<value> -t<value> -f
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-r It means to refresh the flowtrack.
-e It means to enable or disable the flowtrack.
-f It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do
not specify any IP address, then all the session state of
flowtrack will be displayed.
-b It means to show all of IP sessions state.
view -i <IP address>
-p<port> -t <protocol> -f
It means to show sessions state of flowtrack by specifying IP
address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55).
<IP address>: Enter an IP address.
<port>: Enter a number (0 ~ 65535).
<protocol>: Enter tcp, udp or icmp.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>ipf flowtrack set -r
Refresh the flowstate ok
> ipf flowtrack view -f
Start to show the flowtrack sessions state:
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:59939 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93023180(3920), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:15073 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:15073 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93025100(2000), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11: 7247 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11: 7247 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93020100(7000), flag=203
End to show the flowtrack sessions state
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Current flow_enable=0
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Curretn flow_enable=1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
L
L
o
o
g
g
This command allows users to view log for WAN interface such as call log, IP filter log, flush
log buffer, etc.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
log -<c/f/h/i/p/t/w/x> -F <a/c/f/w>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
469
-c It means to show the latest call log.
-f It means to show the IP filter log.
-h It means to show this usage help.
-p It means to show PPP/MP log.
-t It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer.
-w It means to show WAN log.
-x It means to show packet body hex dump.
-F <a/c/f/w> It means to show the flush log buffer.
a: flush all logs
c: flush the call log
f: flush the IP filter log
w: flush the WAN log
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> log -w
0:00:05 DSL: DSL Channel = 0
0:00:05 DSL: VPI/VCI = 0/33
0:00:05 DSL: Mode = 1[PPPoE]
0:00:05 DSL: Encapsulation type = 1[LLC]
0:00:05 DSL: Modulation type = 4[MULTI]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
f
f
t
t
p
p
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set FTP port for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt ftpport <FTP port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<FTP port> <FTP port>: Enter the number of FTP port. The default
setting is 21.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt ftpport 21
% Set FTP server port to 21 done.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
h
h
t
t
t
t
p
p
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set HTTP port for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt httpport <http port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<http port> <http port>: Enter the number of HTTP port. The default
setting is 80.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
470
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt httpport 80
% Set web server port to 80 done.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
h
h
t
t
t
t
p
p
s
s
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt httpsport <https port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<https port> <https port>: Enter the number for HTTPS port. The default
setting is 443.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt httpsport 443
% Set web server port to 443 done.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
t
t
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set telnet port for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt telnetport <telnet port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<telnet port> <telnet port>: Enter the number for telnet port. The
default setting is 23.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt telnetport 23
% Set Telnet server port to 23 done.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
s
s
s
s
h
h
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set SSH port for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt sshport <ssh port>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<ssh port> <ssh port>: Enter the number for SSH port. The default
setting is 22.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
471
> mngt sshport 23
% Set ssh port to 23 done.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
n
n
o
o
p
p
i
i
n
n
g
g
This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt noping on
mngt noping off
mngt noping viewlog
mngt noping clearlog
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet.
off All PING packets will be blocked from LAN PC to Internet.
viewlog It means to display a log of ping action, including source MAC
and source IP.
clearlog It means to clear the log of ping action.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt noping off
No Ping Packet Out is OFF!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
d
d
e
e
f
f
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
w
w
o
o
r
r
m
m
This command can block specified port for passing through the router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt defenseworm on
mngt defenseworm off
mngt defenseworm add <port>
mngt defenseworm del <port>
mngt defenseworm viewlog
mngt defenseworm clearlog
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet
out.
off It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet
out.
add <port> It means to add a new TCP port for block.
<port>: Enter a port number.
del <port> It means to delete a TCP port for block.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
472
<port>: Enter a port number.
viewlog It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including
source MAC and source IP.
clearlog It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt defenseworm add 21
Add TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445, 21
> mngt defenseworm del 21
Delete TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
r
r
m
m
t
t
c
c
f
f
g
g
This command can allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. By default, it is
not allowed.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt rmtcfg status
mngt rmtcfg enable
mngt rmtcfg disable
mngt rmtcfg <http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069/enforce_https> <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
status It means to display current setting for your reference.
enable It means to allow the system administrators to login from the
Internet.
disable It means to deny the system administrators to login from the
Internet.
<http/https/ftp/telnet/s
sh/tr069/enforce_https>
<on/off>
It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling
or disabling.
<on> – enable the function.
<off> – disable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt rmtcfg ftp on
Enable server fail
Remote configure function has been disabled
please enable by enter mngt rmtcfg enable
> mngt rmtcfg enable
%% Remote configure function has been enabled.
> mngt rmtcfg ftp on
%% FTP server has been enabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
l
l
a
a
n
n
a
a
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
473
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt lanaccess -e <0/1> –s <value>–i <value>
mngt lanaccess –f
mngt lanaccess –d
mngt lanaccess –v
mngt lanaccess –h
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-e <0/1> –s <value> –i
<value>
-e: It means to enable/disable the function.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1. 0,disable the function; 1, enable the
function.
–s <value>: It means to specify service offered. Enter FTP,
HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, SSH, None, or All.
–i <value>: It means the interface which is allowed to access.
Enter LAN2~LAN4, IP Routed Subnet, None, or All
Note: LAN1 is always allowed for accessing into the router.
-f It means to flush all of the settings.
-d It means to restore the factory default settings.
-v It means to view current settings.
-h It means to get the usage of such command.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt lanaccess -e 1
> mngt lanaccess -s FTP,TELNET
> mngt lanaccess -i LAN3
> mngt lanaccess -v
Current LAN Access Control Setting:
* Enable:Yes
* Service:
- FTP:Yes
- HTTP:No
- HTTPS:No
- TELNET:Yes
- SSH:No
- TR069:No
- Enforce HTTPS:No
* Subnet:
- LAN 1: enabled
- Specific IP(IP object:0) is disabled
- LAN 2: enabled
- Specific IP(IP object:0) is disabled
- IP Routed Subnet: enabled
- Specific IP(IP object:0) is disabled
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
e
e
c
c
h
h
o
o
i
i
c
c
m
m
p
p
This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
474
mngt echoicmp enable
mngt echoicmp disable
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
enable It means to accept the echo ICMP packet.
disable It means to drop the echo ICMP packet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt echoicmp enable
%% Echo ICMP packet enabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
a
a
c
c
c
c
e
e
s
s
s
s
l
l
i
i
s
s
t
t
This command allows you to specify that the system administrator can login from a specific
host or network. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt accesslist list
mngt accesslist add <index><IP addr><mask>
mngt accesslist remove <index>
mngt accesslist flush
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
list It can display current setting for your reference.
add <index><IP
addr><mask>
It means adding a new entry.
<index>: Enter an index number of the entry.
<IP addr>: Enter an IP address.
<mask>: Enter the mask address.
remove <index> It means to delete the selected item.
<index>: Enter an index number of the entry.
flush It means to remove all the settings in the access list.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
DrayTek> mngt accesslist add 2 192.168.2.76 255.255.255.0
%% Set OK.
> mngt accesslist list
DrayTek> mngt accesslist list
%% Access list :
Index IP address Subnet mask
==========================================
2 192.168.2.76 255.255.255.0
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
475
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
n
n
g
g
t
t
s
s
n
n
m
m
p
p
This command allows you to configure SNMP for management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
mngt snmp -<command> <parameter> / ...
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command>
<parameter>/…
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-e <1/2> 1: Enable the SNMP function.
2: Disable the SNMP function.
-g <Community name> It means to set the name for getting community by typing a
proper character. (max. 23 characters)
<Community name>: Enter a string.
-s <Community name> It means to set community by typing a proper name. (max.
23 characters)
<Community name>: Enter a string.
-m <IP address> It means to set one host as the manager to execute SNMP
function. Please Enter IPv4 address to specify certain host.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address, or IP address with subnet,
or manager host IP. Three IP addresses can be entered and
separated by ','.
-t <Community name> It means to set trap community by typing a proper name.
(max. 23 characters)
<Community name>: Enter a string.
-n <IP address> It means to set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive
the trap community.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address, or IP address with subnet,
or manager host IP. Two IP addresses can be entered and
separated by ','.
-T <seconds> It means to set the trap timeout.
<seconds>: Enter a value (0~999)
-V It means to list SNMP setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m
192.168.1.20,192.168.5.192/26,10.20.3.40/24 -t trapcom -n
192.168.1.20,10.20.3.40 -T 88
SNMP Agent Turn on!!!
Get Community set to draytek
Set Community set to DK
Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.20,192.168.5.192/26,10.20.3.40/24
Trap Community set to trapcom
Notification Host IP set to 192.168.1.20,10.20.3.40
Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
s
s
w
w
i
i
t
t
c
c
h
h
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
476
This command is used to configure multi-subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet switch <2> <On/Off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
<On/Off> On means turning on the subnet for the specified LAN
interface.
Off means turning off the subnet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet switch 2 On
% LAN2 Subnet On!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
a
a
d
d
d
d
r
r
This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet addr <2><IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
<IP address> Enter the private IP address for the specified LAN interface.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1
% Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
n
n
m
m
a
a
s
s
k
k
This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet nmask <2><IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
47
7
<2> It means LAN interface.
<IP address> Enter the subnet mask address for the specified LAN
interface.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet nmask 2 255.255.0.0
% Set LAN2 subnet mask done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command is used to display current status of subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet status <2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet status 2
% LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60
% DHCP server: Off
% Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
s
s
This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet dhcps <2> <On/Off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
<On/Off> On means enabling the DHCP server for the specified LAN
interface.
Off means disabling the DHCP server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet dhcps 3 off
% LAN3 Subnet DHCP Server disabled!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
n
n
a
a
t
t
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
478
This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet nat <2> <On/Off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
<On/Off> On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage.
Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing
usage.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> > msubnet nat 2 off
% LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage!
%Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup a
Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded to the
right WAN interface!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
g
g
a
a
t
t
e
e
w
w
a
a
y
y
This command is used to configure an IP address as the gateway used for subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet gateway <2><Gateway IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
<Gateway IP> Specify an IP address as the gateway IP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet gateway 2 192.168.1.13
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Gateway IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
i
i
p
p
c
c
n
n
t
t
This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet ipcnt <2><IP counts>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
479
<2> It means LAN interface.
<IP counts> Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN
interface.
The available range is from 0 to 220.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet ipcnt 2 15
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
t
t
a
a
l
l
k
k
This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet talk <1/2> <1/2> <On/Off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<1/2><1/2> It means LAN interface.
1: LAN1
2: LAN2
<On/Off> On: It means to establish a route.
Off: It means Not to establish a route.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet talk 1 2 on
> msubnet talk 1 2 on
% Enable routing between LAN1 and LAN2!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> msubnet talk
% msubnet talk <1/2> <1/2> <On/Off>
% where 1:LAN1, 2:LAN2
% Now:
% LAN1 LAN2
% LAN1 V
% LAN2 V V
DrayTek>
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
s
s
t
t
a
a
r
r
t
t
i
i
p
p
This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet startip <2><Gateway IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
480
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2: LAN2
<Gateway IP> Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90
%Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> msubnet startip ?
% msubnet startip <2/3/4> <Gateway IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.90; LAN3 192.168.3.10; LAN4 192.168.4.10; LAN5
192.168.5.1
0; LAN6 192.168.6.10
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
p
p
p
p
p
p
i
i
p
p
This command is used to configure a starting IP address for PPP connection.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet pppip <2><Start IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2: LAN2
<Start IP> Type an IP address as the starting IP address for PPP
connection.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250
% Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router
> msubnet pppip
% msubnet pppip <2> <Start IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
n
n
o
o
d
d
e
e
t
t
y
y
p
p
e
e
This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet nodetype <2><count>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
481
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
<count> Choose the following number for specifying different node
type.
1: B-node
2: P-node
4: M-node
8: H-node
0: Not specify any type for node.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet nodetype 2 1
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Node Type done !!!
> msubnet nodetype
% msubnet nodetype <2> <count>
% Now: LAN2 1
% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
p
p
r
r
i
i
m
m
W
W
I
I
N
N
S
S
This command is used to configure primary WINS server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet primWINS <2><WINS IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2:LAN2
<WINS IP> Enter the IP address as the WINS IP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet primWINS ?
% msubnet primWINS <2> <WINS IP>
% Now: LAN2 0.0.0.0
> msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet primWINS
% msubnet primWINS <2> <WINS IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
s
s
e
e
c
c
W
W
I
I
N
N
S
S
This command is used to configure secondary WINS server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
482
msubnet secWINS <2><WINS IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2:LAN2
<WINS IP> Enter the IP address as the WINS IP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet secWINS 2 192.168.3.89
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Secondary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet secWINS
% msubnet secWINS <2> <WINS IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.89
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
t
t
f
f
t
t
p
p
This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet tftp <2><TFTP server name>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<2> It means LAN interface.
2:LAN2
<TFTP server name> Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet tftp ?
% msubnet tftp <2> <TFTP server name>
% Now: LAN2
> msubnet tftp 2 publish
% Set LAN2 TFTP Server Name done !!!
> msubnet tftp
% msubnet tftp <2> <TFTP server name>
% Now: LAN2 publish
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
m
m
t
t
u
u
This command allows you to configure MTU value for LAN/DMZ/IP Routed Subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet mtu <interface> <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
483
Parameter Description
<interface> Available settings include
LAN1~LAN2,
IP_Routed_Subnet.
<value> <value>: Enter a number (1000 ~ 1500(Bytes)).
Default value is 1500.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet mtu LAN1 1492
Set LAN1 subnet mtu as 1492
> msubnet mtu
Usage:
>msubnet mtu <interface> <value>
<interface>: LAN1~LAN2,IP
_
Routed
_
Subnet, <value>: 1000 ~ 1500 (Bytes),
de
fault: 1500 (Bytes)
e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492
Current Settings:
LAN1 MTU: 1492 (Bytes)
LAN2 MTU: 1500 (Bytes)
IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes)
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
m
m
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
l
l
e
e
a
a
s
s
e
e
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
This command allows you to configure lease time for LAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
msubnet leasetime <1/2> <Lease Time <sec.>>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<1/2> Available settings include
1: LAN1
2: LAN2
<Lease Time <sec.>> <lease time>: Enter a number (10 ~ 2592000).
Default value is 86400.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> msubnet leasetime 1 3000000
% Invalid lease time input (Valid: 10 to 2592000 ) !!!
% Now: 86400
> msubnet leasetime 1 92000
% Set LAN1 lease time: 92000
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
484
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
p
p
o
o
b
b
j
j
This command is used to create an IP object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object ip obj setdefault
object ip obj INDEX -v
object ip obj INDEX -n NAME
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE <START_IP><END/MASK_IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
Example: object ip obj 1 -v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
NAME: Enter a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce
INDEX -i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
INTERFACE: Enter 0, 1, 3
0, means any
1, means LAN
3, means WAN
Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0
INDEX -s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
INVERT: Enter 0, 1
0, means disableing the function.
1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1
INDEX -a TYPE <START_IP>
<END/MASK_IP>
It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
TYPE: Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
0, means Mask
1, means Single
2, means Any
3, means Rang
4, means Mac
Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2
<START_IP>: When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type
an IP address as a starting point and another IP address as
end point.
<END/MASK_IP>: Enter an IP address (different with
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
485
START_IP) as the end IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object ip obj 1 -n marketing
OK.
> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45
OK.
> object ip obj 1 -v
IP Object Profile 1
Name :[marketing]
Interface:[Any]
Address type:[single]
Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]
End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]
MAC Address:[00:00:00:00:00:00]
Invert Selection:[0]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
p
p
g
g
r
r
p
p
This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object ip grp setdefault
object ip grp INDEX -v
object ip grp INDEX -n NAME
object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified group
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
Example: object ip grp 1 -v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce
INDEX -i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
INTERFACE: Enter 0, 1 or 3
0, means any
1, means LAN
3, means WAN
Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0
INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
IP_OBJ_INDEX: Enter the index number of object profiles.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
486
Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will
be group under such profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object ip grp 2 -n First
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Any]
Included ip object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
[8:][0]
[9:][0]
[10:][0]
[11:][0]
> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Lan]
Included ip object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
[8:][0]
[9:][0]
[10:][0]
[11:][0]
Set ok!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
48
7
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
p
p
v
v
6
6
o
o
b
b
j
j
This comman is used to create an IPv6 object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object ipv6 obj setdefault
object ipv6 obj INDEX -v
object ipv6 obj INDEX -n NAME
object ipv6 obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ipv6 obj INDEX -e MATCH_TYPE
object ipv6 obj INDEX -a TYPE <START_IP> <END_IP>/<Prefix Length>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified object
profile.
Example: object ipv6 obj 1 -v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the IPv6 object.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ipv6 obj 9 -n bruce
INDEX -s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INVERT: Enter 0 or 1.
0, means disableing the function.
1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ipv6 obj 3 -s 1
INDEX -e MATCH_TYPE It means to set the match type of ipv6 object profile.
MATCH_TYPE: Enter 0 or 1.
0:128 Bits,
1:Suffix 64 Bits Interface ID
INDEX -a TYPE <START_IP>
<END_IP>/<Prefix
Length>
It means to set the address type for the IPv6 object profile.
TYPE: Enter 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
0, means Mask
1, means Single
2, means Any
3, means Rang
4, means Mac
Example: object ipv6 obj 3 -a 2
<START_IP>: When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an
IPv6 address as a starting point and another IP address as end
point.
Enter an IPv6 address as the starting point.
<END_IP>/ <Prefix Length>: Enter an IPv6 address (different
with START_IP) as the end IPv6 address or the prefix length of
the IPv6 address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object ipv6 obj 9 -n bruce
Setting saved.
> object ipv6 obj 3 -s 1
Setting saved.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
488
> object ipv6 obj 3 -e 1
You can not set 64 bits Interface ID for Subnet type.
Setting saved.
> object ipv6 obj 3 -a 3 2607:f0d0:1002:51::4 2607:f0d0:1002:51::4
Setting saved.
> object ipv6 obj 3 -v
IPv6 Object Profile 3
Name :[]
Address Type:[range]
Start IPv6 Address:[2607:F0D0:1002:51::4]
End IPv6 Address:[2607:F0D0:1002:51::4]
Prefix Length:[0]
MAC Address:[00:00:00:00:00:00]
Invert Selection:[0]
Match Type:[0]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
p
p
v
v
6
6
g
g
r
r
p
p
This command is used to integrate several IPv6 objects under an IPv6 group profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object ipv6 grp setdefault
object ipv6 grp INDEX -v
object ipv6 grp INDEX -n NAME
object ipv6 grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified group
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
Example: object ipv6 grp 1 -v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the IPv6 group.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ipv6 grp 8 -n bruce
INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IPv6 object profiles for the group profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
IP_OBJ_INDEX: Enter the index number of object profiles.
Example: :object ipv6 grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IPv6 object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will
be group under such profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object ipv6 grp 8 -n bruce
IPv6 Group Profile 8
Name :[bruce]
Included ip object index:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
489
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
> object ipv6 grp 8 -a 1 2 3 4 5
IPv6 Group Profile 8
Name :[bruce]
Included ip object index:
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][3]
[3:][4]
[4:][5]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
s
s
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
o
o
b
b
j
j
This command is used to create service object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object service obj setdefault
object service obj INDEX -v
object service obj INDEX -n NAME
object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL
object service obj INDEX -s CHK <START_P><END_P>
object service obj INDEX -d CHK <START_P><END_P>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified service
object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service
object profile.
Example: object service obj 1 -v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service
object profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object service obj 9 -n bruce
INDEX -p PROTOCOL It means to define a PROTOCOL for the service object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service
object profile.
PROTOCOL: Enter 0, 1, 2, 6, 17, 58, 255, others
0, means any
1, means ICMP
2, means IGMP
6, means TCP
17, means UDP
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
490
58, means ICMPv6
255, means TCP/UDP
Other values mean other protocols.
Example: object service obj 8 -p 1
INDEX -s CHK
<START_P><END_P>
It means to set source port check and configure port range
(1~65565) for TCP/UDP.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service
object profile.
CHK: Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3
0, means equal(=), when the starting port and ending port
values are the same, it indicates one port; when the
starting port and ending port values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
1, means not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending
port values are the same, it indicates all the ports except
the port defined here; when the starting port and ending
port values are different, it indicates that all the ports
except the range defined here are available for this
service type.
2, means larger(>), the port number greater than this
value is available.
3, means less(<), the port number less than this value is
available for this profile.
<START_P>: Enter a number as starting port number.
<END_P>: Enter a port number as the eding port number.
Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200
INDEX -d CHK
<START_P><END_P>
It means to set destination port check and configure port
range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service
object profile.
CHK: Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3
0, means equal(=), when the starting port and ending port
values are the same, it indicates one port; when the
starting port and ending port values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
1, means not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending
port values are the same, it indicates all the ports except
the port defined here; when the starting port and ending
port values are different, it indicates that all the ports
except the range defined here are available for this
service type.
2, means larger(>), the port number greater than this
value is available.
3, means less(<), the port number less than this value is
available for this profile.
<START_P>: Enter a number as starting port number.
<END_P>: Enter a port number as the eding port number.
Example: object service obj 3 -d 1 100 200
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object service obj 1 -n limit
> object service obj 1 -p 255
> object service obj 1 -s 1 120 240
> object service obj 1 -d 1 200 220
> object service obj 1 -v
Service Object Profile 1
Name :[limit]
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
491
Protocol:[TCP/UDP]
Source port check action:[!=]
Source port range:[120~240]
Destination port check action:[!=]
Destination port range:[200~220]
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
s
s
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
g
g
r
r
p
p
This command is used to integrate several service objects under a service group profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object service grp setdefault
object service grp INDEX –v
object service grp INDEX –n NAME
object service grp INDEX –a SER_OBJ_INDEX
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified service
group profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified group
profile.
Example: object service grp 1 –v
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the service group.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service group
profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object service grp 8 –n bruce
INDEX -a SER_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify service object profiles for the group
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified service group
profile.
SER_OBJ_INDEX: Enter the index number of the service
object profile.
Example: :object service grp 3 –a 1 2 3 4 5
The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5
will be group under such profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object service grp 1 -n group_1
Service Group Profile 1
Name :[group_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
>object service grp 1 –a 1 2
Service Group Profile 1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
492
Name :[Grope_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
k
k
w
w
This command is used to create keyword profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object kw obj setdefault
object kw obj show
object kw obj show PAGE
object kw obj INDEX –v
object kw obj INDEX –n NAME
object kw obj INDEX –a CONTENTS
object kw obj INDEX -c
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
show PAGE It means to show the contents of the specified profile.
PAGE: Enter the page number.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified keyword
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified keyword
profile.
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the keyword profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified keyword
profile.
NAME: Enter a name with less than 15 characters as the
keyword profile.
INDEX -a CONTENTS It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified keyword
profile.
CONTENTS: Enter a string as the content of the keyword
profile.
Example: object kw obj 40 –a test
INDEX -c It means to clear the contents of keyword object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number of the specified keyword
profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object kw obj 1 -n children
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[]
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
493
> object kw obj 1 -a gambling
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
> object kw obj 1 -v
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
f
f
e
e
This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object fe show
object fe setdefault
object fe obj INDEX -v
object fe obj INDEX -n NAME
object fe obj INDEX -e CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
object fe obj INDEX -d CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified file
extension object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
file extension object profile.
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the file extension object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
file extension object profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
INDEX -e
CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSI
ON
It means to enable the specific CATEGORY or
FILE_EXTENSION.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
file extension object profile.
CATEGORY:
Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression,
Executation
Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image
FILE_EXTENSION:
".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",
".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",
".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",
".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".flv", ".swf", ".aac", ".aiff"
".au", ".mp3", ".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox",
".wav", ".wma", ".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm",
".js", ".jse", ".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx",
".olb", ".ole", ".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2",
".bz2", ".cab", ".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas",
".bat", ".com", ".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr", ".torrent"
Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp
INDEX -d It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
494
CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSI
ON
FILE_EXTENSION.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
file extension object profile.
CATEGORY:
Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression,
Executation
Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image
FILE_EXTENSION:
".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",
".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",
".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",
".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".flv", ".swf", ".aac", ".aiff"
".au", ".mp3", ".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox",
".wav", ".wma", ".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm",
".js", ".jse", ".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx",
".olb", ".ole", ".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2",
".bz2", ".cab", ".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas",
".bat", ".com", ".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr", ".torrent"
Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object fe obj 1 -n music
> object fe obj 1 -e Audio
> object fe obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[music]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Image category:
[ ].bmp [ ].dib [ ].gif [ ].jpeg [ ].jpg [ ].jpg2 [ ].jp2 [ ].pct
[ ].pcx [ ].pic [ ].pict [ ].png [ ].tif [ ].tiff
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Video category:
[ ].asf [ ].avi [ ].mov [ ].mpe [ ].mpeg [ ].mpg [v].mp4 [ ].qt
[ ].rm [v].wmv [ ].3gp [ ].3gpp [ ].3gpp2 [ ].3g2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Audio category:
[v].aac [v].aiff [v].au [v].mp3 [v].m4a [v].m4p [v].ogg [v].ra
[v].ram [v].vox [v].wav [v].wma
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Java category:
[ ].class [ ].jad [ ].jar [ ].jav [ ].java [ ].jcm [ ].js [ ].jse
[ ].jsp [ ].jtk
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ActiveX category:
[ ].alx [ ].apb [ ].axs [ ].ocx [ ].olb [ ].ole [ ].tlb [ ].viv
[ ].vrm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Compression category:
[ ].ace [ ].arj [ ].bzip2 [ ].bz2 [ ].cab [ ].gz [ ].gzip [ ].rar
[ ].sit [ ].zip
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Executation category:
[ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
495
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
s
s
m
m
s
s
This command is used to create short message object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object sms show
object sms setdefault
object sms obj INDEX -v
object sms obj INDEX -n NAME
object sms obj INDEX -s Service Provider
object sms obj INDEX -u Username
object sms obj INDEX -p Password
object sms obj INDEX -q Quota
object sms obj INDEX -i Interval
object sms obj INDEX -l URL
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified SMS object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
INDEX -n NAME It means to define a name for the SMS object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
NAME: Enter a name with less than 15 characters as SMS
object profile name.
INDEX -s Service Provider It means to specify the number of the service provider which
offers the service of SMS. Different numbers represent
different service provider.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
Service Provider: Enter 0, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13 or
14
0 : kotsms.com.tw (TW)
2 : textmarketer.co.uk (UK)
4 : messagemedia.co.uk (UK)
5 : bulksms.com (INT)
6 : bulksms.co.uk (UK)
7 : bulksms.2way.co.za (ZA)
8 : bulksms.com.es (ES)
9 : usa.bulksms.com (US)
10 : bulksms.de (DE)
11 : www.pswin.com (EU)
12 : www.messagebird.com (EU)
13 : www.lusosms.com (EU)
14 : www.vibeactivemedia.com (UK)
INDEX -u Username It means to define a user name for the SMS object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
Username: Enter a user name that the sender can use to
register to selected SMS provider.
INDEX -p Password It means to define a password for the SMS object profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
496
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
Password: Enter a password that the sender can use to
register to selected SMS provider.
INDEX -q Quota Enter the number of the credit that you purchase from the
service provider.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
Quota: Enter a number. Note that one credit equals to one
SMS text message on the standard route.
INDEX -I Interval It means to set the sending interval for the SMS to be
delivered.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
Interval: Enter the shortest time interval for the system to
send SMS.
INDEX -l URL It means to set the URL of SMS object profile 9 and 10.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified SMS object profile.
URL: Enter the URL of SMS object.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object sms obj 1 –n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -s 0
> object sms obj 1 -u carrie
> object sms obj 1 -p 19971125cm
> object sms obj 1 -q 2
> object sms obj 1 -i 50
> object sms obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[CTC]
SMS Provider:[kotsms.com.tw (TW)]
Username:[carrie]
Password:[******]
Quota:[2]
Sending Interval:[50(seconds)]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
m
m
a
a
i
i
l
l
This command is used to create mail object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object mail show
object mail setdefault
object mail obj INDEX -v
object mail obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX -s SMTP Server
object mail obj INDEX -l Use SSL
object mail obj INDEX -m SMTP Port
object mail obj INDEX -a Sender Address
object mail obj INDEX -t Authentication
object mail obj INDEX -u Username
object mail obj INDEX -p Password
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
49
7
object mail obj INDEX -i Sending Interval
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified mail object
profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
INDEX -n Profile Name It means to define a name for the mail object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Profile Name: Enter a name with less than 15 characters.
INDEX -s SMTP Server It means to set the IP address of the mail server.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
SMTP Server: Enter the name or the IP address of the SMTP
server.
INDEX -l Use SSL It means to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail
server uses https as the transmission method.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Use SSL: Enter 0 or 1.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
INDEX -m SMTP Port It means to set the port number for SMTP server.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
SMTP Port: Enter a port number.
INDEX -a Sender Address It means to set the e-mail address of the sender.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Sender Address: Enter the e-mail address (e.g.,
johnwash@abc.com.tw).
INDEX -t Authentication The mail server must be authenticated with the correct
username and password to have the right of sending message
out.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Authentication: Enter 0 or 1.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
INDEX -u Username Type a name for authentication. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 31 characters.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Username: Enter a string as a username.
INDEX -p Password Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of
the password you can set is 31 characters.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Password: Enter a password.
INDEX -i Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out. The
unit is second.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 10) of the
specified mail object profile.
Sending Interval: Enter a value (seconds).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
498
> object mail obj 1 -n buyer
> object mail obj 1 -s 192.168.1.98
> object mail obj 1 -m 25
> object mail obj 1 -t 1
> object mail obj 1 -u john
> object mail obj 1 -p happy123456
> object mail obj 1 -i 25
> object mail obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[buyer]
SMTP Server:[192.168.1.98]
SMTP Port:[25]
Sender Address:[]
Use SSL:[disable]
Authentication:[enable]
Username:[john]
Password:[******]
Sending Interval:[25(seconds)]
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
n
n
o
o
t
t
i
i
This command is used to create notification object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object noti show
object noti setdefault
object noti obj INDEX -v
object noti obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX –e Category Status
object mail obj INDEX –d Category Status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX -v It means to view the information of the specified notification
object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
INDEX -n Profile Name It means to define a name for the notification object profile.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
Profile Name: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
INDEX–e Category Status It means to enable the status of specified category.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
Category: Enter 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
1: WAN; 2: VPN Tunnel; 3: Temperature Alert;
4: WAN Budget; 5: CVM
Status: Enter 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
For WAN –
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For VPN Tunnel -
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For Temperature Alert
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
499
1: Out of Range.
For WAN Budget
1: Limit Reached.
For CVM
1: CPE Offline; 2: Backup Fail; 3: Restore Fail;
4: FW Update Fail; 5: VPN Profile Setup Fail.
INDEX -d Category Status It means to disable the status of specified category.
INDEX: Enter the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
Category: Enter 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
1: WAN; 2: VPN Tunnel; 3: Temperature Alert;
Status: Enter 1, 2
For WAN –
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For VPN Tunnel -
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For Temperature Alert
1: Out of Range.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object noti obj 1 –n marketing
> object noti obj 1 -e 1 1
> object noti obj 1 -e 2 1
> object noti obj 1 -e 5 3
> object noti obj 1 -v
DrayTek> object noti obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[marketing]
Category Status
WAN [v]Disconnected [ ]Reconnected
VPN Tunnel [v]Disconnected [ ]Reconnected
Temperature Alert [v]Out of Range
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
o
o
b
b
j
j
e
e
c
c
t
t
s
s
c
c
h
h
e
e
d
d
u
u
l
l
e
e
This command is used to create schedule object profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
object schedule set <INDEX> <option list>
object schedule view <INDEX>
object schedule setdefault
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
set It means to set the schedule profile.
<INDEX> It means the index number (from 1 to 15) of the specified
object profile.
<Option list> Available options for schedule includes:
-e , -c, -D, -T, -d, -a, -i, -h
<INDEX> -e <value> It means to enable the schedule setup.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0, disable
1, enable
<INDEX> -c <comment> It means to set brief description for the specified profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
500
specified schedule object.
<comment>: Enter a brief description (1 ~ 32 characters).
<INDEX> -D <year>
<month> <day>
It means to set the starting date of the profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<year> – Must be between 2000-2049.
<month>- Must be between 1-12.
<day> - Must be between 1-31.
For example: To set Start Date 2015/10/6, type
> object schedule set 1 -D "2015 10 6"
<INDEX> -T <hour>
<minute>
It means to set the starting time of the profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<hour>: Must be between 0-23.
<minute>: Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Start Time 10:20, type
> object schedule set 1 -T "10 20"
<INDEX> -d <hour>
<minute>
It means to set the duration time of the profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<hour>: Must be between 0-23.
<minute>: Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Duration Time 3:30, type
> object schedule set 1 -d "3 30"
<INDEX> -a <value> It means to set the action used for the profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<value>: Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3
0:Force On, 1:Force Down, 2:Enable Dial-On-Demand,
3:Disable Dial-On-Demand
<INDEX> -I <value> It means to set idle time.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<value>: Must be between 0-255(minute). The default is 0.
<INDEX> -h <option>
<day/date/cycle_days>
Set how often the schedule will be applied.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
<option>: Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3
0: Once, 1: Weekdays, 2:Monthly, 3:Cycle days
<day>: Enter Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
If the <option> set Weekdays, then must select which days of
Week.
example: To select Sunday, Monday, Thursday, type
<date>: Enter 1-28.
<cycle_days> : Enter 1-30.
If the <option> set cycle days, then must select which days to
do cycle schedule
example: To select cycle 10 days:
> object schedule set 1 -h 3 10"
view <INDEX> It means to show the content of the profile.
<INDEX>: Enter the index number (from 1 to 15) of the
specified schedule object.
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> object schedule set 1 -e 1
> object schedule set 1 -c Working
> object schedule set 1 -D "2017 4 18"
> object schedule set 1 -T "8 1"
> object schedule set 1 -d "2 30"
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
501
> object schedule set 1 -a 0
> object schedule set 1 -h "1 Mon Wed"
> object schedule view 1
Index No.1
--------------------------------------------------
[v] Enable Schedule Setup
Comment [ Working ]
Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2017 ]-[ 4 ]-[ 18 ]
Start Time (hh:mm) [ 8 ]:[ 1 ]
Duration Time (hh:mm) [ 2 ]:[ 30 ]
Action [ Force On ]
Idle Timeout [ 0 ] minute(s).(max. 255, 0 for default)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
How Often
[v] Weekdays
[ ]Sun [v]Mon [ ]Tue [v]Wed [ ]Thu [ ]Fri [ ]Sat
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
port <1, 2, all> <AN, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status>
port <wan2> <AN, 1000F, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status>
port status
port wanfc
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<1, 2, all> <AN, 100F,
100H, 10F, 10H, status>
<1, 2, all> : Enter 1, 2 or all to specify the number of LAN
port.
<AN, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status>: It means the physical
type for the specific port.
AN: auto-negotiate.
100F: 100M Full Duplex.
100H: 100M Half Duplex.
10F: 10M Full Duplex.
10H: 10M Half Duplex.
<wan2> <AN, 1000F, 100F,
100H, 10F, 10H, status>
It means the WAN2 interface.
<AN, 1000F, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status>: It means the
physical type for the specific port.
AN: auto-negotiate.
1000F: 1000M Full Duplex.
100F: 100M Full Duplex.
100H: 100M Half Duplex.
10F: 10M Full Duplex.
10H: 10M Half Duplex.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
502
status It means to view the Ethernet port status.
wanfc It means to set WAN flow control.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> port 1 100F
%Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
m
m
a
a
p
p
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified
protocol.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
portmaptime -<command> <parameter> / ...
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command>
<parameter>|…
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one
line.
-t <sec> It means “TCP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.
-u <sec> It means “UDP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the UDP session timeout.
-i <sec> It means “IGMP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout.
-w <sec> It means “TCP WWW” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP WWW session timeout.
-s <sec> It means “TCP SYN” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP SYN session timeout.
-f It means to flush all portmaps (useful for diagnostics).
-l <List> List all settings.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> portmaptime -t 86400 -u 300 -i 10
> portmaptime -l
------ Current setting ------
TCP Timeout : 86400 sec.
UDP Timeout : 300 sec.
IGMP Timeout : 10 sec.
TCP WWW Timeout: 60 sec.
TCP SYN Timeout: 60 sec.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
q
q
o
o
s
s
s
s
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This command allows user to set general settings for QoS.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
qos setup -<command> <parameter> / ...
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command> The available commands with parameters are listed below.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
503
<parameter>/… <…> means that you can Enter several commands in one
line.
-h Enter it to display the usage of this command.
-W <1~3> It means to specify WAN interface.
<1~3>: Enter 1, 2, 3. Default is 1 (WAN1).
-m <mode> It means to define which traffic the QoS control settings
will apply to and eable QoS control.
<mode>: Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3. Default is 2.
0: disable.
1: in, apply to incoming traffic only.
2: out, apply to outgoing traffic only.
3: both, apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.
-i <bandwidth> It means to set inbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN
only)
<bandwidth>: Enter the value (1 to 100000).
-o <bandwidth> It means to set outbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN
only).
<bandwidth>: Enter the value (1 to 100000).
-r <index:ratio> It means to set ratio for class index, in %.
<index:ratio>: Enter a value with ratio (e.g., -r 3:20).
-u <mode> It means to enable bandwidth control for UDP.
<mode>: Enter 0 or 1. Default is disable.
0: disable
1: enable
-p <ratio> It means to enable bandwidth limit ratio for UDP.
<ratio>: Enter the value.
-t <mode> It means to enable/disable Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize.
<mode>: Enter 0 or 1. Default is disable.
0: disable
1: enable
-V Show all the settings.
-D Set all to factory default (for all WANs).
[…] It means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> qos setup -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1
WAN1 QOS mode is both
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20
WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable
WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50
WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable
QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
q
q
o
o
s
s
c
c
l
l
a
a
s
s
s
s
This command allows user to set QoS class.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
qos class -c <no> -<a/e/d <no>><-<command> <parameter> / ... >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
504
<command>
<parameter>/…
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-h Type it to display the usage of this command.
-c <no> Specify the inde number for the class.
<no>: Enter 1, 2 or 3. The default setting is class 1.
-n <name> It means to type a name for the class.
<name>: Enter a name.
-a <no> It means to add rule for specified class.
<no>: Enter the index number for the rule.
-e <no> It means to edit specified rule.
<no>: Enter the index number for the rule.
-d <no> It means to delete specified rule.
<no>: Enter the index number for the rule.
-m <mode> It means to enable or disable the specified rule.
<mode>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: disable,
1: enable
-l <addr> Set the local address.
<addr>: Enter <Addr1>, <addr1:addr2>, <addr1:subnet> or
any.
<Addr1> – It means Single address. Please specify the IP
address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
<addr1:addr2> – It means Range address. Please specify the
IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
<addr1:subnet> – It means the subnet address with start IP
address. Please Enter the subnet and the IP address, for
example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0
<any> – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any
address for this command.
-r <addr> Set the remote address.
<addr>: Enter <Addr1>, <addr1:addr2>, <addr1:subnet> or
any.
<Addr1> – It means Single address. Please specify the IP
address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
<addr1:addr2> – It means Range address. Please specify the
IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
<addr1:subnet> – It means the subnet address with start IP
address. Please Enter the subnet and the IP address, for
example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0
<any> – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any
address for this command.
-p <DSCP id> Specify the ID.
<DSCP id>: Enter the ID.
-s <Service type> Specify the service type by typing the number.
<Service type>: Enter 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or
30.
1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.323
6:HTTP 7:HTTPS 8:IKE 9:IPSEC-AH 10:IPSEC-ESP
11:IRC 12:L2TP 13:NEWS 14:NFS 15:NNTP
16:PING 17:POP3 18:PPTP 19:REAL-AUDIO 20:RTSP
21:SFTP 22:SIP 23:SMTP 24:SNMP 25:SNMP-TRAPS
26:SQL-NET 27:SSH 28:SYSLOG 29:TELNET 30:TFTP
-S <d/s> Show the content for specified DSCP ID/Service type.
<d/s>: Enter d or s.
-V <1/2/3> Show the rule in the specified class.
<1/2/3>: Enter 1, 2 or 3.
[…] It means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
505
> qos class -c 2 -n draytek -a -m 1 -l 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
Following setting will set in the class2
class 2 name set to draytek
Add a rule in class2
Class2 the 1 rule enabled
Set local address type to Range, 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
q
q
o
o
s
s
t
t
y
y
p
p
e
e
This command allows user to configure protocol type and port number for QoS.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
qos type -a <service name> / -e <no> / -d <no> /-n <name> /-t <type>/-p <port>/-l
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-a <service name> It means to add rule.
<name>: Enter a name for a rule.
-e <no> It means to edit user defined service type.
<no>: Enter 1 ~ 40 (index number of the service type).
-d <no> It means to delete user defined service type.
<no>: Enter 1 ~ 40 (index number of the service type).
-n <name> It means the name of the service.
<name>: Enter a name of the service.
-t <type> <type>: It means protocol type. Enter 6, 17, 0 or other
number.
6: tcp(default)
17: udp
0: tcp/udp
<1~254>: other
-p <port> It means service port.
<port>: Enter the port number. The typing format must be
[start:end] (ex., 510:330).
-l List user defined types. “no” means the index number.
Available numbers are 1~40.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330
service name set to draytek
service type set to 6:TCP
Port type set to Range
Service Port set to 510 ~ 1330
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
q
q
o
o
s
s
s
s
e
e
t
t
d
d
e
e
f
f
a
a
u
u
l
l
t
t
This command allows user to recover the default settings for QoS.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
qos setdefault
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
506
> qos setdefault
Setdefault!
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
q
q
u
u
i
i
t
t
This command can exit the telnet command screen.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
l
l
a
a
n
n
This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show lan
The LAN settings:
Status IP Mask DHCP Start IP Pool Gateway
-------- --------------- --------------- ---- --------------- ----
[V]LAN1 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.1.10 200 192.168.1.1
[X]LAN2 192.168.5.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.2.10 100 192.168.2.1
[X]Route 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 V 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
d
d
m
m
z
z
This command displays current status of DMZ host.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show dmz
% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0
% WAN2 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN2 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0
% WAN3 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN3 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
507
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
d
d
n
n
s
s
This command displays current status of DNS setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show dns
%% Domain name server settings:
% LAN1 Primary DNS: [Not set]
% LAN1 Secondary DNS: [Not set]
% LAN2 Primary DNS: [Not set]
% LAN2 Secondary DNS: [Not set]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
o
o
p
p
e
e
n
n
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command displays current status of open port setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show openport
Index Status Comment Local IP Address
********************************************************
1. Enable TEST 192.168.1.110
Total 1 items listed.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
508
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
n
n
a
a
t
t
This command displays current status of NAT.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show nat
Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port
1 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
9 0
0 0.0.0.0 0
10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
--- MOR
E --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
m
m
a
a
p
p
This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show portmap
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Private_IP:Port Pseudo_IP:Port Peer_IP:Port [Index/Protocol/Flag]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Portmap Session:0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
p
p
m
m
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
This command displays the reuse time of NAT session.
Level0: It is the default setting.
Level1: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than 25% of the default setting.
Level2: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than the eighth of the default
setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show pmtime
Level0 TCP=86400001 UDP=300001 ICMP=10001
Level1 TCP=600000 UDP=90000 ICMP=7000
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
509
Level2 TCP=60000 UDP=30000 ICMP=5000
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
s
s
e
e
s
s
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
This command displays current status of current session.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show session
% Maximum Session Number: 30000
% Maximum Session Usage: 0
% Current Session Usage: 0
% Current Session Used(include waiting for free): 0
% WAN1 Current Session Usage: 0
% WAN2 Current Session Usage: 0
% WAN3 Current Session Usage: 0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show status
System Uptime:25:40:53
LAN Status
Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4
IP Address:192.168.1.1 Tx Rate:21417 Rx Rate:15413
WAN 1 Status: Disconnected
Enable:Yes Line:Fiber Name:
Mode:PPPoE Up Time:0:00:00 IP:--- GW IP:---
TX Packets:0 TX Rate(bps):0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate(bps):0
WAN 2 Status: Disconnected
Enable:Yes Line:Ethernet Name:
Mode:DHCP Client Up Time:0:00:00 IP:--- GW IP:---
TX Packets:0 TX Rate(bps):0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate(bps):0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
a
a
d
d
s
s
l
l
This command displays current status of ADSL.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show status
---------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A/B/C) -----------
Running Mode : State : TRAINING
DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps
DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps
DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast
DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0
NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB
DS actual PSD : 0.0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB
NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0
NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0
Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
510
ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000
VDSL Firmware Version : 05-07-06-0D-01-07 [with Vectoring support]
Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA
Test Mode : DISABLE
---------------- ATU-C Info ---------------
Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB
CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000
DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < ----- >
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
511
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
t
t
r
r
a
a
f
f
f
f
i
i
c
c
This comman can display traffic graph for WAN1, transmitted bytes, receivied bytes and
sessions.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
show traffic <wan1/wan2/wan3> <tx/rx> <weekly>
show traffic session <weekly>
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> show traffic session weekly0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,2 ,1 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,1 ,3 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,2 ,15 ,5 ,4 ,1 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 0 ,0 ,0 ,0
> show traffic wan1 tx weekly0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
i
i
s
s
t
t
i
i
c
c
This command displays statistics for WAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
show statistic
show statistic reset [interface]
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
reset It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero.
interface It means to specify WAN1 interface for displaying related
statistics.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> DrayTek> show statistic
WAN1 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN2 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN3 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN4 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN5 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN6 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
WAN7 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
512
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
2
2
This command is used to enable DCHP2 server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp dhcp2 -<command> <parameter> / ...
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command>
<parameter>/…
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-l <enable> It menas to enable the LAN port to public DHCP.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: Disenable
1: Enable
-m<enable> It menas to enable MAC address to public DHCP.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: Disenable
1: Enable
-e <id> It menas to turn on the flag of LAN port 1/2.
<id>: Enter 1 or 2.
-d <id> It menas to turn off the flag of LAN port 1/2.
<id>: Enter 1 or 2.
-v It menas to view current status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp dhcp2 -l 1 -e 1
> srv dhcp dhcp2 -v
2nd DHCP server flag status --
Server works on specified MAC address: ON
Server works on specified LAN port: ON
Port 1 flag: ON
Port 2 flag: ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
p
p
u
u
b
b
l
l
i
i
c
c
This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp public start <IP address>
srv dhcp public cnt <IP counts>
srv dhcp public status
srv dhcp public add <MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX>
srv dhcp public del <MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX >
srv dhcp public del all/ALL
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
start <IP address> It means the starting point of the IP address pool for the
DHCP server.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address as the starting point in the
IP address pool.
cnt <IP counts> It means the IP count number.
<IP counts>: Specify the number of IP addresses in the pool.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
513
The maximum is 10.
status It means the execution result of this command.
add <MAC Addr
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX>
It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned.
<MAC Addr>: Enter the MAC Address of the host.
del <MAC Addr
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX>
It means removing the selected MAC address.
<MAC Addr>: Enter the MAC Address of the host.
del all/ALL It means removing all of the MAC addresses.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> ip route add 192.168.1.56 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.12 3 default
> srv dhcp public status
Index MAC Address
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
d
d
n
n
s
s
1
1
This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp dns1 <LAN1/LAN2> <DNS IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<LAN1/LAN2> It means to specify the LAN interface.
<LAN1/LAN2>: Enter LAN1 or LAN2.
<DNS IP address> It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1.
<DNS IP address>: Enter the IP address that you want to use
as DNS1 (primary DNS).
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT
Subnet DNS).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp dns1 lan1 168.95.1.1
% srv dhcp dns1 lan1 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 168.95.1.1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
514
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
d
d
n
n
s
s
2
2
This command allows users to set Secondary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp dns2 <LAN1/LAN2> <DNS IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<LAN1/LAN2> It means to specify the LAN interface.
<DNS IP address> It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS2.
<DNS IP address>: Enter the IP address that you want to use
as DNS1 (seconday DNS).
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT
Subnet DNS).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp dns2 lan1 168.95.1.1
% srv dhcp dns2 lan1 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 168.95.1.1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
f
f
r
r
c
c
d
d
n
n
s
s
m
m
a
a
n
n
l
l
This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp frcdnsmanl <on /off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on It means to use manual setting for DNS setting.
Off It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl on
% Domain name server now is using manual settings!
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl off
% Domain name server now is using auto settings!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
515
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
g
g
a
a
t
t
e
e
w
w
a
a
y
y
This command allows users to specify gateway address for DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp gateway <Gateway IP>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<Gateway IP> It means to specify a gateway address used for DHCP server.
<gateway IP>: Enter an IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp gateway 192.168.2.1
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
i
i
p
p
c
c
n
n
t
t
This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP counts> It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP
server.
<IP counts>: Enter a value (0~256).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp ipcnt ?
% srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts>
% Now: 150
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
o
o
f
f
f
f
This function allows users to turn off DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
o
o
n
n
This function allows users to turn on DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
r
r
e
e
l
l
a
a
y
y
This command allows users to set DHCP relay setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp relay servip <server ip>
srv dhcp relay subnet <index>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
516
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<server ip> It means the IP address that you want to used as DHCP server.
<server ip>: Enter an IP address.
<Index> The router will invoke this function according to the subnet 1
or 2 specified here.
<index>: Enter 1 or 2.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp relay servip 192.168.1.46
> srv dhcp relay subnet 2
> srv dhcp relay servip ?
% srv dhcp relay servip <server ip>
% Now: 192.168.1.46
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
s
s
t
t
a
a
r
r
t
t
i
i
p
p
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp startip <IP address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP address> It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP
server as the starting point.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command can display general information for the DHCP server, such as IP address, MAC
address, leased time, host ID and so on.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp status
LAN1 : DHCP Server On IP Pool: 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.209
Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index IP Address MAC Address Leased Time HOST ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
517
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
l
l
e
e
a
a
s
s
e
e
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec)>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<Lease Time (sec)> It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is
second.
<Lease Time (sec)>: Enter a value.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp leasetime ?
% srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec.)>
% Now: 92000
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
n
n
o
o
d
d
e
e
t
t
y
y
p
p
e
e
This command can set the node type for the DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp nodetype <count>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<count> It means to specify a type for node.
<count>: Enter 1, 2, 4 or 8.
1. B-node
2. P-node
4. M-node
8. H-node
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp nodetype 1
> srv dhcp nodetype ?
%% srv dhcp nodetype <count>
%% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
% Now: 1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
518
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
p
p
r
r
i
i
m
m
W
W
I
I
N
N
S
S
This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address>
srv dhcp primWINS clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<WINS IP address> It means the IP address of primary WINS server.
<WINS IP address>: Enter an IP address.
clear It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS
server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88
> srv dhcp primWINS ?
%% srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp primWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.88
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
s
s
e
e
c
c
W
W
I
I
N
N
S
S
This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address>
srv dhcp secWINS clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<WINS IP address> It means the IP address of secondary WINS server.
<WINS IP address>: Enter an IP address.
clear It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS
server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180
> srv dhcp secWINS ?
%% srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp secWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.180
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
519
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
e
e
x
x
p
p
R
R
e
e
c
c
y
y
c
c
l
l
e
e
I
I
P
P
This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP
server or not.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp expRecycleIP <sec time>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<sec time> It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP
can be assigned again or not.
<sec time>: Enter a value.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250
% DHCP expRecycleIP = 250
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
t
t
f
f
t
t
p
p
This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<TFTP server name>
It means to Enter the name of TFTP server.
<TFTP server name>: Enter a name.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp tftp TF123
> srv dhcp tftp ?
%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
% Now: TF123
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
d
d
h
h
c
c
p
p
t
t
f
f
t
t
p
p
d
d
e
e
l
l
This command can remove the name defined for the TFTP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv dhcp tftpdel
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv dhcp tftp TF123
> srv dhcp tftp ?
%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
% Now: TF123
> srv dhcp tftpdel
% The TFTP Server Name had been deleted !!!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
520
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
d
d
m
m
z
z
This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP
Alias first.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv nat dmz n m -e <1/0> -i <IP address>
srv nat dmz -r
srv nat dmz -v
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.
1: wan1
m It means the index number of the DMZ host.
m: Enter 1 ~ 8.
Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP
mode. If you use other mode, you can set in this field. If WAN
IP alias has been configured, then the number of DMZ host
can be added more.
-e <1/0> It means to enable/disable such feature.
<1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
1:enable
0:disable
-i <IP address> It means to specify the private IP address of the DMZ host.
<IP address>: Enter an IP address.
-r It means to remove DMZ host setting.
-v It means to display current status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat dmz 1 1 -i 192.168.1.96 -e 1
> srv nat dmz -v
% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Enable 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96
% WAN2 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN2 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0
% WAN3 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN3 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
521
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
i
i
p
p
s
s
e
e
c
c
p
p
a
a
s
s
s
s
This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source
port (500) preservation.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv nat ipsecpass on
srv nat ipsecpass off
srv nat ipsecpass status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
[options] The available commands with parameters are listed below.
on It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE
source port (500) preservation.
off It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE
source port (500) preservation.
status It means to display current status for checking.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat ipsecpass status
%% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is OFF.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
o
o
p
p
e
e
n
n
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv nat openport n m -<command> <parameter> / …
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
n It means the index number for the profiles.
N: Enter 1 ~20.
m It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile.
m: Enter 1 ~10.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-a <enable> It means to enable or disable the open port rule profile.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
0: disable
1: enable
-c <comment> It means to Enter the description (less than 23 characters)
for the defined network service.
<comment>: Enter a description.
-i <local ip> It means to set the IP address for local computer.
<local ip>: Enter an IP address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
522
-w <widx> <ipidx> It means to specify the public IP.
<widx> – Enter 1, 2, 255 (means the WAN interface)
1: WAN1 (Default)
2: WAN1 Alias 1
255: all WANs.
<ipidx> – Enter 1 ~ 32 for Alias IPs.
-p <protocol> Specify the transport layer protocol.
<protocol>: Enter TCP, UDP, or ALL.
-s <start port> It means to specify the starting port number of the service
offered by the local host.
<start port>: Enter a value (0 to 65535).
-e <end port> It means to specify the ending port number of the service
offered by the local host.
<end port>: Enter a value (0 to 65535).
-v It means to display current settings.
-r It means to delete the specified open port setting.
-f It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports
profiles.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat openport 1 1 -a 1 -c games -i 192.168.1.56 -w 1 1 -p TCP -s 23 -
e
83
> Set WAN Port ok!!
> srv nat openport 1 1 -v
%% Status: Enable
%% Comment: games
%% WAN Interface: WAN1
%% Private IP address: 192.168.1.56
Index Protocal Start Port End Port
*****************************************************************
1. TCP 23 83
> srv nat openport 1 1 -r
> srv nat openport 1 1 -f
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
m
m
a
a
p
p
This command allows users to set port redirection table for NAT server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
srv nat portmap add <idx> <serv name> <proto> <pub port> <src ip idx> <pri ip> <pri port>
<wan1 ~ wan4> <alias IP>
srv nat portmap del <idx>
srv nat portmap disable <idx>
srv nat portmap enable <idx> <proto>
srv nat portmap flush
srv nat portmap table
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
523
Parameter Description
add <idx> <serv name>
<proto> <pub port> <src
ip idx> <pri ip> <pri port>
<wan1 ~ wan4> <alias IP>
It means to add a new port redirection table with an index
number. <idx>: Enter an index number (1 to 20).
< serv name>: Enter a name as service name.
<proto>: Specify TCP or UDP or All as the protocol.
<pub port>: Enter a value (0~65535).
<src ip idx>: Enter an index number of source IP object
profile.
<pri ip>: Specify the private IP address of the internal host
providing the service.
<pri port>: Enter a value (0~65535).
<wan1 ~ wan4>: Specify WAN interface for the port
redirection.
<alias IP>: Enter the index number (1~32) of alias IP.
del <idx> It means to remove the selected port redirection setting.
<idx>: Enter an index number (1 to 20).
disable <idx> It means to inactivate the selected port redirection setting.
<idx>: Enter an index number (1 to 20).
enable <idx> <proto> It means to activate the selected port redirection setting.
<idx>: Enter an index number (1 to 20).
<proto>: Specify TCP or UDP or All as the protocol.
flush It means to clear all the port mapping settings.
table It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat portmap add 1 name tcp 100 0 192.168.1.10 200 wan1 1
> srv nat portmap table
NAT Port Redirection Configuration Table:
Index Service Name Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port ifno
1 name TCP 100 192.168.1.10 200 -1
2 Disabled 0 0 -2
3 Disabled 0 0 -2
4 Disabled 0 0 -2
5 Disabled 0 0 -2
6 Disabled 0 0 -2
...
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat status
NAT Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port
1 6 100 192.168.1.11 200
2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
524
4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
r
r
v
v
n
n
a
a
t
t
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
a
a
l
l
l
l
This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and
DMZ settings.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> srv nat showall
Index Proto WAN IP:Port Private IP:Port Act
*************************************************************************
****
R01 TCP 0.0.0.0:100 192.168.1.10:200 Y
D01 All 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96 Y
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
a
a
d
d
m
m
i
i
n
n
This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
b
b
o
o
a
a
r
r
d
d
This command is used to disable/enable the function of default or wireless LAN button.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys board button <def/wlan><on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<def/wlan><on/off> It means to set default usage of the button.
<def>: Enter def (for factory default setting).
<wlan>: Enter wlan (for wireless button).
<on/off>: Enter on or off. It is used to disable/enable the
function of the button.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
525
On – enable the button function.
Off – disable the button function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys board button def on
> default button is on now.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
c
c
f
f
g
g
This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command,
all the configuration will be reset to default setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys cfg default
sys cfg status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
default It means to reset current settings with default values.
status It means to display current profile version and status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys cfg status
Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x4845af2c)
> sys cfg default
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
c
c
m
m
d
d
l
l
o
o
g
g
This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys cmdlog
[1] ?
[2] sys ?
[3] sys adminuser ?
[4] sys board ?
[5] sys board button ?
[6] sys board button def on
[7] sys cfg ?
[8] sys cfg status
[9] sys /
[10] sys cmdlog ?
[11] sys cmdlog
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
f
f
t
t
p
p
d
d
This command displays current status of FTP server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys ftpd <on/off>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
526
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on>: Turn on the FTP server of the system.
<off>: Turn off the FTP server of the system.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys ftpd on
% sys ftpd turn on !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
d
d
o
o
m
m
a
a
i
i
n
n
n
n
a
a
m
m
e
e
This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is
selected for WAN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix>
sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<wan1/wan2> <Domain
Name Suffix>
<wan1/wan2>: Specify WAN interface for assigning a name for
it.
<Domain Name Suffix>: Enter a name. It means the name for
the domain of the system. The maximum number of characters
that you can set is 39.
<wan1/wan2> clear <wan1/wan2>: Specify WAN interface for assigning a name for
it.
<clear>: Remove the domain name of the system.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys domainname wan1 clever
> sys domainname wan2 intellegent
> sys domainname ?
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix (max. 39 characters)>
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear
% Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intellegent
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
i
i
f
f
a
a
c
c
e
e
This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address,
MAC address and Netmask for the router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys iface
Interface 0 Ethernet:
Status: UP
IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 0xFFFFFF00 (Private)
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0xFFFFFFFF
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
527
Interface 4 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-02
Interface 5 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-03
Interface 6 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-04
Interface 7 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05
Interface 8 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
n
n
a
a
m
m
e
e
This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for
WAN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string>
sys name <wan1/wan2> clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<wan1/wan2> <ASCII
string>
It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.
<wan1/wan2>: Specify WAN interface for assigning a name
for it.
<ASCII string>: Enter a string. The maximum number of
characters that you can set is 39.
<wan1/wan2> clear It means the name for router.
<wan1/wan2>: Specify WAN interface for assigning a name
for it.
<clear>: Remove the name of the system.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys name wan1 drayrouter
> sys name ?
% sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string (max. 39 characters)>
% sys name <wan1/wan2> clear
% Now: wan1 == drayrouter, wan2 ==
>
Note: Such name can be used to recognize router’s identification in SysLog dialog.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
528
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
p
p
a
a
s
s
s
s
w
w
d
d
This command allows users to set password for the administrator.
sys passwd <old password> <new password: ASCII string>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<old password> <new
password: ASCII string>
<old password>: Enter the old password for administrator.
<new passoword: ASCII string>: Enter the the password for
administrator. The maximum number of characters that you
can set is 23.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys passwd admin admin123
> Password change successful !!!
> sys passwd admin123 admin
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
r
r
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
t
t
This command allows users to restart the router immediately.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys reboot
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
a
a
u
u
t
t
o
o
r
r
e
e
b
b
o
o
o
o
t
t
This command allows users to restart the router automatically within a certain time.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys autoreboot [on/off/hour(s)]
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
on/off On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot.
Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot.
hours It means to set the time schedule for router reboot.
For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot
with an interval of two hours.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys autoreboot on
autoreboot is ON
> sys autoreboot 2
autoreboot is ON
autoreboot time is 2 hour(s)
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
c
c
o
o
m
m
m
m
i
i
t
t
This command allows users to save current settings to FLASH. Usually, current settings will be
saved in SRAM. Yet, this command will save the file to FLASH.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
529
> sys commit
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
t
t
f
f
t
t
p
p
d
d
This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys tftpd
% TFTP server enabled !!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
v
v
e
e
r
r
s
s
i
i
o
o
n
n
This command can display current version for the system.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys version
Router Model: Vigor2620Ln Version: r80480_beta English
Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x62d6b751)
Router IP: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Firmware Build Date/Time: Mar 8 2019 20:56:33
Router Name: drayrouter
Revision: 80480 V388_2620L
Current VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-07-06-0D-01-07
ADSL Firmware Version: 05-07-02-08-00-01 Annex A
VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-07-06-0D-01-07
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
q
q
r
r
y
y
b
b
u
u
f
f
This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys qrybuf
System Memory Status and Leakage List
Buf sk_buff ( 200B), used#: 1968, cached#: 21
Buf KMC5112 (5112B), used#: 257, cached#: 49
Buf KMC4088 (4088B), used#: 1, cached#: 7
Buf KMC2552 (2552B), used#: 1810, cached#: 434
Buf KMC1016 (1016B), used#: 17, cached#: 7
Buf KMC504 ( 504B), used#: 17, cached#: 31
Buf KMC248 ( 248B), used#: 87, cached#: 41
Buf KMC120 ( 120B), used#: 302, cached#: 402
Buf KMC56 ( 56B), used#: 139, cached#: 117
Buf KMC24 ( 24B), used#: 0, cached#: 0
Dynamic memory: 39321600B; 6458816B used; 1520192B/0B in level 1/2 cache.
FLOWTRACK Memory Status
# of free = 30000
# of maximum = 0
# of flowstate = 30000
# of lost by siganture = 0
# of lost by list = 0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
530
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
p
p
o
o
l
l
l
l
b
b
u
u
f
f
This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys pollbuf <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on>: Turn on pulling buffer.
<off>: Turn off pulling buffer.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys pollbuf on
% Buffer polling is on!
> sys pollbuf off
% Buffer polling is off!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
b
b
r
r
i
i
t
t
a
a
s
s
k
k
This command can improve triple play quality.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys britask <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on>: Turn on the bridge task for improving the triple play
quality.
<off>: Turn off the bridge task.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys britask on
% bridge task is ON, now
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
531
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
t
t
r
r
0
0
6
6
9
9
This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys tr069 get int.
sys tr069 get <parm> <nextlevel>
sys tr069 set <parm> <value>
sys tr069 getnoti <parm>
sys tr069 setnoti <parm> <value>
sys tr069 log
sys tr069 debug <on/off>
sys tr069 save
sys tr069 clear
sys tr069 inform <event code>
sys tr069 port <port num>
sys tr069 cert_auth <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
get int. It means to get all of the parameters for TR-069.
get <parm> <nextlevel> It means to get configured value for the specified parameter.
<parm>: Enter the abbriviation/full name of the parameter.
For example, "Int." means Internet. "Man." means
Management Server.
Int.Man. = InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer.
<nextlevel>: Get the information of the next level for
specified parameter (e.g., sys tr069 get Int.Man. nextlevel).
set <parm> <value> It means to configure TR-069 parameters settings. Available
parameters can be seen by using "get Int.".
<parm>: Enter the abbriviation of the parameter.
<value>: Enter the number, address, string, or name for the
selected parameter.
getnoti <parm> It means to get notification value for the specified
parameter.
<parm>: Enter the abbriviation of the parameter.
setnoti <parm> <value> It means to configure notification value for TR-069
paramters.
<parm>: Enter the abbriviation of the parameter.
<value>: Enter the value for the selected parameter.
log It means to display the TR-069 log.
debug <on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on: turn on the function of sending debug message to syslog.
off: turn off the function of sending debug message to syslog.
save It means to save the parameters to the flash memory of the
router.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
532
inform <event code> It means to inform parameters for tr069 with different event
codes.
<event code>: Enter 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
0, BOOTSTRAP
1, 1 BOOT
2, PERIODIC
3, SCHEDULED
4, VALUE CHANGE
5, KICKED
6, CONNECTION REQUEST
7, TRANSFER COMPLETE
8, DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE
9, M Reboot
port <port num> It means to change tr069 listen port number.
<port num>: Enter a port number (1~65535).
cert_auth <on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on: turn on certificate-based authentication.
off: turn off certificate-based authentication.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys tr069 get Int. nextlevel
Total number of parameter is 24
Total content length of parameter is 915
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo.
InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer.
InternetGatewayDevice.Time.
InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding.
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.Services.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Firewall.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Bandwidth.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Applications.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VPN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VoIP.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_WirelessLAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_System.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Status.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Diagnostics.
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
a
a
l
l
g
g
This command can turn on/off ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
533
sys alg <1/0>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
1, means to turn on ALG.
0, means to turn off ALG.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys sip_alg ?
Usage: sys alg <command> <parameter>
-e: enable ALG (0:disable, 1:enable)
Current ALG status
-ALG Master Switch: Disabled
> sys alg -e 0
Disable ALG
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
s
s
i
i
p
p
_
_
a
a
l
l
g
g
This command can turn on/off ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for SIP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys sip_alg -e <1/0>
sys sip_alg -p <port number>
sys sip_alg -u <1/0>
sys sip_alg -t <1/0>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-e <1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) or disable (0) the SIP ALG function.
-p <port number> Set the listening port for SIP ALG.
<port number>: Enter a port number (1~65535).
-u <1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) or disable (0) the listening along UDP path.
-t <1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) or disable (0) the listening along TCP path.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys sip_alg -p 65535
Current listening port: 65535
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
534
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
r
r
t
t
s
s
p
p
_
_
a
a
l
l
g
g
This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for RTSP
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys rtsp_alg -e <1/0>
sys rtsp_alg -p <port number>
sys rtsp_alg -u <1/0>
sys rtsp_alg -t <1/0>
sys rtsp_alg -v
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-e <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) the function of RTSP ALG.
-p <port number> Set the listening port for RTSP ALG.
<port number>: Enter a port number (1~65535).
-u <1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) or disable (0) the listening along UDP path.
-t <1/0> <1/0>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) or disable (0) the listening along TCP path.
-v Display RTP and RTCP portmap information of RTSP ALG.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys rtsp_alg -e 1
Auto enable ALG Master Switch
Enable RTSP ALG
> sys rtsp_alg -p 85
Current listening RTSP Port: 85
> sys rtsp_alg ?
Usage: sys rtsp_alg <command> <parameter>
-e: enable RTSP ALG (0:disable, 1:enable)
-p: set your listening port for RTSP ALG
-u: enable listen along UDP path (0:disable, 1:enable)
-t: enable listen along TCP path (0:disable, 1:enable)
-v: show rtp and rtcp portmap information of RTSP ALG
Current RTSP ALG status
-ALG Master Switch: Enabled
-RTSP ALG: Enabled
-Listen along UDP path: Yes
-Listen along TCP path: Yes
-Listening Port: 85
-Max RTSP session num: 256
-Remain RTSP session num: 256
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
535
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
l
l
i
i
c
c
e
e
n
n
s
s
e
e
This command can process the system license.
Note that DO NOT use the commands for system administrator only (for example, sys license
licmsg, sys license licauth, and etc).
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys license reset_regser
sys license licifno <AUTO/WAN#1>
sys license lic_trigger <-e/-d/-s>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
reset_regser It means to reset the server as default setting,
http://auth.draytek.com.
licera It means to erase license setting.
licifno <AUTO/WAN#1> It means license and signature download interface setting.
<AUTO/WAN#1>: Enter AUTO or WAN1, WAN2, etc.
lic_trigger <-e/-d/-s> It means to trigger the license automatically to update on
boot time.
-e : Enable the license trigger to update.
-d : Disable the license trigger to update.
-s : Display license status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys license licifno
License and Signature download interface setting:
licifno [AUTO/WAN#]
Ex: licifno wan1
Download interface is "auto-selected" now.
> sys license lic_trigger -e
Trigger the license to update, value=1
> sys license lic_trigger -d
Don't trigger the license to update, value=0
> sys license lic_trigger -s
License update state=0 (0:disable, 1:enable)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
536
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
d
d
a
a
y
y
l
l
i
i
g
g
h
h
t
t
s
s
a
a
v
v
e
e
This command is used to configure daylight save setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys daylightsave [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command><parameter>/
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-v Display the daylight saving settings.
-r Set to factory default setting.
-e <enable> <enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
Enable (1) / disable (0) daylight saving.
-t <type> Specify the saving type for daylight setting.
<type>: Enter 0, 1 or 2.
0 – Default
1 – Time range
2 - Yearly
-s <year> <month> <day>
<hour>
Set the detailed settings of the starting day for time range
type.
<year>: Enter the year.
<month>: Enter 1 ~ 12.
<day>: Enter 1 ~ 31.
<hour>: Enter 0 ~ 23.
e.g., sys daylightsave -s 2014 3 10 12
-d <year> <month> <day>
<hour>
Set the detailed settings of the ending day for time range
type.
<year>: Enter the year.
<month>: Enter 1 ~ 12.
<day>: Enter 1 ~ 31.
<hour>: Enter 0 ~ 23.
e.g., sys daylightsave -d 2014 9 10 12
-y <month> <th weekday>
<day in week> <hour>
Set the detailed settings of the starting day for yearly type.
<month>: Enter 1 ~ 12.
<th weekday>: Enter 1 ~ 5, 9: last week
<day in week>: Enter 0 ~6. 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed,
4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat
<hour>: Enter 0 ~ 23.
e.g, sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14
-z <month> <th weekday>
<day in week> <hour>
Set the detailed settings of the ending day for yearly type.
<month>: Enter 1 ~ 12.
<th weekday>: Enter 1 ~ 5, 9: last week
<day in week>: Enter 0 ~6. 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed,
4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat
<hour>: Enter 0 ~ 23.
e.g, sys daylightsave -z 3 1 6 14
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14
% Start: Yearly on Sep 1th Sun 14:00
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
53
7
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
d
d
n
n
s
s
C
C
a
a
c
c
h
h
e
e
T
T
b
b
l
l
This command is used to configure TTL settings which will be displayed in DNS Cache table.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys dnsCacheTbl <command><parameter>/…
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
[<command><parameter>
|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-l Display DNS IPv4 entry in the DNS cache table.
-s Display DNS IPv6 entry in the DNS cache table.
-v Display the TTL limit value in the DNS cache table.
-t <ttl> Set the TTL limit value (seconds) in the DNS cache table.
<ttl>: Enter 0 ~5. (0, no limit)
-c Clear the DNS cache table.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys dnsCacheTbl -l
%DNS Cache Table List
> sys dnsCacheTbl -t 65
% Set TTL limit: 65 seconds.
% When TTL larger than 65s , delete the DNS entry in the router's DNS cache
tabl
e.
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
s
s
y
y
s
s
l
l
o
o
g
g
This command is used to enable / disable syslog.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys syslog -a <enable> [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command><parameter>/
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-a <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Access Setup.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-s <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to Syslog Server.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-i <IP> Define the IP address of the Syslog server.
<IP>: Enter the IP address (e.g., 192.168.5.66)
-d <port> Define the port number as the destination port.
<port>: Enter a port value (1~65535).
-u <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to USB Disk.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-m <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Mail Syslog.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-f <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Filewall Log.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
538
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-v <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) VPN Log.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-e <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) User Access Log.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-c <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Call Log.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-w <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) WAN Log.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-r <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) Router/DSL Information.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-t <enable> Enable (1) or disable (0) AlertLog Setup.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0.
-o <port> Define the port number for AlertLog.
<port>: Enter a port value (1~65535).
-p Update the IP address of the server.
-W <mode> Define the action (1 for overwritting the oldest logs or 0 for
stopping the logs) of syslog.
<mode>: Enter 1 or 0.
-U <unit> Set the unit (1 for MB or 0 for GB) of Syslog storing on a USB
disk.
<unit>: Enter 1 or 0.
-S <capacity> Define the folder capacity of a USB disk.
<capacity>: Enter 1~16GB or 1~1024MB.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys syslog -a 1 -s 1 -i 192.168.1.25 -d 514
> sys syslog –p
> Updating server IP address..
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
m
m
a
a
i
i
l
l
a
a
l
l
e
e
r
r
t
t
This command is used to configure settings for mail alert function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys mailalert <command><parameter>/…
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command><parameter>/
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
-e <0/1> Enable (1) or disable (0) the mail alert function.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1.
-i <SMTP Server IP> Set the SMTP sever IP address.
<SMTP Server IP>: Enter an IP address.
-o <SMTP Server Port> Set the port number for SMTP server.
<SMTP Server Port>: Enter a number (1~65535).
-a <Mail Address> Set Alert Mail Reciver E-maiil Address.
<Mail Address>: Enter a mail address.
-r <Mail Address> Set Mail Return E-mail Address.
<Mail Address>: Enter a mail address.
-s <0/1> Enable/Disable Use SSL.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1.
-h <0/1> Enable/Disable SMTP Authentication.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1.
-u <Username> Set Username for SMTP Authentication.
<Username>: Enter a string as username.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
539
-p <Password> Set Password for SMTP Authentication.
<Password>: Enter a password.
-l <type> <0 /1 > <type>: Enter 0, 1, 2 6.
0, Mail Alert of the DoS Attack.
1, Mail Alert of the APPE.
2, Mail Alert of the VPN Log.
6, Mail Alert of the Reboot Debug Log.
<0/1>: Enter 0 (disable) or 1 (enable).
-f Reset Mail Alert Setting to factory default.
-v Show Current Mail Alert Setting.
-R <0/1> Set Mail Alert Reboot Debug Log Mode.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1.
0, Limited Mode
1, Unlimited Mode
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys mailalert -e 1
Set Enable Mail Alert.
> sys mailalert -i 172.16.3.168
> sys mailalert -o 886
Set SMTP Server Port as 886
> sys mailalert -a john@draytek.com
Set Alert Mail Reciver E-maiil Address as john@draytek.com
> sys mailalert -v
------ Current setting for Mail Alert ------
Mail Alert: Enable
SMTP Server IP Address: 172.16.3.168
SMTP Server Port: 886
Alert Mail Reciver E-maiil Address: john@draytek.com
Mail Return E-mail Address:
Use SSL: Disable
SMTP Authentication: Disable
Username for SMTP Authentication:
Password for SMTP Authentication:
Mail Alert for DoS Attack: Enable.
Mail Alert for APPE: Enable.
Mail Alert for VPN Log: Enable.
Mail Alert for Reboot Debug Log: Disable, Mode: Limited.
---------------------------------------------
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
t
t
i
i
m
m
e
e
This command is used to configure system time and date.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys time server <domain>
sys time inquire
sys time show
sys time wan <option>
sys time zone <index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
540
server <domain> Set the domain name of the time server.
<domain>: Enter a string. The maximum length is 39
characters.
show Display the time server setting.
wan <option> Select WAN interface for applying the time server.
<option>: Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
0, Auto
1, WAN1
2, WAN2
3, WAN3
4, WAN4
zone <Index> Different number means different time zone.
1 - GMT-12:00 Eniwetok, Kwajalein
2 - GMT-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa
3 - GMT-10:00 Hawaii
4 - GMT-09:00 Alaska
5 - GMT-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)
6 - GMT-08:00 Tijuana
7 - GMT-07:00 Mountain Time (US & Canada)
8 - GMT-07:00 Arizona
9 - GMT-06:00 Central Time (US & Canada)
10 - GMT-06:00 Saskatchewan
11 - GMT-06:00 Mexico City, Tegucigalpa
12 - GMT-05:00 Eastern Time (US & Canada)
13 - GMT-05:00 Indiana (East)
14 - GMT-05:00 Bogota, Lima, Quito
15 - GMT-04:00 Atlantic Time (Canada)
16 - GMT-04:00 Caracas, La Paz
17 - GMT-04:00 Santiago
18 - GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
19 - GMT-03:00 Brasilia
20 - GMT-03:00 Buenos Aires, Georgetown
21 - GMT-02:00 Mid-Atlantic
22 - GMT-01:00 Azores, Cape Verde Is.
23 - GMT Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin
24 - GMT Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
25 - GMT Casablanca, Monrovia
26 - GMT+01:00 Belgrade, Bratislava
27 - GMT+01:00 Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague
28 - GMT+01:00 Sarajevo, Skopje, Sofija
29 - GMT+01:00 Warsaw, Zagreb
30 - GMT+01:00 Brussels, Copenhagen
31 - GMT+01:00 Madrid, Paris, Vilnius
32 - GMT+01:00 Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern
33 - GMT+01:00 Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
34 - GMT+02:00 Bucharest
35 - GMT+02:00 Cairo
36 - GMT+02:00 Helsinki, Riga, Tallinn
37 - GMT+02:00 Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
38 - GMT+02:00 Jerusalem
39 - GMT+02:00 Harare, Pretoria
40 - GMT+03:00 Volgograd
41 - GMT+03:00 Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh
42 - GMT+03:00 Nairobi
43 - GMT+03:00 Moscow, St. Petersburg
44 - GMT+03:30 Tehran
45 - GMT+04:00 Abu Dhabi, Muscat
46 - GMT+04:00 Baku, Tbilisi
47 - GMT+04:30 Kabul
48 - GMT+05:00 Ekaterinburg
49 - GMT+05:00 Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
541
50 - GMT+05:30 Bombay, Calcutta
51 - GMT+05:30 Madras, New Delhi
52 - GMT+06:00 Astana, Almaty, Dhaka
53 - GMT+06:00 Colombo
54 - GMT+07:00 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
55 - GMT+08:00 Beijing, Chongqing
56 - GMT+08:00 Hong Kong, Urumqi
57 - GMT+08:00 Singapore
58 - GMT+08:00 Taipei
59 - GMT+08:00 Perth
60 - GMT+09:00 Seoul
61 - GMT+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
62 - GMT+09:00 Yakutsk
63 - GMT+09:30 Darwin
64 - GMT+09:30 Adelaide
65 - GMT+10:00 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney
66 - GMT+10:00 Brisbane
67 - GMT+10:00 Hobart
68 - GMT+10:00 Vladivostok
69 - GMT+10:00 Guam, Port Moresby
70 - GMT+11:00 Magadan, Solomon Is.
71 - GMT+11:00 New Caledonia
72 - GMT+12:00 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is.
73 - GMT+12:00 Auckland, Wellington
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys time zone 8
Set Time Zone OK
> sys time show
*************** System Time ***************
Current System Time: [2000 Jan 03 Mon 06:11:12]
Time Server: [pool.ntp.org]
Time Zone Index: [8]. GMT-07:00
Send NTP Request Through: Auto
*********************************************
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
s
s
y
y
s
s
d
d
a
a
s
s
h
h
b
b
o
o
a
a
r
r
d
d
This command is used to display or hidden the information displayed on the dashboard.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
sys dashboard show
sys dashboard -<command> <value> ...
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<command><parameter>/
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<…> means that you can Enter several commands in one line.
- <command> <value> <command>: Enter 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 adn a
0, Front Panel
1, System Information
2, IPv4 LAN Information
3, IPv4 Internet Access
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
542
4, IPv6 Internet Access
5, Interface
6, Security
7, System Resource
8, LTE Status
9, Quick Access
a, VoIP
<value>: Enter 1 or 0.
1, Enable
0, Disable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> sys dashboard -1 1 -2 0
System Information enabled
IPv4 LAN Information disabled
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
t
t
e
e
s
s
t
t
m
m
a
a
i
i
l
l
This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> testmail
Send out test mail
Mail Alert:[Disable]
SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.0]
Mail to:[]
Return-Path:[]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
o
o
f
f
f
f
This command can close UPnP function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>upnp off
UPNP say bye-bye
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
o
o
n
n
This command can enable UPnP function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>upnp on
UPNP start.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
n
n
a
a
t
t
This command can display IGD NAT status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> upnp nat ?
****************** IGD NAT Status ****************
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
543
((0))
InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<<
PortMapProtocol >>TCP<<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
Ftp Example [MICROSOFT]
((1))
InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>0<<, ExternalPort >>0<<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
0<<
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
s
s
e
e
r
r
v
v
i
i
c
c
e
e
This command can display the information of the UPnP service. UPnP service must be enabled
first.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> upnp on
UPNP start.
> upnp service
>>>>> SERVICE TABLE1 <<<<<
serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
serviceId urn:microsoft-com:serviceId:OSInfo1
SCPDURL /upnp/OSInfo.xml
controlURL /OSInfo1
eventURL /OSInfoEvent1
UDN uuid:774e9bbe-7386-4128-b627-001daa843464
>>>>> SERVICE TABLE2 <<<<<
serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
serviceId urn:upnp-org:serviceId:WANCommonIFC1
SCPDURL /upnp/WComIFCX.xml
controlURL /upnp?control=WANCommonIFC1
eventURL /upnp?event=WANCommonIFC1
UDN uuid:2608d902-03e2-46a5-9968-4a54ca499148
.
.
.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
s
s
u
u
b
b
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
b
b
e
e
This command can show all UPnP services subscribed.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> upnp on
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
544
UPNP start.
> upnp subscribe
>>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
>>>> (2) serviceType
urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
>>>> (3) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANPOTSLinkConfig:1
>>>> (4) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANPPPConnection:1
>>>> (5) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANIPConnection:1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
t
t
m
m
p
p
v
v
s
s
This command can display current status of temp Virtual Server of your router.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor> upnp tmpvs
****************** Temp virtual server status ****************
((0))
real_addr >>192.168.1.10<<, pseudo_addr >>172.16.3.229<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>TCP<<
time >>0<<
((1))
real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>0<<
time >>0<<
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
u
u
p
p
n
n
p
p
w
w
a
a
n
n
This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
upnp wan <n>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<n> It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
<n>: Enter 0 ~3.
0, auto-select WAN interface.
1, WAN1
2, WAN2
3, WAN3
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> upnp wan 1
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
545
use wan1 now.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
i
i
g
g
b
b
r
r
g
g
s
s
e
e
t
t
This command is to configure specified WAN as bridge mode.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
vigbrg set -v <IP version> -w <WAN_idx> -l <LAN_idx> -e <0/1> -f <0/1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-v <IP version> -w
<WAN_idx> -l <LAN_idx>
-e <0/1> -f <0/1>
-v <IP version>: Enter 4 or 6. Indicate the IP version for the IP
address.
4, IPv4.
6, IPv6.
-w <WAN_idx>: Enter 1. Indicate the WAN interface.
1, WAN1
-l <LAN_idx>: Enter 1, or 2. Indicate the LAN interface.
1, LAN1
2, LAN2
-e <0/1>: Enter 0 or 1 to enable/disable the Vigor Bridge for
WAN or/and LAN.
-f <0/1>: Enter 0 or 1 to enable/disable the firewall
functions.
0, disable
1, enable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vigbrg set -v 4 -w 1 -l 1 -e 1
[WAN1] IPv4 bridge is enable. Set subnet[LAN1]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
i
i
g
g
b
b
r
r
g
g
c
c
l
l
o
o
s
s
e
e
a
a
l
l
l
l
This command can close Vigor Bridge Function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vigbrg closeall ?
Close all bridge and bridge firewall
[WAN1] IPv4 firewall is disable.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
i
i
g
g
b
b
r
r
g
g
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vigbrg status
Show gConfig setting of bridge mode
[WAN1] IPv4 bridge is enable [LAN1].
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
i
i
g
g
b
b
r
r
g
g
c
c
f
f
g
g
i
i
p
p
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
546
This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and
adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the
router through the IP address configured here.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vigbrg cfgip <IP Address>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<IP Address> It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router.
<IP Address>: Enter an IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15
> vigbrg cfgip ?
% Vigor Bridge Config IP,
% Now: 192.168.1.15
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
g
g
r
r
o
o
u
u
p
p
This command allows you to set VLAN group. You can set four VLAN groups. Please run vlan
restart command after you change any settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan group id <set/set_ex> <p1/p2/p3/p4/s1/s2/s3/s4>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
id <set/set_ex>
<p1/p2/p3/p4/s1/s2/s3/
s4>
Id: Enter 0 ~ 7. It means the group 0 to 7 for VLAN.
<set/set_ex>: Enter set or set_ex to let the selected port
number joining a VLAN group. In which, "set" indicates each
port can join more than one VLAN group. "set_ex" indicates
each port can join one VLAN group.
<p1/p2/p3/p4/s1/s2/s3/s4>: Enter p1, p2, p3, p4, s1, s2, s3
or s4.
In which, p1, p2, p3 and p4 mean LAN port 1 to LAN port 4. To
group LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and/or LAN4 under one VLAN group,
please enter the port number(s) you want.
S1, s2, s3 and s4 are configured for WLAN function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan group 3 set p1 s3 s4
VLAN p1 p2 p3 p4 s1 s2 s3 s4
-----------------------------------------------
3 V V V
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
o
o
f
f
f
f
This command allows you to disable VLAN function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
54
7
vlan off
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan off
VLAN is Disable!
Force subnet LAN2 to be disabled!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
o
o
n
n
This command allows you to enable VLAN function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan on
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan on
VLAN is Enable!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
p
p
r
r
i
i
This command is used to define the priority for each VLAN profile setting.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan pri n pri_no
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
n pri_no n: Enter 0 ~ 7. It means VLAN ID number.
pri_no: Enter 0 ~ 7 (from none to highest priority). It means
the priority of VLAN profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan pri 1 2
VLAN1: Priority=2
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
r
r
e
e
s
s
t
t
a
a
r
r
t
t
This command can make VLAN settings restarted with newest configuration.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan restart
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan restart ?
VLAN restarts!!!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command display current status for VLAN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan status
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
548
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan status
VLAN is Enable :
------------------------------------------------------
VLAN Enable VID Pri p1 p2 p3 p4 s1 s2 s3 s4 subnet
------------------------------------------------------
0 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
1 OFF 0 2 1:LAN1
2 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
3 OFF 0 0 V V V 1:LAN1
4 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
5 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
6 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
7 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1
------------------------------------------------------
Note: they are only untag for s1/s2/s3/s4, but they can join tag vlan w
i
th
lan ports.
Permit untagged device in P1 to access router: ON.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command is used to configure the LAN interface used by the VLAN group.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan subnet group_id <1/2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<1/2> <1/2>: Enter 1 or 2.
1, LAN1
2, LAN2
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan subnet group_id 2
% Vlan Group-0 using LAN2 !
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
drayrouter> vlan subnet
%% vlan subnet group_id <1/2>
% Now
% VLAN0: 2(LAN2 )
% VLAN1: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN2: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN3: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN4: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN5: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN6: 1(LAN1 )
% VLAN7: 1(LAN1 )
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
549
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
s
s
u
u
b
b
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
This command changes the VLAN encapsulation mechanisms in the LAN driver.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan submode <on/off/status>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off/status> <on/off/status>: Enter on, off or status to enable, disable or
display the submode status.
on, means to enable the promiscuous mode.
off, means to disable the promiscuous mode.
status, means to display if submode is normal mode or
promiscuous mode.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan submode status
% vlan subnet mode : normal mode
> vlan submode on
% vlan subnet mode modified to promiscuous mode.
> vlan submode status
% vlan subnet mode : promiscuous mode
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
t
t
a
a
g
g
g
g
e
e
d
d
This command is used to enable or disable the incoming of untagged packets.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan tagged <n> <on/off>
vlan tagged unlimited <on/off>
vlan tagged p1_untag <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<n> <on/off> <n>: Enter 0 to 7. It means VLAN channel.
<on/off>: Enter on or off to enable/disable the tagged VLAN.
on, enable
off, disable
unlimited <on/off> unlimited <on/off>: Allow/forbid the incoming of untagged
packets even all VLAN are tagged.
on, allow
off, forbid
p1_untag <on/off> p1_untag <on/off>: Allow/forbid the incoming of untagged
packets form LAN port 1.
on, allow
off, forbid
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
550
> vlan tagged unlimited on
unlimited mode is ON
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
v
v
i
i
d
d
This command is used to configure VID number for each VLAN channel.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan vid n vid_no
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
n vid_no n: Enter 0 ~ 7. It means VLAN channel.
Vid_no: Enter 0 ~ 4095. It means the value of VLAN ID. Enter
the value as the VLAN ID number.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan vid 1 4095
VLAN1, vid=4095
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
s
s
y
y
s
s
v
v
i
i
d
d
This command is used to modify and show the scope (reserved 78) of the VLAN IDs used
internally by the system.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vlan sysvid show/<n>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to show the scope of VLAN ID used internally.
<n> <n>: Enter 0 ~ 4016.
It means the value to be set as VLAN ID.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vlan sysvid 100
You have set system VLAN ID to range: 100 ~ 177,
We recommend that you reboot the system now.
> vlan sysvid 200
You have set system VLAN ID to range: 200 ~ 263,
We recommend that you reboot the system now.
> vlan sysvid show
The system VLAN ID is in range: 200 ~ 263
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
551
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
l
l
2
2
l
l
s
s
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to set advanced parameters for LAN to LAN function.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn l2lset <list index> peerid <peerid>
vpn l2lset <list index> localid <localid>
vpn l2lset <list index> main <auto/proposal index>
vpn l2lset <list index> aggressive <desg1/desg2/aesg1/aesg2>
vpn l2lset <list index> pfs <on/off>
vpn l2lset <list index> phase1 <lifetime>
vpn l2lset <list index> phase2 <lifetime>
vpn l2lset <list index> x509localid <0/1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<list index> peerid
<peerid>
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<peerid>: Enter the peer identity for aggressive mode.
<list index> localid
<localid>
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<localid>: Enter the local identity for aggressive mode.
<list index> main
<auto/proposal index>
It means to choose proposal for main mode.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<auto/proposal index>: Enter auto or proposal index number
to choose the default proposal or specified proposal.
<list index> aggressive
<desg1/desg2/aesg1/aesg
2>
It means the chosen DH group for aggressive mode.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<desg1/desg2/aesg1/aesg2>: Enter desg1, desg2, aesg1 or
aesg2.
<list index> pfs <on/off> It means “perfect forward secrete”.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter or or off to turn on/off the PSF
configuration.
<list index> phase1
<lifetime>
It means to set the lifetime value for phase 1 of IKE.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<lifetime>: Enter a value.
<list index> phase2
<lifetime>
It means to set the lifetime value for phase 2 of IKE.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<lifetime>: Enter a value.
<list index> X509localid
<0/1>
It means the local identity for X509 server.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<0/1>: Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable the local identity
configuration of X509 server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn l2lset 1 peerid test
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
552
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
d
d
i
i
n
n
s
s
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to configure setting for remote dial-in VPN profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn dinset <list index>
vpn dinset <list index> <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> username <USERNAME>
vpn dinset <list index> password <PASSWORD>
vpn dinset <list index> motp <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> pin_secret <pin> <secret>
vpn dinset <list index> timeout <0~9999>
vpn dinset <list index> dintype <Type> <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> subnet <0~2>
vpn dinset <list index> assignip <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> srnode <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> remoteip <Remote_Client_IP_Address>
vpn dinset <list index> peer <Peer_ID>
vpn dinset <list index> naming <pass/block>
vpn dinset <list index> multicastvpn <pass/block>
vpn dinset <list index> prekey <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> assignkey <Pre_Shared_Key>
vpn dinset <list index> digsig <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> ipsec <Method> <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> localid <Local_ID>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<list index> <list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<list index> <on/off> It means to enable or disable the profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index> username
<USERNAME>
It means to set a username for dial-in VPN profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<USERNAME>: Enter a string.
<list index> password
<PASSWORD>
It means to set a password for dial-in VPN profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<PASSWORD>: Enter a password.
<list index> motp
<on/off>
It means to enable or disable the authentication with mOTP
function.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index> It means to set PIN code with secret.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
553
pin_secret<pin> <secret> <list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<pin>: Enter the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
<secret>: Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP
in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6)
<list index> timeout
<0~9999>
It means to set the time out for dial-in VPN profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<0~9999>: Enter a number. The default is 300 seconds.
<list index> dintype
<Type> <on/off>
It means to set dial-in type for creating VPN connection.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Type>: 0:PPTP,1:IPsec Tunnel,2:L2TP with IPsec Policy,3:SSL
Tunnel
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index> subnet <0~2> It means to set the LAN subnet for the VPN profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<0~2>: Enter 0, 1 or 2.
0:LAN1
1:LAN2
2:LAN3
<list index> assignip
<on/off>
It means to enable the assignment for static IP address.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index> srnode
<on/off>
It means to enable the function of Specify Remote Node.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index>remoteip
<Remote_Client_IP_Addr
ess>
It means to assign the IP address for the remote client.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Remote_Client_IP_Address>: Enter the IP address.
<list index> peer
<Peer_ID>
It means to assign the peer ID for such profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Peer_ID>: Enter the peer ID.
<list index>naming
<pass/block>
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<pass/block>: Enter pass or block.
Pass, have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts
located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
554
Block, when there is conflict occurred between the hosts on
both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, it can block data
transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.
<list index> multicastvpn
<pass/block>
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<pass/block>: Enter pass or block.
Pass –Let multicast packets pass through the router.
Block – This is default setting. It can let multicast packets be
blocked by the router.
<list index> prekey
<on/off>
It means to enable/disable the pre-shared key for IKE
authentication method.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable.
<list index> assignkey
<Pre_Shared_Key>
Assign the pre-shared key.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Pre_Shared_Key>: Enter a string.
<list index>digsig
<on/off>
Enable /disable the function of Digital Signature (X.509) for
IKE authentication method.
<list index> ipsec
<Method> <on/off>
Set the IPsec security medthod for the specified VPN profile.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Method>: Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3.
0, Medium(AH) High(ESP)
1, DES
2, 3DES
3, AES
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
On, Enable.
Off, Disable..
<list index> localid
<Local_ID>
Assign a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the
LAN-to-LAN Profile setup.
<list index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN)
profile.
<Local_ID>: Enter a string.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn dinset 1
Dial-in profile index 1
Profile Name: ???
Status: Deactive
Mobile OTP: Disabled
Password:
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
555
Idle Timeout: 300 sec
> vpn dinset 1 on
% set profile active
> vpn dinset 1 motp on
% Enable Mobile OTP mode!>
> vpn dinset 1 pin_secret 1234 e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6
> vpn dinset 1
Dial-in profile index 1
Profile Name: ???
Status: Active
Mobile OTP: Enabled
PIN: 1234
Secret: e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6
Idle Timeout: 300 sec
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to specify a subnet selection for the specified remote dial-in VPN
profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn subnet <index> <1/2>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<index> <1/2> It means the index number of the VPN profile.
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<1/2>: Enter 1 or 2.
1, LAN1
2, LAN2
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn subnet 1 2
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
s
s
e
e
t
t
u
u
p
p
This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
Command of PPTP Dial-Out
vpn setup <index> <name> pptp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>
Command of IPSec Dial-Out
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
556
vpn setup <index> <name> ipsec_out <ip> <key> <nip> <nmask>
Command of L2Tp Dial-Out
vpn setup <index> <name> l2tp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>
Command of Dial-In
vpn setup <index> <name> dialin <ip> <usr> <pwd> <key> <nip> <nmask>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
For PPTP Dial-Out
<index> <name> pptp_out
<ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip>
<nmask>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<name>: Enter the name of the profile.
<ip>: Enter the IP address to dial to.
<usr>: Enter the user name for the PPTP connection.
<pwd>: Enter the password required for the PPPT
connection.
<nip>: Enter the remote network IP address.
<nmask>: Enter the mask for the remote network IP.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 pptp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For IPsec Dial-Out
<index> <name>
ipsec_out <ip> <key>
<nip> <nmask>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<name>: Enter the name of the profile.
<ip>: Enter the IP address to dial to.
<key>: Enter the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.
<nip>: Enter the remote network IP address.
<nmask>: Enter the mask for the remote network IP.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 ipsec_out 1.2.3.4 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For L2TP Dial-Out
<index> <name> l2tp_out
<ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip>
<nmask>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<name>: Enter the name of the profile.
<ip>: Enter the IP address to dial to.
<usr>: Enter the user name for the PPTP connection.
<pwd>: Enter the password required for the PPPT
connection.
<nip>: Enter the remote network IP address.
<nmask>: Enter the mask for the remote network IP.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 l2tp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For Dial-In
<index> <name> dialin
<ip> <usr> <pwd> <key>
<nip> <nmask>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<name>: Enter the name of the profile.
<ip>: Enter the IP address to dial to.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
55
7
<usr>: Enter the user name for the PPTP connection.
<pwd>: Enter the password required for the PPPT
connection.
<key>: Enter the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.
<nip>: Enter the remote network IP address.
<nmask>: Enter the mask for the remote network IP.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0
% Profile Change Log ...
% Profile Index : 1
% Profile Name : name1
% Username : vigor
% Password : 1234
% Pre-share Key : abc
% Call Direction : Dial-In
% Type of Server : ISDN PPTP IPSec L2TP
% Dial from : 1.2.3.4
% Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0
% Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
o
o
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
This command allows users to configure settings for LAN to LAN profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn option <index> <cmd1>=<param1> <cmd2>=<para2>/ ...
Commands of Common Settings
vpn optoin <index> <pname=> <ena=> <nnpkt=> <dir=> <idle=> <palive=>
Commands of Dial-Out Settings
vpn optoin <index> <ctype=> <dialto=> <ltype=> <oname=> <opwd=> <pauth=> <ovj=>
<okey=> <ometh=> <sch=> <ikemode=> <ikeid=>
Commands of Dial-In Settings
vpn optoin <index> <itype=> <peer=> <peerid=> <iname=> <ipwd=> <ivj=> <ikey=>
<imeth=>
Commands of TCP/IP Network Settings
vpn optoin <index> <mywip=> <rgip=> <rnip=> <rnmask=> <lnip=> <lnmask=> <rip=>
<mode=> <droute=>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
For Common Settings
<index> <pname=>
<ena=> <nnpkt=> <dir=>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<pname=>: Enter pname=the name of the profile (e.g.,
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
558
<idle=> <palive=> pname=testname).
<ena=>: Enter ena=on or ena=off. In which, on means
Enable, off means disable.
<nnpkt=>: Enter nnpkt=on or nnpkt=off to pass or block the
NetBios Naming Packet. In which, on means pass, off means
block.
<dir=>: Enter dir=b, dir=o or dir=i to determine the call
direction. In which, b means Both, o means Dial-Out and i
means Dial-In.
<idle=>: Enter idle=-1, idle=0 or idle=other value. In which,
-1 means always on for dial-out, 0 means always on for
dial-in. Other numbers (e.g., idle=200, idle=300, idle=500)
mean the router will be idle after the interval (seconds)
configured here.
<palive=>: Enter palive=-1, or palive=IP address for PING to
keep alive. In which, -1 means to disable the function. If an
IP address is specified here, it means to enable PING to the IP
address.
For Dial-Out Settings
<index> <ctype=>
<dialto=> <ltype=>
<oname=> <opwd=>
<pauth=> <ovj=> <okey=>
<ometh=> <sch=>
<ikemode=> <ikeid=>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<ctype=>: Enter ctype=t, ctype=s, ctype=l, ctype=l1 or
ctype=l2 to set “Type of Server I am calling”.
t, PPTP
s, IPSec.
l, L2TP(IPSec Policy None).
l1, L2TP(IPSec Policy Nice to Have).
l2, L2TP(IPSec Policy Must).
<dialto=>: Enter dialto=IP address or dialto=Host Name for
VPN (such as dialto=draytek.com or dialto=123.45.67.89).
<ltype=>: Enter ltype=0, ltype=1, ltype=2 or ltype=3 to
specify Link Type.
0, disable
1, 64kbps
2, 128kbps
3, BOD
<oname=>: Enter oname=dial-out username (e.g.,
oname=admin).
<opwd=>: Enter opwd=dial-out password (e.g., opwd=1234).
<pauth=>: Enter pauth=pc or pauth=p to set PPP
authentication. In which, pc means PAP&CHAP, p means AP
Only.
<ovj=>: Enter ovj=on or ovj=off to enable/disable VJ
Compression.
<okey=>: Enter okey=IKE Pre-Shared Key to set the PSK (e.g.,
okey=abcd).
<ometh=>: see below
Enter ometh=ah a/m/s/S
(means AH Auto, AH MD5, AH SHA1, or AH SHA2).
Enter ometh=espd a/m/s/S or ometh=espda a/m/s/S
(means ESP DES without or with Authentication Auto/
MD5/ SHA1/ SHA2).
Enter ometh=esp3 or ometh=esp3a a/m/s/S
(means ESP 3DES without or with Authentication Auto /
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
559
MD5/ SHA1/ SHA2).
Enter ometh=espa 1/9/2 or ometh=espaa a/m/s/S 1/9/2.
(means ESP AES 128/192/256 without or with
Authentication Auto/MD5/SHA1/SHA2 (AES128/192/256)
<sch=>: Enter sch=1 ~ 15 to select schedule 1 ~ 15. (e.g.,
sch=1,3,5,7 Set schedule 1->3->5->7)
<ikemode=>: Enter ikemode=m or ikemode=a to set IKE
phase 1 mode as Main or Aggressive mode.
<ikeid=>: Enter ikeid=local ID to set IKE local ID (e.g.,
ikeid=vigor).
For Dial-In Settings
<index> <itype=> <peer=>
<peerid=> <iname=>
<ipwd=> <ivj=> <ikey=>
<imeth=>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<itype=>: see below
Enter itype=t (for PPTP)
Enter itype=s (for IPsec)
Enter itype=l (for L2TP(IPsec Policy None)
Enter itype=l1 (for L2TP(IPsec Policy Nice to Have)
Enter itype=l2 (for L2TP(IPsec Policy Must)
Enter itype=c (for SSL Tunnel)
<peer=>: Enter peer=off or peer=IP address. In which, “off”
means any remote IP is allowed to dial in. "IP address" means
to allow VPN dial-in with a specified IP address (e.g.,
203.12.23.48).
<peerid=>: Enter peerid=ID name as the peer ID for remote
VPN gateway. For example, peerid=draytek means the word
"draytek" is used as the local ID.
<iname=>: Enter iname=name as the dial-in username. For
example, iname=admin means the word "admin" is used as
the username.
<ipwd>: Enter ipwd=password as the dial-in password. For
example, ipwd=1234 means the word "1234" is used as the
password.
<ivj>: Enter ivj=on or ivj=off to enable or diable the function
of VJ Compression.
<ikey>: Enter ikey=ikey as the IKE Pre-Shared Key. For
example, ikey=abcd means the word "abcd" is used as the IKE
PSK.
<imeth=>: Enter imeth=h, d, 3, a to specify the IPsec security
method.
d, Allow AH
d, Allow DES
3, Allow 3DES
a, Allow AES
For TCP/IP Settings
<index> <mywip=>
<rgip=> <rnip=>
<rnmask=> <lnip=>
<lnmask=> <rip=>
<mode=> <droute=>
<index>: Enter the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
<mywip=>: Enter mywip=IP address to set MY WAN IP. For
example, mywip=1.2.3.4 means the IP address "1.2.3.4" is
used as My WAN IP.
<rgip=>: Enter rgip= IP address to set the Remote Gateway IP.
For example, rgip=2.3.4.5 means the IP address "2.3.4.5" is
used as the Remote Gateway IP.
<rnip=>: Enter rnip= IP address to set the Remote Network IP.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
560
For example, rnip=4.5.6.7 means the IP address "4.5.6.7" is
used as the Remote Network IP.
<rnmask=>: Enter rnmask=mask address to set the Remote
Network Mask. For example, rnmask=255.255.255.0 means
the mask address "255.255.255.0" is used as the Remote
Network Mask.
<lnip=>: Enter lnip=IP address to set the Local Netowrk IP.
For example, lnip=1.2.3.4 means the IP address "1.2.3.4" is
used as the Local Netowrk IP.
<lnmask=>: Enter lnmask=mask address to set the Local
Network Mask. For example, lnmask=255.255.255.200 means
the mask address "255.255.255.00" is used as the Local
Network Mask.
<rip=>: Enter rip=d, t, r or b to set RIP Direction.
d, Disable
t, TX
r, RX
b, Both
<mode=>: Enter mode=r or mode=n.
mode=r means to set Route mode for the option of “From
first subnet to remote network, you have to do”.
mode=n means to set NAT mode for the option of “From
first subnet to remote network, you have to do”.
<droute=>: Enter droute=off or droute=on for the option of
"Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN
supports this)".
droute=on means to enable the fuction.
droute=off means to disable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn option 1 idle=250
% Change Log..
% Idle Timeout = 250
> vpn option 1 itype=t,s,l2 peer=192.168.1.54 peerid=mary iname=userca
rrie ipwd=12345678 ivj=on ikey=abcd imeth=h
% Change Log..
% Allowed Dial-In Type : PPTP IPsec L2TP(Must)
% Allow dial from (IP) : 192.168.1.54
% Allow dial from (peer id): mary
% Dial-in Username = usercarrie
% Password : 12345678
% VJ Compression (dial-in) = on
% Pre-share Key (dial-in): abcd
% Dial-in IPsec Security Method: AH
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
m
m
r
r
o
o
u
u
t
t
e
e
This command allows users to list, add or delete static routes for a certain LAN to LAN VPN
profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn mroute <index> list
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
561
vpn mroute <index> add <network ip>/<mask>
vpn mroute <index> del <network ip>/<mask>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<index> list It means to display the route settings.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<index> add <network
ip>/<mask>
It means to add a new route.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<network ip>/<mask>: Enter the IP address with the network
mask address (e.g., 192.168.3.5/24).
<index> del <network
ip>/<mask>
It means to delete specified route.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<network ip>/<mask>: Enter the IP address with the network
mask address (e.g., 192.168.3.5/24).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn mroute 1 add 192.168.5.0/24
% 192.168.5.0/24
% Add new route 192.168.5.0/24 to profile 1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
l
l
i
i
s
s
t
t
This command allows users to view LAN to LAN VPN profiles.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn list <index> all
vpn list <index> com
vpn list <index> out
vpn list <index> in
vpn list <index> net
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<index> all It means to list configuration of the specified profile.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<index> com It means to list common settings of the specified profile.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<index> out It means to list dial-out settings of the specified profile.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<index> in It means to list dial-in settings of the specified profile.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
<index> net It means to list Network Settings of the specified profile.
<index>: Enter an index number (1 ~ 32) of the VPN profile.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
562
> rayrouter> vpn list 1 all
Common Settings
Profile Name : name1
Profile Status : Enable
VPN Connection Through : WAN1 First
Dialout WAN IP Alias Index : None
Netbios Naming Packet : Pass
Call Direction : Dial-In
Idle Timeout : 300
PING to keep alive : off
Dial-out Settings
Type of Server : ISDN
Link Type: : 64k bps
Username : ???
Password :
PPP Authentication : PAP/CHAP
VJ Compression : on
Pre-Shared Key :
IPsec Security Method : AH
Schedule : 0,0,0,0
Remote Callback : off
Provide ISDN Number : off
IKE phase 1 mode : Main mode
IKE Local ID :
Dial-In Settings
...
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
r
r
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn remote <PPTP/IPsec/L2TP/SSLVPN> <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<PPTP/IPsec/L2TP/SSLVP
N> <on/off>
<PPTP/IPsec/L2TP/SSLVPN>: There are four types to be
selected. Enter PPTP, IPsec, L2TP or SSLVPN.
<on/off>: Enter on or off.
on – enable VPN remote setting.
off – disable VPN remote setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn remote PPTP on
Set PPTP VPN Service : On
Please restart the router!!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
563
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
2
2
n
n
d
d
s
s
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn 2ndsubnet <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on: enable or disable second subnet.
off: disable the second subnet.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn 2ndsubnet on
%Enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
N
N
e
e
t
t
B
B
i
i
o
o
s
s
This command allows users to enable or disable NetBios for Remote Access User Accounts or
LAN-to-LAN Profile.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn NetBios set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<H2l/L2l> <index>
<Block/Pass>
<H2l/L2l>: Enter H2l or L2L. Specify which one will be
applied by NetBios.
H2l, means Remote Access User Accounts.
L2l, means LAN-to-LAN Profile.
<index>: Enter an index number of the profile.
<Block/Pass>: Enter Pass or Block.
Pass – Have an inquiry for data transmission between the
hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.
Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on
both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, set it block data
transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn NetBios set H2l 1 Pass
% Remote Dial In Profile Index [1] :
% NetBios Block/Pass: [PASS]
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
564
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
m
m
s
s
s
s
This command allows users to configure the maximum segment size (MSS) for different TCP
types.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn mss show
vpn mss default
vpn mss set <connection type> <TCP maximum segment size range>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to display current setting status.
default TCP maximum segment size for all the VPN connection will
be set as 1360 bytes.
set Use it to specify the connection type and value of MSS.
<connection type> <TCP
maximum segment size
range>
<connection type>: Enter 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
1, PPTP
2, L2TP
3, IPSec
4, L2TP over IPSec
5, SSL Tunnel
<TCP maximum segment size range>: Enter a value. Each
type has different segment size range.
PPTP, 1 ~ 1412
L2TP, 1 ~ 1408
IPSec, 1 ~ 1381
L2TP over IPSec, 1 ~ 1361
SSL Tunnel, 1 ~ 1360
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn mss set 1 1400
% VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) :
PPTP = 1400
L2TP = 1360
IPsec = 1360
L2TP over IPsec = 1360
SSL Tunnel = Not yet setting!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
i
i
k
k
e
e
This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn ike -q
vpn ike -s
vpn ike v2
vpn ike v2 debug <on/off>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
565
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-q Display IKE memory status an dleakage list.
-s Display IPsec state list.
V2 debug <on/off> It is used for RD debug.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn ike -q
IKE Memory Status and Leakage List
# of free L-Buffer=95, minimum=94, leak=1
# of free M-Buffer=529, minimum=529 leak=3
# of free S-Buffer=1199, minimum=1198, leak=1
# of free Msgid-Buffer=1024, minimum=1024
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
M
M
u
u
l
l
t
t
i
i
c
c
a
a
s
s
t
t
This command allows users to pass or block the multi-cast packet via VPN.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn Multicast set <H2L/L2L> <index> <Block/Pass>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<H2L/L2L> <index>
<Block/Pass>
<H2L/L2L>: Enter H2L or L2L. Specify which one will be
applied for multi-cast packets.
H2L, means Host to LAN (Remote Access User Accounts).
L2L, means LAN-to-LAN Profile.
<index>: Enter an index number of the profile.
<Block/Pass>: Enter Pass or Block the Multicast Packets..
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn Multicast set L2L 1 Pass
% Lan to Lan Profile Index [1] :
% Status Block/Pass: [PASS]
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
p
p
a
a
s
s
s
s
2
2
n
n
d
d
This command allows users to determine if the packets coming from the second subnet
passing through current used VPN tunnel.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn pass2nd <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
566
on – the second subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel.
off –the second subnet is not allowed to pass VPN tunnel.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn pass2nd on
% 2nd subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
p
p
a
a
s
s
s
s
2
2
n
n
a
a
t
t
This command allows users to determine if the packets passing through by NAT or not when
the VPN tunnel disconnects.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
vpn pass2nat <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on – the packets can pass through NAT.
off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn pass2nat on
% Packets would go through by NAT when VPN disconnect!!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
56
7
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
v
v
p
p
n
n
s
s
a
a
m
m
e
e
S
S
u
u
b
b
n
n
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to build VPN between clients via virtual subnet.
vpn sameSubnet –I <value>
vpn sameSubnet –E <0/1>
vpn sameSubnet –e <value>
vpn sameSubnet –I <IP address>
vpn sameSubnet –o <add/del>
vpn sameSubnet –v
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
–I <value> It means to specify the index number of VPN profile.
<value>: Enter the index number of the VPN profile.
–E <0/1> It means to enable / disable the IpsecWithSameSubnet.
<0/1>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: Disable
1: Enable.
–e <value> It means to translate LAN subnet to virtual subnet.
<value>: Enter 1, 2
1: LAN1
2: LAN2
–I <IP address> Set the IP address as the virtual subnet.
–o <add/del> Specify the operation to be performed.
<add/del>: Enter add or del.
-v View the current settings. However, only the enabled profile will be
viewed.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> vpn sameS -i 1 -e 1 -E 1 -e 1 -I 10.10.10.0 -o add
> vpn sameS -v
IPsec with the same subnet:
VPN profile 1 enable,
% translated LAN1 to Virtual subnet: 10.10.10.0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
p
p
p
p
p
p
_
_
m
m
r
r
u
u
This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific
network.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan ppp_mru <WAN interface number> <MRU size >
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<WAN interface number>
<MRU size>
<WAN interface number>: Enter a number (1 ~5) to represent the
physical interface. (1 means WAN1, 2 means WAN2, ...)
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
568
<MRU size>: Enter a value (1400 ~ 1600) to set the number of PPP
LCP MRU.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
>wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1492
> wan ppp_mru 1 1490
>
> wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1490
> wan ppp_mru 1 1492
> wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1492
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
m
m
t
t
u
u
This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU for WAN1.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan mtu <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<value> It means the number of MTU for PPP. The available range is from
1000 to 1500.
For Static IP/DHCP, the maximum number will be 1500.
For PPPoE, the maximum number will be 1492.
For PPTP/L2TP, the maximum number will be 1460.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan mtu 1100
> wan mtu ?
Static IP/DHCP (Max MSS: 1500)
PPPoE(Max MSS: 1492)
PPTP/L2TP(Max MSS: 1460)
% wan ppp_mss <MSS size: 1000 ~ 1500>
% Now: 1100
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
d
d
n
n
s
s
This command allows you to configure the DNS server.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan dns <wan_no> <dns_select> <ipv4_addr>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<wan_no> <dns_select>
<ipv4_addr>
<wan_no>: Enter 1 or 2. It means to indicate the WAN interface.
1, WAN1
2, WAN2
<dns_select>: Enter pri or sec.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
569
pri, primary DNS
sec, secondary DNS
<ipv4_addr>: Enter the IPv4 address for the DNS server.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan dns 1 pri 192.168.1.126
% Set WAN1 primary DNS done.
% Now: 192.168.1.126
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
D
D
F
F
_
_
c
c
h
h
e
e
c
c
k
k
This command allows you to enable or disable the function of DF (Don’t fragment)
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan DF_check <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on, enable DF.
off, disable DF.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan DF_check on
%DF bit check enable!
> wan DF_check off
%DF bit check disable (reset DF bit)!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
d
d
i
i
s
s
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
This command allows you to disable WAN connection.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan disable WAN
%WAN disabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
e
e
n
n
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
This command allows you to disable wan connection.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan enable WAN
%WAN1 enabled.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
f
f
o
o
r
r
w
w
a
a
r
r
d
d
This command allows you to enable or disable the function of WAN forwarding. The packets
are allowed to be transmitted between different WANs.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan forward <on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
570
Parameter Description
<on/off> <on/off>: Enter on or off.
on, enable WAN forward.
off, disable WAN forward.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan forward ?
%WAN forwarding is Disable!
> wan forward on
%WAN forwarding is enable!
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
u
u
s
s
This command allows you to display the status of WAN connection, including connection mode,
TX/RX packets, DNS settings and IP address.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan status
WAN1: Offline, stall=Y
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0
WAN2: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0
PVC_WAN3: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0
PVC_WAN4: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0
PVC_WAN5: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
PVC_WAN6: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
PVC_WAN7: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(bps)=0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
571
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
d
d
e
e
t
t
e
e
c
c
t
t
This command allows you to configure WAN connection detection. When Ping Detection is
enabled (for Static IP or PPPoE mode), Router pings specified IP addresses to detect the WAN
connection.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan detect <wan1> <on/off/always_on>
wan detect <wan1> <off> -t <time>
wan detect <wan1> <off> -i <Interval>
wan detect <wan1> target <ip addr>
wan detect <wan1> ttl <1-255>
wan detect <wan1> target2 <ip addr>
wan detect <wan1> target_gw <1/0>
wan detect <wan1> interval <interval>
wan detect <wan1> retry <retry>
wan detect status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<wan1>
<on/off/always_on>
<wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<on/off/always_on>: Enter on, off, or always_on.
On, enable ping detection.
Off, enable the ARP detection.
Always_on, disable the link detection. The connnection is
always on.
<wan1> <off> -t <time> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<off>: Enter off.
<time>: Enter a time value. The default value is “30” and the
range shall be 1 to 255.
<wan1> <off> -i
<Interval>
<wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<off>: Enter off.
<interval>: Enter a value. It is the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation. The default value is “5” and it
shall be smaller than time setting.
<wan1> target <ip addr> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<ip addr>: Enter an IP address as the ping target.
<wan1> ttl <1-255> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<1-255>: It means to set the ping TTL value (work as trace
route)
If you do not set any value for ttl here or just type 0 here,
the system will use default setting (255) as the ttl value.
<wan1> target2 <ip addr> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<ip addr>: Enter an IP address as the the secondary ping
target.
<wan1> target_gw <1/0> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<1/0>: Enter 1 or 0 to set whether to use gateway as ping
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
572
target.
(1, yes; 0, no) Note that USB WAN (PPP mode) cannot support
PING gateway
<wan1>
interval<Interval>
<wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<interval>: Enter a value to set the interval between each
ping operation. Available setting is between 1 and 3600. The
unit is second.
<wan1> retry <retry> <wan1>: Enter wan1 to specify WAN1.
<retry>: Enter a number to set how many ping operations are
retried before the Router judges that the WAN connection is
disconnected. Available setting is between 1 and 255. The
unit is times.
status It means to show the current status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan detect status
WAN1: off, send time=30, Interval = 5
WAN2: off, send time=30, Interval = 5
WAN3: off, send time=30, Interval = 5
WAN4: off, send time=30, Interval = 5
WAN5: off, send time=30, Interval = 5
WAN6: off, send time=30, Interval = 5>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
m
m
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
This command allows you to configure multi-VLAN for WAN and LAN. It supports pure bridge
mode (modem mode) between Ethernet WAN and LAN port 2~4.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan mvlan <pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable> <on/off/clear/tag tag_no> <service
type/vlan priority> <px ... >
wan mvlan keeptag <pvc_no><on/off>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<pvc_no/status/save/ena
ble/disable>
<on/off/clear/tag
tag_no> <service
type/vlan priority>
<px ... >
<pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable>: see below,
<pvc_no>: Enter the index number of PVC. It means index
number of PVC. There are 8 PVC, 0(Channel-1) to
7(Channel-8) allowed to be configured.
However, bridge mode can be set on PVC number 2 to 7.
<status>: Enter status to display the whole Bridge status.
<save>: Enter save to save the configuration into flash of
Vigor router.
<enable>: Enter enable for enabling the Multi-VLAN
function.
<disable>: Enter disable for disabling the Multi-VLAN
function.
<on/off/clear/tag tag_no>: see below.
<on>: Enter on to turn on bridge mode for the specific
channel.
<off>: Enter off to turn off bridge mode for the specific
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
573
channel.
<clear>: Enter clear to clear the port setting.
<tag tag_no>: Enter a tag number (-1, 1~4095) for VLAN
(e.g, tag -1, tag 100, and etc.)
<service type/vlan priority>: Enter 0 or 1 (for service type, 0
for Normal, 1 for IGMP), or enter a value (0~7) for VLAN
priority.
<px ... >: Enter 2, 3 or 4. It means LAN port. Available setting
number is from 2 to 4. Port number 1 is locked for NAT usage.
keeptag It means Multi-VLAN packets will keep their VLAN headers to
LAN.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan mvlan 7 on p2
PVC Bridge p1 p2 Service Type Tag Priority
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 OFF 0 0 Normal 0(OFF) 0
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
m
m
u
u
l
l
t
t
i
i
f
f
n
n
o
o
This command allows you to specify a channel (in Multi-PVC/VLAN) to make bridge connection
to a specified WAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan multifno <channel #> <WAN interface #>
wan multifno status
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<channel #> <WAN interface
#>
<channel #>: Enter channel 5, channel 6, channel 7 or channel 8.
<WAN interface #>: Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the WAN interface.
1, WAN1
2, WAN2
status It means to display current bridge status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan multifno 5 1
% Configured channel 5 uplink to WAN1
> wan multifno status
% Channel 5 uplink ifno: 3
% Channel 6 uplink ifno: 3
% Channel 7 uplink ifno: 3
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
v
v
l
l
a
a
n
n
This command allows you to configure the VLAN tag of WAN1.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan vlan wan <#> tag <value>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
574
wan vlan wan <#> <enable/disable>
wan vlan wan <#> pri <value>
wan vlan stat
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
wan <#> tag <value> Specify which WAN interface will be tagged.
<#>: Enter 1 for WAN1.
tag: Type a number for tagging on WAN interface.
<value>: Enter a number.
wan <#> <enable/disable> <#>: Enter 1 for WAN1.
<enable/disable>: Enter enable or disable.
Enable: Specified WAN interface will be tagged.
Disable: Disable the function of tagging on WAN interface.
wan <#> pri <value> It means the priority for such VLAN.
<#>: Enter 1 for WAN1.
<value>: Enter 0 ~ 7.
stat Display current VLAN status.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan vlan stat
Interface Pri Tag Enabled
======================================
WAN1 (ADSL) 0 0
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
d
d
e
e
t
t
e
e
c
c
t
t
_
_
m
m
t
t
u
u
This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv4 target to
ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan detect_mtu -i <Host/IP address> -s <mtu_size> -d <decrease size> -w <1> -c <1-10>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-i <Host/IP address> -s
<mtu_size> -d <decrease
size> -w <1> -c <1-10>
-i <Host/IP address>: Enter the IP address/domain name of
the target to detect.
-s <mtu_size>: Enter a value (1000 ~ 1500) as the MTU size
you want to start to decrease.
-d <decrease size>: Enter a value (1 ~ 100) as the MTU size to
decrease between detections.
-w <1>: Enter 1 to specify WAN1.
-c <1~10>: Enter a value (1~10) to set the times to send the
ping packets out. Default value is 3.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan detect_mtu -w 1 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10
detecting mtu size:1500!!!
mtu size:1470!!!
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
575
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
a
a
n
n
d
d
e
e
t
t
e
e
c
c
t
t
_
_
m
m
t
t
u
u
6
6
This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to
ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wan detect_mtu6 -i <Host/IP address> -s <mtu_size> -w <1>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
-i <Host/IP address> -s
<mtu_size> -w <1>
-i <Host/IP address>: Enter the IPv6 address/domain name of
the target to detect.
-s <mtu_size>: Enter a value (1280 ~ 1500) as the MTU size
you want to start to decrease.
-w <1>: Enter 1 to specify WAN1.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wan detect_mtu6 -w 2 -i 2404:6800:4008:c06::5e -s 1500
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
a
a
c
c
l
l
This command allows the user to configure wireless access control settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl acl enable <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>
wl acl disable <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>
wl acl add <MAC> <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4> <comment> <isolate>
wl acl del <MAC>
wl acl mode <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4> <white/black>
wl acl show
wl acl showmode
wl acl clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
enable <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3
ssid4>
<ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>: Enter ssid1, ssid2, ssid3, or ssid4 to
enable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.
disable <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3
ssid4>
<ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>: Enter ssid1, ssid2, ssid3, or ssid4 to
disable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.
add <MAC> <ssid1 ssid2
ssid3 ssid4> <comment>
<isolate>
It means to associate a MAC address to certain SSID
interfaces' access control settings. The isolate setting will
limit the wireless client's network capabilities to accessing
the wireless LAN only.
[MAC] format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
or xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
or xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx
<MAC>: Enter a MAC address.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
576
<ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>: Enter ssid1, ssid2, ssid3, or ssid4 to
select SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.
<comment>: Enter a brief decription.
<isolate>: Enter isolate.
del <MAC> It means to delete a MAC address entry defined in the access
control list.
<MAC>: Enter a MAC address.
mode <ssid1 ssid2 ssid3
ssid4> <white/black>
It means to set white/black list for each SSID.
<ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4>: Enter ssid1, ssid2, ssid3, or ssid4 to
select SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.
<white/black>: Enter white or black.
wl acl show It means to show access control status.
wl acl showmode It means to show the mode for each SSID.
wl acl clean It means to clean all access control setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl acl add 00-1D-AA-93-9F-3C ssid1 test isolate
Set Done !!
> wl acl show
----------Mac Address Filter Status---------
SSID1: Disable
SSID2: Disable
SSID3: Disable
SSID4: Disable
----------MAC Address List----------
Index Attribute MAC Address Associated SSIDs Comment
1 s 00:1d:aa:93:9f:3c SSID1 test
s: Isolate the station from LAN
> wl acl showmode
SSID1: None
SSID2: None
SSID3: None
SSID4: None
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
c
c
o
o
n
n
f
f
i
i
g
g
This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless
connection.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl config mode <value>
wl config mode show
wl config channel <number>
wl config preamble <enable>
wl config txburst <enable>
wl config ssid <ssid_num><enable> <ssid_name> <hidden_ssid>
wl config security <SSID_NUMBER> <mode>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
57
7
wl config ratectl <ssid_num><enable> <upload download>
wl config isolate <ssid_num> <lan member>
wl config dtim <value>
wl config beaconperiod <value>
wl config radio <enable>
wl config frag <value>
wl config rts <value>
wl config rate_alg <value>
wl config country <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
mode <value> It means to select connection mode for wireless connection.
<value>: Enter 11bg, 11gn, 11bgn, 11n, 11g or 11b to set
connection mode for wireless connection.
mode show It means to display what the current wireless mode is.
channel <number> It means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN.
<number>: Enter 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 or 13.
number=0, means Auto
number=1, means Channel 1
….
number=13, means Channel 13.
preamble <enable> It means to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11
packet.
Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56
bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync
field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices
only support long preamble.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0, disable to use long preamble.
1, enable to use long preamble.
txburst <enable> It means to enhance the performance in data transmission
about 40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only
when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless
client) invoke this function at the same time.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0, disable the function.
1, enable the funciton.
ssid <ssid_num> <enable>
<ssid_name>
<hidden_ssid>
It means to set the name of the SSID, hide the SSID if
required.
<ssid_num>: Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3
or SSID4.
<enable>: Enter 1 or 0. 1, enable; 0, disable.
<ssid_name>: Enter a name for the specified SSID.
<hidden_ssid>: Enter 0 to hide the SSID or 1 to display the
SSID
security <SSID_NUMBER> It means to configure security settings for the wirelesss
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
578
<mode><key><index> connection.
<SSID_NUMBER>: Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2,
SSID3 or SSID4.
<mode>: Available settings are:
disable: No security.
wpa1x: WPA/802.1x Only
wpa21x: WPA2/802.1x Only
wpamix1x: Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only)
wep1x: WEP/802.1x Only
wpapsk: WPA/PSK
wpa2psk: WPA2/PSK
wpamixpsk: Mixed (WPA+WPA2)/PSK
wep: WEP
<key>: Enter a string. You have to add keys for wpapsk,
wpa2psk, wpamixpsk and wep, and specify index number of
schedule profiles to be followed by the wireless connection.
WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII text string or 10/26
Hexadecimal digit format; WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII
text string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format.
<index>: Enter an index number.
ratectl
<ssid_num><enable>
<upload download>
It means to set the rate control for the specified SSID.
<ssid_num>: Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3
or SSID4.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1. It means to enable the function of the
rate control for the specified SSID. 0: disable and 1:enable.
<upload>: Enter a value. It means to configure the rate
control for data upload. The unit is kbps.
<download>: Enter a value. It means to configure the rate
control for data download. The unit is kbps.
Isolate <ssid_num> <lan
member>
It means to isolate the wireless connection for LAN and/or
Member.
<ssid_num>: Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3
or SSID4.
<lan> – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with
remote-dial and LAN to LAN users not accessing for each
other. Enter 1 to enable, or 0 to disable.
<member> – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with
the same SSID not accessing for each other. Enter 1 to
enable, or 0 to disable.
dtim <value> <value>: Enter a number (1 ~255) to set DTIM.
beaconperiod <value> <value>: Enter a number (20 ~1023, unit in milli-seonds) as
beacon period.
radio <enable> <enable>: Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable the wireless
radio.
frag <value> <value>: Enter a number (256 ~2346) to set fragment
threshold.
rts <value> <value>: Enter a number (1 ~2347) to set RTS threshold.
rate_alg <value> <value>: Enter 0, or 1 to set the version of rate algorithm.
0, old algorithm
1, new algorithm
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
579
country <value> <value>: Enter two capital letters (e.g., TW) to specify the
country.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl config mode 11bgn
Current mode is 11bgn
% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel
> wl config channel 13
Current channel is 13
% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel.
> wl config preamble 1
Long preamble is enabled
% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters.
> wl config ssid 1 enable dray
SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name
1 1 0 dray
% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters.
> wl config security 1 wpa1x
%% Configured Wlan Security Setting:
% SSID1
%% Mode: wpa1x
%% Wireless card must be reset for configurations to take effect
%% (Telnet Command: wl restart)
> wl config isolate 1 1 1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
s
s
e
e
t
t
This command allows users to configure basic wireless settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl set <SSID> <CHAN> <En>
wl set txburst <enable>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<SSID> <CHAN> <En> <SSID>: Enter a SSID for the router. The maximum character
that you can use is 32.
<CHAN>: Enter a number (1~13) for selecting a channel.
<En>: Enter on or off.
on, enable the function.
off, disable the function.
txburst <enable> It means to enhance the performance in data transmission
about 40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only
when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless
client) invoke this function at the same time.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: disable the function.
1: enable the function.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl set MKT 2 on
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
580
% New Wlan Setting is:
% SSID=MKT
% Chan=2
% Wl is Enable
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
a
a
c
c
t
t
This command allows users to activate wireless settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl act <En>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<En> It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation.
<enable>: Enter 0 or 1.
0: diable
1: enable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl act on
% Set Wlan to Enable.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
581
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
i
i
s
s
o
o
_
_
v
v
p
p
n
n
This command allows users to activate the function of VPN isolation.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl iso_vpn <ssid> <En>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<ssid> <En>
<SSID>: Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify each SSID.
1, SSID1
2, SSID2
3, SSID3
4, SSID4
<En>: Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable the function of VPN
isolation.
0, disable
1, enable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl iso_vpn 1 on
% ssid: 1 isolate vpn on :1
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
w
w
m
m
m
m
This command allows users to set WMM for wireless connection. It defines the priority levels
for four access categories derived from 802.1d (prioritization tabs).
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl wmm ap QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM
wl wmm bss QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM
wl wmm ack Que0_Ack Que1_Ack Que2_Ack Que3_Ack
wl wmm enable SSID0 SSID1 SSID2 SSID3
wl wmm apsd value
wl wmm show
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
ap QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin
Cwmax Txop ACM
It means to set WMM for access point.
QueIdx means the number of the queue which the WMM
settings will be applied to. There are four queues, best
effort, background, voice, and video.
Aifsn controls how long the client waits for each data
transmission.
CWMin means contention Window-Min and CWMax
means contention Window-Max. Specify the value
ranging from 1 to 15.
Txop means transmission opportunity. Specify the value
ranging from 0 to 65535.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
582
ACM can restrict stations from using specific category
class if it is enabled.
Example:
wl wmm ap 0 3 4 6 0 0
bss QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin
Cwmax Txop ACM
It means to set WMM for wireless clients.
QueIdx means the number of the queue which the WMM
settings will be applied to. There are four queues, best
effort, background, voice, and video.
Aifsn controls how long the client waits for each data
transmission.
CWMin means contention Window-Min and CWMax
means contention Window-Max. Specify the value
ranging from 1 to 15.
Txop means transmission opportunity. Specify the value
ranging from 0 to 65535.
ACM can restrict stations from using specific category
class if it is enabled.
Example:
wl wmm bss 0 3 4 10 0 0
ack Que0_Ack Que1_Ack
Que2_Ack Que3_Ack
It means to map to the Ack policy settings of AP WMM.
Example:
wl wmm ack 0 0 0 0
enable SSID0 SSID1 SSID2
SSID3
It means to enable the WMM for each SSID.
0: disable
1: enable
Example:
wl wmm enable 1 1 1 1
Apsd [value] It means to enable / disable the ASPD(automatic power-save
delivery) function.
0: disable
1: enable
Example:
wl wmm apsd 1
show It displays current status of WMM.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl wmm ap 0 3 4 6 0 0
QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0
> wl wmm show
Enable WMM: SSID0 =1, SSID1 =1,SSID2 =1,SSID3 =1
APSD=0
QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0
QueIdx=1: APAifsn=7,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=10, APTxop=0,APACM=0
QueIdx=2: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=3,APCwmax=4, APTxop=94,APACM=0
QueIdx=3: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=2,APCwmax=3, APTxop=47,APACM=0
QueIdx=0: BSSAifsn=3,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSSTxop=0,BSSACM=0
QueIdx=1: BSSAifsn=7,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSSTxop=0,BSSACM=0
QueIdx=2: BSSAifsn=2,BSSCwmin=3,BSSCwmax=4, BSSTxop=94,BSSACM=0
QueIdx=3: BSSAifsn=2,BSSCwmin=2,BSSCwmax=3, BSSTxop=47,BSSACM=0
AckPolicy[0]=0: AckPolicy[1]=0,AckPolicy[2]=0,AckPolicy[3]=0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
583
>
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
584
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
h
h
t
t
This command allows you to configure wireless settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl ht bw value
wl ht gi value
wl ht badecline value
wl ht autoba value
wl ht rdg value
wl ht msdu value
wl ht txpower value
wl ht antenna value
wl ht greenfield value
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
bw value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for BW_20) and 1 (for BW_40).
gi value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for GI_800) and 1 (for GI_4001)
badecline value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).
autoba value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).
rdg value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).
msdu value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).
txpower value <value>: Enter 1 ~ 6 (level).
antenna value <value>: Enter 0,1,2 or3.
0, 2T3R
1, 2T2R
2, 1T2R
3, 1T1R
greenfield value <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0 (for mixed mode) and 1 (for green field).
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl ht bw value 1
BW=0
<Note> Please restart wireless after you set new parameters.
> wl restart
Wireless restart................
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
585
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
r
r
e
e
s
s
t
t
a
a
r
r
t
t
This command allows you to restart wireless setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl restart
Wireless restart................
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
w
w
d
d
s
s
This command allows you to configure WDS settings.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl wds mode <value>
wl wds security <value>
wl wds ap <value>
wl wds hello <value>
wl wds status
wl wds show
wl wds mac add <index addr>
wl wds mac <clear/disable/enable> <index/all>
wl wds flush
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
mode <value> It means to specify connection mode for WDS.
<value>: Enter d, b or or.
d, Disable
b, Bridge
r, Repeapter
security <value> It means to configure security mode with encrypted keys for WDS.
<value>: Available settings are:
disable: No security.
wep: WEP
wpapsk <key>: WPA/PSK
wpa2psk <key>: WPA2/PSK
key: Moreover, you have to add keys for wpapsk, wpa2psk, and wep,
and specify index number of schedule profiles to be followed by the
wireless connection.
WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII text string or 10/26 Hexadecimal
digit format; WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII text string or 64
Hexadecimal digit format.
e.g.,
wl dual wds security disable
wl dual wds security wep 12345
wl dual wds security wpa2psk 12345678
ap <value> It means to enable or disable the AP function.
<value>: Enter 1 or 0.
1,– enable the function.
0, disable the function.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
586
hello <value> It means to send hello message to remote end (peer).
<value>: Enter 1 or 0.
1, enable the function.
0, disable the function.
status It means to display WDS link status for 2.4GHz connection.
show It means to display current WDS settings.
mac add <index addr> add <index addr> –Enter the index number and the MAC address.
Add the peer MAC entry in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table.
e.g.,
wl wds mac add 1 00:1D:AA:93:9F:3C
mac <clear/disable/enable>
<index/all>
clear/disable/enable <index/all> - Clear, disable, enable the
specifed or all MAC entries in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table.
e.g,
wl dual wds mac enable 1
flush It means to reset all WDS setting.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl wds status
Please enable WDS hello function first.
> wl wds hello 1
% <Note> Please restart router after you set the parameters.
> wl wds status
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
b
b
t
t
n
n
c
c
t
t
l
l
This command allows you to enable or disable wireless button control.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl btnctl <value>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<value> <value>: Enter 0 or 1.
0, disable
1, enable
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl btnctl 1
Enable wireless botton control
Current wireless botton control is on
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
i
i
w
w
p
p
r
r
i
i
v
v
a
a
n
n
d
d
w
w
l
l
c
c
e
e
_
_
c
c
e
e
r
r
t
t
These commands are reserved for RD debug. Do not use them.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
e
e
f
f
u
u
s
s
e
e
This command is used to configure parameters related to wireless RF hardware. At present, it
is not allowed for end user to operate.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
58
7
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
w
w
l
l
s
s
t
t
a
a
l
l
i
i
s
s
t
t
This command is used to display the wireless station which accessing Internet via Vigor
router.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
wl stalist show
wl statlist num
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show Display the station list.
num Display the number of wireless station.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> wl stalist show
2.4G Wireless Station List :
Index Status IP Address MAC Address Associated with
Status Codes :
C: Connected, No encryption.
E: Connected, WEP.
P: Connected, WPA.
A: Connected, WPA2.
B: Blocked by Access Control.
N: Connecting.
F: Fail to pass WPA/PSK authentication.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
588
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
e
e
n
n
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
/
/
d
d
i
i
s
s
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
/
/
s
s
h
h
o
o
w
w
/
/
c
c
l
l
e
e
a
a
r
r
/
/
d
d
i
i
s
s
c
c
o
o
v
v
e
e
r
r
/
/
q
q
u
u
e
e
r
r
y
y
The apm command(s) is use to display, remove, discover or query the information of VigorAP
registered to Vigor2620.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm enable
amp disable
apm show
apm clear
apm discover
apm query
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
enable Enable the APM function.
disable Disable the APM function.
show It displays current information of APM profile.
clear It is used to remove all of the APM profile.
discover It is used to search VigorAP on LAN.
query It is used to query any VigorAP which has been registered to
APM (Central AP Management) in Vigor2620. Information
related to the registered AP will be send back to Vigor2620
for updating the web page of Central AP Management.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm clear ?
Clear all clients ... done
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
p
p
r
r
o
o
f
f
i
i
l
l
e
e
This command allows to configure wireless profiles to be used in Central AP Management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm profile clone <from index><to index><new name>
apm profile del <index>
apm profile reset
apm profile summary
apm profile show <profile index>
apm profile apply <profile index> <client index1<index2 .. index5>>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
clone <from index><to
index><new name>
It is used to copy the same parameters settings from one
profile to another APM profile.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
589
<from index>: Enter the index number of the profile. It is the
original APM profile to be cloned to other APM profile.
<to index>: Enter an index number. It is the target profile
which will clone the parameters settings from an existed APM
profile.
<new name>: Enter a name for a new APM profile.
del <index> It is used to delete a specified APM profile. The default
(index #1) should not be deleted.
<index>: Enter the index number of existed profile.
reset It is used to reset to factory settings for WLAN profile.
summary It is used to list all of the APM profiles with required
information.
show <profile index> It is used to display specified APM profile.
<profile index>: Enter the index number of existed profile.
apply <profile index>
<client index1<index2 ..
index5>>
It is used to apply the selected APM profile onto specified
VigorAP.
<profile index>: Enter the index number of existed profile.
<client index1... index5>: Enter the index number of the
selected APM profiel to the specified VigorAP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm profile clone 1 2 forcarrie
(Done)
> apm profile summary
# Name SSID Security ACL RateCtrl(U/D)
- ---------------- ---------------- ------------ ------- ------
0 Default DrayTek-LAN-A WPA+WPA2/PSK x - / -
DrayTek-LAN-B WPA+WPA2/PSK x - / -
1 - - - - -
2 forcarrie DrayTek Disable x - / -
3 - - - - -
4 - - - - -
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
c
c
a
a
c
c
h
h
e
e
This command is used to display or remove the information of registered VigorAP, including
MAC address, name, and authentication. Up to 30 entries of registered information can be
stored and displayed.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm cache show
apm cache clear
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
show It means to display the information related to VigorAP
registered Vigor2620.
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
590
clear It means to remove the information related to VigorAP
registered Vigor2620.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm cache show
MAC Name Auth
------------ -------------------- --------------------
>
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
l
l
b
b
c
c
f
f
g
g
This command allows to set parameters related to AP management control.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm lbcfg <set> <value>
apm lbcfg <show>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<set> <value> It means to set the load balance configuration file for APM.
<set>: Enter 1 ~ 11.
<value>: Enter 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
Each number represents different setting value.
[1] – The first number means the load balance function.
1 – enable load balance,
0 – disable load balance.
[2] – The second number means the station limit function.
1 –enable station limit,
0 – disable station limit.
[3] – The third number means the traffic limit function.
1 – enable traffic limit,
0 – disable traffic limit.
[4] – The forth number means the limit num of station.
Available range is 3~64.
[5] – The fifth number means the upload limit function.
1 – enable upload limit,
0 – disable upload limit.
[6] – The sixth number means the download limit function.
1 – enable download limit,
0 – disable download limit.
[7] – The seventh number means disassociation by idle time.
1 – enable disassociation,
0 – disable disassociation.
[8] – The eighth number means to enable or disable
disassociation by signal strength.
1 – enable disassociation,
0 – disable disassociation.
[9] – The ninth number means to determine the unit of traffic
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
591
limit (for upload)
1 – Mbps
0 – kbps
[10] – The tenth number means to determine the unit of
traffic limit (for download)
1 – Mbps
0 – kbps
[11] - Define the RSSI threshold (-200 ~ -50 dbm)
show It shows the configuration value.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm lbcfg set 1 1 1 32 100 200 1 1 1 0 -200
> apm lbcfg show
apm LoadBalance Config :
1. Enable LoadBalance : 1
2. Enable station limit : 1
3. Enable traffic limit : 1
4. Limit Number : 32
5. Upload limit : 100
6. Download limit : 200
7. Enable disassociation by idle time : 1
8. Enable disassociation by Signal strength : 1
9. Traffic limit unit (upload) : 1
10.Traffic limit unit (download) : 0
11.RSSI threshold : -200
flag : 31
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
a
a
p
p
s
s
y
y
s
s
l
l
o
o
g
g
This command is used to display the AP syslog data coming form VigorAP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm apsyslog <AP_Index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<AP_Index> Specify the index number which represents VigorAP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm apsyslog 1
8d 02:46:09 syslog: [APM] Send Rogue AP Detection data.
8d 02:53:04 syslog: [APM] Run AP Detection / Discovery.
8d 02:56:09 syslog: [APM] Send Rogue AP Detection data.
8d 03:00:42 kernel: 60:fa:cd:55:f5:ea had disassociated.
8d 03:03:12 syslog: [APM] Run AP Detection / Discovery.
8d 03:06:09 syslog: [APM] Send Rogue AP Detection data.
8d 03:13:21 syslog: [APM] Run AP Detection / Discovery.
8d 03:16:10 syslog: [APM] Send Rogue AP Detection data.
8d 03:16:41 kernel: 60:fa:cd:55:f5:ea had associated successfully
8d 03:16:55 kernel: 60:fa:cd:55:f5:ea had disassociated.
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
s
s
y
y
s
s
l
l
o
o
g
g
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
592
This command is used to display related syslog data from central AP management.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm syslog
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm syslog
"2015-11-04 12:24:21", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Detection
Data from AP"
2015-11-04 12:24:56", "[APM] [VigorAP900
_
01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Detection
Data from AP Success"
2015-11-04 12:34:21", "[APM] [VigorAP900
_
01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Detection
Data from AP"
2015-11-04 12:34:57", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa90208
0
] Get Rogue AP Detection
Data from AP Success"
T
T
e
e
l
l
n
n
e
e
t
t
C
C
o
o
m
m
m
m
a
a
n
n
d
d
:
:
a
a
p
p
m
m
s
s
t
t
a
a
n
n
u
u
m
m
This command is used to display the total number of the wireless clients, no matter what
mode of wireless connection (2.4G WLAN or 5G WLAN) used by wireless clients to access into
Internet through VigorAP.
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
apm stanum <AP_Index>
S
S
y
y
n
n
t
t
a
a
x
x
D
D
e
e
s
s
c
c
r
r
i
i
p
p
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
Parameter Description
<AP_Index> Specify the index number which represents VigorAP.
E
E
x
x
a
a
m
m
p
p
l
l
e
e
> apm stanum
% Show the APM AP Station Number data.
% apm stanum AP_Index.
% ex : apm stanum 1
% Idx Nearby(2.4/5G) Conn(2.4/5G)
% 1 2 5 0 0
% 2 2 5 1 0
% 3 2 5 1 0
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
593
I
I
n
n
d
d
e
e
x
x
6rd Mode, 78
6rd Prefix, 78
6rd Prefix Length, 78
Access Control, 163
Access Mode, 47
Access Mode - Ethernet, 47
Activation, 298
Active Mode, 44, 46
Address Mapping, 145
Administrator Password, 279
ADSL/VDSL2, 44
Advance Mode, 233
Advanced Setting, 169
Aggregation MSDU, 169
AH, 198
Always On, 46, 65, 70, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78, 82
AP Discovery, 172
AP Maintenance, 317, 325
AP Map, 317
APP Enforcement, 229
APP Enforcement Filter, 249
APP Enforcement Profile, 251
Applications, 124
APSD Capable, 170
ARP Cache Table, 365
ARP Detect, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 82
ARP Table, 110
Auth Type, 127
Authentication Mode, 165
Auto detect, 24
Auto Logout, 10
Auto-Update interval, 125
Aux. WAN IP, 120
Backup, 110
Backup MX, 127
Bandwidth Limit, 300, 304
Bind IP to MAC, 108
Bind to WAN, 210
Bridge, 167
Bridge Mode, 55, 61
Bridge Subnet, 55
Brute Force Protection, 291
Cache, 258
Call Direction, 199
Call Filter, 225
Certificate Backup, 223
Certificate Management, 216
Change the TTL value, 63, 66
Channel, 80, 157, 159
Channel Bandwidth, 169
Choose IP, 118
Codepage, 230
Comment, 110, 120
Config Backup, 16
Configuration Backup, 283
Configure via Client PinCode, 165
Configure via Push Button, 165
Connection Management, 208
Connection Type, 127
Connectivity, 42
Country Code, 171
CSM, 249
CSV file, 334, 337
Dashboard, 12, 318
Data Filter, 225
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
594
Data Flow Monitor, 371
DataType, 47
Daylight Saving, 287
Default Lifetime, 102
Default MAC Address, 52, 58, 61, 64, 66
Default Preference, 102
Default Rule, 229
Destination Port, 131
Details - PPPoE, 48
Details Page, 47
Details-IP Routed Subnet, 98
Details-IPv6-6in4 Static Tunnel, 76
Details-IPv6-6rd, 78
Details-Ipv6-AICCU, 73
Details-IPv6-DHCPv6 Client, 74
Details-IPv6-Offline, 70
Details-IPv6-PPP, 70
Details-IPv6-Static IPv6, 75
Details-IPv6-TSPC, 71
Details-LAN-DMZ, 96
Details-LAN-Ethernet, 94
Details-MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP, 52, 59
Details-PPPoE, 56, 62
Details-PPTP/L2TP, 68
Details-Static IP or Dynamic IP, 64
Determine Real WAN IP, 127
DHCP, 36
DHCP Client Identifier, 53, 59
DHCP Server Configuration, 94, 96, 99
DHCP Server IP Address, 94, 96
DHCP Table, 367
DHCPv6 (Stateful), 100
DHCPv6 Server, 101
Diagnostics, 362, 363
Dial-out Triggering, 363
Digital Signature, 182, 197
Display Name, 45, 46, 47
DMZ Host, 117
DNS Cache Table, 369
DNS Server IP Address, 54, 60, 67, 95, 97
DNS Server IPv6 Address, 101
Domain Name, 66
DoS Defense, 226, 241, 244
DoS Flood Table, 377
DrayTek Banner, 239
DSL Mode, 45
DSL Modem Code, 45
DSL Status, 376
Dynamic DNS, 124, 125
Dynamic DNS Account, 127
Each /Shared, 305
Enable PING to keep alive, 65
Encapsulating, 53
Encapsulating Type, 49
End IPv6 Address, 101
End Port, 121
ESP, 198
Event Code, 277
Event Log, 327
Extension WAN, 102
Failover, 46
Failover to/Failback, 145
File Extension Object, 348
Filter Setup, 232
Firewall, 225
Firmware Upgrade, 297
Fixed IP, 51, 57, 64, 69, 82
Force Update, 125
Fragment Length, 170
Gateway IP Address, 53, 59, 66, 94, 96
General Setup, 44
Get Community, 288
Green Field, 169
Group ID, 134
Guard Interval, 169
GUI Map, 15
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
595
Hardware Installation, 6
Hide SSID, 160
Host Name, 36
Idle Timeout, 64, 82, 196
IGMP, 133
IGMP Proxy, 133
IGMP Snooping, 133
IKE Authentication Method, 203
Installation, i
Inter-LAN Routing, 93
Internet Access, 47
Internet Access - Advanced, 47
IP (Internet Protocol), 43
IP Address, 53, 59, 66, 69, 94, 96, 98
IP Address Assignment Method(IPCP), 69
IP Address From ISP, 57
IP Bind List, 110
IP Filters, 225
IP Object, 333
IP Pool Counts, 94, 96, 99
IP Routed Subnet, 304
IPsec General Setup, 191
IPsec Tunnel, 196
IPTV, 82
IPv4 Border Relay, 78
IPv4 Mask Length, 78
IPv6 Address, 75
IPv6 Gateway Address, 75
IPv6 Group, 340
IPv6 Neighbour Table, 366
IPv6 Object, 338
IPv6 TSPC Status, 376
Isolate, 160
ISP Access Setup, 49, 56, 62, 68
ISP Name, 82
keep alive, 199
Keep Alive Period, 278
Keep WAN Connection, 65
Keyword Group, 347
Keyword Object, 345
LAN, 90
LAN- General Setup, 92
LAN Routed Prefix, 76
LAN to LAN, 198
Lease Time, 94, 96, 99
Load Balance, 329
Load Balance for AP, 317
Local Certificate, 182, 217
Local ID, 198
Local IP Address, 120
Log, 255
Login, 40
Login Name, 127
Logout, 17
Long Preamble, 169
Mail Extender, 127
Main Screen, 10
Management, 273, 290
Min/Max Interval Time, 102
Mode, 156, 162
Modem Setting (for ADSL only), 56, 59
Modem Settings, 49
Modem Settings (for ADSL only), 53
Modulation, 49, 53
mOTP, 196, 212
MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP, 27
MPPE, 189
MTU, 50, 54, 57, 61, 63, 66, 68, 102
Multicast via VPN, 196, 212
Multiple SSID, 152
Multi-PVC channel, 49, 53
Multi-VLAN, 80
MyVigor, 257
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
596
Name Link, 13
NAT, 112
NAT Sessions Table, 368
NAT Traversal, 132
Netbios Naming Packet, 196
Network Configuration, 94, 96, 98
Network Interface, 150
Notification Object, 353
NS Detect, 74
Objects Settings, 332
Online Statistics, 307
Open Ports, 120
Operation Mode, 169
Option Number, 47
Packet-OVERDRIVE, 170
PAP, 189
Password, 49, 56, 62, 68, 72, 73, 82
Password Strength, 162, 280
Path MTU Discovery, 50, 54, 57, 61, 63, 66, 68
Peer ID, 187
Physical Connection, 17
Physical Mode, 44, 45, 46, 47
Physical Type, 29, 44
PIN Code, 212
Ping Detect, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 70, 72, 73, 74, 75,
76, 78
Ping Diagnosis, 370
Ping Gateway IP, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 82
Ping Interval, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 82
PING Interval, 65
Ping IP/Hostname, 70, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78
Ping Retry, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 82
Port Redirection, 113
Port Triggering, 122
Port-based Bridge, 80
Port-Based VLAN, 105
PPP Authentication, 51, 57, 64, 69, 82
PPP General Setup, 189
PPP Setup, 69
PPPoE, 21, 29
PPPoE Pass-through, 51, 58
PPPoE/PPPoA, 23
PPTP, 196
PPTP/L2TP, 32
Prefix Len, 150
Prefix Length, 75
Pre-shared Key, 167
Pre-Shared Key (PSK), 162
Primary DNS Sever, 101
Primary IP Address, 95, 97
Primary/Secondary Ping IP, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 82
Priority, 24, 28, 45, 106, 145
Private IP, 115
Private IP Address, 43
Private Port, 115
Production Registration, 40
Protocol, 49
Provider Host, 127
Psec Peer Identity, 192
Public IP Adderss, 43
Public Port, 115
Quality of Service, 300, 306
Quick Access, 14
Quick Start Wizard, 20
RADIUS/TACACS+, 124, 131
Rate Adaptation Algorithm, 170
Rate Control, 91
Reboot System, 296
Recipient, 135
Registering Vigor Router, 40
Relay Agent, 94, 96
Remote Access Control, 188
Remote Dial-in User, 195
Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address, 76
Repeater, 168
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
59
7
Restore, 110
RIP Protocol, 55, 61, 66
RIPng Protocol, 71, 74, 76, 102
Root CA, 221
Route Policy, 145
Router Advertisement Configuration, 102
Router Name, 66, 285
Routing, 145
Routing Information Protocol, 91
Routing Table, 364
RTS Threshold, 170
Scan, 172
Schedule, 124, 128, 160
Secondary DNS Server, 101
Secondary IP Address, 95, 97
Security, 161, 224
Security Key, 157
Self-signed, 210
Self-Signed Certificate, 294
Server Address, 68
Server Certificate, 210
Server IP Address, 131
Server Response, 127
Service Activation Wizard, 38
Service API, 127
Service Name, 25, 62, 115
Service Provider, 127, 351
Service Type Group, 343
Service Type Object, 341
Sessions Control, 229
Sessions Limit, 300, 302
Set Community, 288
Set to Factory Default, 125, 128, 146
Setup Query Server, 258
Shared Secret, 131
SLAAC(stateless), 100
Smart Bandwidth Limit, 305
SMS / Mail Alert Service, 135
SMS Provider, 135
SMS/Mail Service Object, 350
SNMP, 288
Source IP, 115, 121
Specify an IP address, 59
Specify Remote Node, 196
SPI, 226
SSID, 157
SSL Tunnel, 196
SSL VPN, 209
Start IP Address, 94, 96, 99
Start IPv6 Address, 101
Start Port, 121
Static IP, 34
Static Route, 91, 146
Static Route for IPv6, 149
Station List, 154, 174
Station Number, 328
Stations (STA), 152
Status, 319
Strict Bind, 110
Strict Security Checking, 239
Strict Security Firewall, 228
String Object, 355
STUN Settings, 278
Subnet, 106
Subnet Mask, 53, 59, 66, 69, 94, 96, 98
Subnet Prefix, 73
Syslog/Mail Alert, 285
System Maintenance, 274
System Status, 275
Tag value, 24, 28, 45
Tagged VLAN, 105
Temperature Sensor, 327
Time and Date, 287
Time Schedule, 305
Time Server, 287
Time Zone, 287
Total Traffic, 328
TR-069, 277
Trace Route, 375
Traffic Graph, 326, 374
Trap Community, 289
Troubleshooting, 361
Vigor2620 Series User’s Guide
598
Trusted CA, 222
Trusted CA Certificate, 221
TSPC, 71
TTL (Time to Live), 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 70, 72, 73,
74, 75, 76, 78, 82
Tunnel Broker, 72, 73
Tunnel ID, 73
Tunnel TTL, 76
TX Power, 170
Unique Local Address (ULA), 101
UPnP, 124, 132
URL Access Control, 255
URL Content Filter, 230, 249
URL Content Filter Profile, 253
User Account, 211
User Password, 280
Username, 49, 56, 62, 68, 72, 73, 82
VCI, 53
VID, 106
Virtual LAN, 91
Virtual Panel, 13
Virtual WAN, 19
VLAN, 105
VLAN Configuration, 107
VLAN Tag, 80, 106
VLAN Tag insertion, 24, 28, 45
VPI, 53
VPN, 176
VPN and Remote Access, 177
VPN Client Wizard, 178
VPN Server Wizard, 184
WAN, 43
WAN Connection Detection, 50, 54, 57, 60, 62, 65, 70,
72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78
WAN Interface, 115, 120
WAN IP Alias, 53, 57, 59, 64, 66, 69
WAN IP Network Settings, 53, 59, 66, 69
WAN Setup, 82
WAN Type, 80
WDS, 166
Web Console, 16
Web Content Filter, 230, 249
Web Content Filter Profile, 257
Web Feature, 256
WEP, 153, 162
white/black list, 163
Wildcard, 127
Wireless LAN, 151
Wireless Wizard, 156
Wizard Mode, 233
WLAN Isolation, 153
WLAN Profile, 320
WMM Capable, 170
WPA, 153, 162
WPS, 154, 164
602

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Draytek Vigor 2620 LTE series bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Draytek Vigor 2620 LTE series in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 7,63 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info